Home

MySQL Workbench

1. This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution Jean loup Gailly jloup gzip org Mark Adler madler alumni caltech edu 352 Appendix B MySQL Workbench FAQ Frequently Asked Questions with answers Questions e B 1 353 How does MySQL Workbench increase import performance e B 2 353 MySQL Workbench 5 0 appears to run slowly How can increase performance e B 3 354 get errors when creating or placing objects on an EER Diagram am using OpenGL rendering AMD processor and ATI graphics hardware e B 4 854 What do the column flag acronyms PK NN UQ BIN UN ZF Al in the MySQL Workbench Table Editor mean Questions and Answers B 1 How does MySQL
2. ccccecccceeeeeeeeee cece ae ea eeteeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeees 64 7 4 Create EER Model from SQL Script 0 ccccceee cece ceeeee cece teen eae ee eeeeeeeeee ae aa ea eeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaea 64 FB MOdel o TIe AEE A EA E TAT Ubtveda stage ceadaed tends E 65 Tots Modeling Men s 4 ccdiiiesdedceittadesciediadeetitadesieadedcelsnacaijnisdeasededeidie dadeeitindessueiiaianeedeiels 66 o2 TNO TOOWDAM ses scecanetearcenasveccesseeteceacivvedsngs a aa aae a fens A aaa a Reia fede dented 76 Toa EER Diagrams eann a E AEA OE TEON EE ET 77 7 5 4 The Physical Schemata Panel ccceceeeeeee ee ae ee eeee ener sees ae aa ea ceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeseeeeeeeeeaeaaeeees 77 7 5 5 The Schema Privileges Panel cccccceceeeeeee cece ae eceeeeeeee sees aa ea ea eeeeeeeeseaaaaaaeeeeeeeeseaeaaenees 78 7 5 6 The SQL Scripts Panel ccccecceeee eee ee eeee cree ee ee ae ea eee eeeeee ee aaaaaaeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaees 79 1 5 7 The Model Notes Panel ivcccetenesacsaivcnel Soetekicvanvendelnadiecssavegessonvseecsiavekeetenedieebaavenedds 79 FAB The History Palette ecicitec eo veende veevckee vx cnecct weneek te we epcnct s nay AANEREN ARAE wep cece wy NESEN EENKEER EEKEREN EEKE EEE 79 7 5 9 The Model Navigator Panel cccccceceeseeeeeeeececeeeaaeeteeeeeeecaaeaaaaeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeseeaaaaaaes 80 7 5 10 The Catalog Tree Palette 00 0 cece eeeeee cece eee eeeeeeee tees eae eae eeeeeeeeaeaaaa
3. done The following demonstrates launching the console using the commands shown above but piped into the console on the command line The results are the same as above echo set SERVER root host123 mysqldiskusage server S SERVER mysqluc The following demonstrates launching the console and setting variables via the command line mysqluc SERVER root host123 VAR_A 57 e show variables Variable Value SERVER rootthost 123 VAR_A S7 13 3 20 mysqluserclone Clone Existing User to Create New User This utility uses an existing MySQL user account on one server as a template and clones it to create one or more new user accounts with the same privileges as the original user The new users can be created on the original server or a different server 310 mysqluserclone Clone Existing User to Create New User To list users for a server specify the 1 ist 311 option This prints a list of the users on the source no destination is needed To control how to display list output use one of the following values with the format 811 option OPTIONS grid default Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor csv Display output in comma separated values format tab Display output in tab separated format vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysql monitor mysqluserclone accepts the following command line options he
4. Test Basic database example Test Basic database example 258 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database Data for table util_test t3 INSERT INTO util_test t3 VALUES i Vill test fkeys 2 15 test fkeys 3 16 test fkeys Data for table util_test t4 INSERT INTO util_test t4 VALUES 35 2 2 done To export a database and include the replication commands to use the current server as the master for example to start a new slave using the current server as the master use the following command mysqldbexport server root localhost 3311 util_test export both rpl user rpl rpl rpl master v Source on localhost connected Stopping slave STOP SLAVE Source on localhost connected Exporting metadata from util_test DROP DATABASE IF EXISTS util_test CREATE DATABASE util_test USE util_test TABLE util_test t1 CREATE TABLE yell Ta char 30 DEFAULT NULL ENGINE MEMORY DEFAULT CHARSET latinl done Source on localhost connected USE weal pest Exporting data from util_test Data for table whil test t1 NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 01 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 02 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 03 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 04 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 05 Test Basic database
5. source root pass localhost 3310 test123 mysql sock y destination root pass localhost 3310 test123 mysql sock N Wie WIL KSCic BUiew I Teese _CCjeny Source on localhost connected Destination on localhost connected Copying database util_test renamed as util_test_copy Copying TABLE util test tl Copying table data Copying TABLE util_test t2 Copying table data Copying TABLE util_test t3 Copying table data Copying TABLE util_test t4 Copying table data Copying VIEW util_test vl Copying TRIGGER util_test trg Copying PROCEDURE util_test pl Copying FUNCTION util_test fl Copying EVENT util_test el Copying GRANTS from util_test done If the database to be copied does not contain only InnoDB tables and you want to ensure data integrity of the copied data by locking the tables during the read step add a locking lock a11 250 option to the command mysqldbcopy source root pass localhost 3310 test123 mysql sock destination root pass localhost 3310 test123 mysql sock util_test util_test_copy locking lock all Source on localhost connected Destination on localhost connected Copying database util_test renamed as util_test_copy Copying TABLE util_test tl Copying table data Copying TABLE util_test t2 Copying table data Copying TABLE util_test t3 Copying table data 252 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Databas
6. ODBC Driver is ODBC Driver lt a Manager Other A Pa RDBMS ODBC Driver MySQL MySQL Workbench lt MySQL gt When specifying the source RDBMS you can either use a data source configured externally or provide the individual connection parameters to MySQL Workbench If you already have an ODBC Data Source configured in your system then you can use that in MySQL Workbench 10 1 1 ODBC Libraries Linux Note R This section may be skipped when using a MySQL Workbench binary that is provided by Oracle An ODBC Driver Manager library must be present Both Windows and Mac OS X provides one iODBC MySQL Workbench binaries provided by Oracle already include iODBC and no additional action is required If you compile it yourself you must install iODBC or unixODBC iODBC is recommended You can use the iODBC library provided by your distribution pyodbc is the Python module used by MySQL Workbench to interface with ODBC and may be used to migrate ODBC compliant databases such as PostgreSQL and DB2 In Windows and Mac OS X it is included with Workbench In Linux binaries provided by Oracle also include pyodbc 186 ODBC Drivers If you re using a self compiled binary make sure you have the latest version and that it is compiled against the ODBC manager library that you chose whether it is iODBC or unixODBC As of version 3 0 6 pyodbc will compile against unixODBC by default If you are compili
7. e Update Statement Copies an UPDATE statement to update all columns 4 e Delete Statement Copies a DELETE statement in the form DE WHERE lt where_condition gt ETE FROM world country Send to SQL Editor Provides functionality similar to Copy to Clipboard However this item inserts the SQL code directly into the SQL Query panel where it can be edited further as required Alter Table Displays the table editor loaded with the details of the table Create Table Launches a dialog to enable you to create a new table Drop Table Drops the table All data in the table will be lost if this operation is carried out Refresh All Refreshes all schemata in the explorer by resynchronizing with the server Right clicking an empty area inside the object browser displays the following menu items Create Schema Enables you to create a new schema on the connected server You can apply your changes to synchronize with the live server by clicking the Apply button Refresh All Synchronizes with the live server to update the information displayed by the schemata explorer 62 Chapter 7 Data Modeling Table of Contents 7 1 Open an Existing EER Model 0 cccecceeeeeeee cece eee eee eter ee ee eee ete ee sees esse aa aaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 64 2 Create New EER Model sitezs ccicieuiets cloned Hetero dade dee ede deeds 64 7 3 Create EER Model from Existing Database
8. 191 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 5 MySQL Workbench migration Fetch Schemata List FS Migration X File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Fetch Schema List OVERVIEW 9 gt Overview The following tasks will now be performed Please monitor the execution SOURCE amp TARGET The names of available schemas will be retrieved from the source RDBMS The account used for v n the connection will need to have appropriate privileges for listing and reading the schemas you Source Selection want to migrate Target RDBMS connection settings will also be checked for validity Y Target Selection Schemata Selection Ciete DMS Reverse Engineer Source O Check target DBMS connection O Retrieve schema list from source OBJECT MIGRATION Source Objects Migration Click Next gt to execute Manual Editing Target Creation Options Create Schemata Create Target Results DATA MIGRATION Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer REPORT Migration Report Schemata Selection Choose the schemata you want to migrate Schema Name Mapping Method options while migrating Microsoft SQL Server Keep schemata as they are Catalog Schema Table gt Schema Table This will create multiple databases one per schema e Only one schema Catalog Schema Table gt Catalog Table Merges each schema into a single database Only one schema keep current schema n
9. 43 44 Chapter 6 SQL Development Table of Contents 6 1 Open Connection to Start Querying 2 0 0 cece cece ceee cece eter ae aa eeeeeeeeee aa eaeeteeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeeeeaeaaaaees 45 G2 New Connect eoe oar A EA a daca sQauhaenwedbandcessaeahacddsdeacgaaeaermed 46 6 3 Edit Table Dat iie aaa a aaa aa a T a E ae aaa TA 46 6 4 Edt SOAL SGML riin EEEE E E R A O aa 46 6 5 Manage Connections isd elas ee a e a aa a ae p aee aaa a eer lav eee elev 46 6 6 Manage DB Connections Dialog cccceeceeeeeeeeeee ee ee eee eeeeee tees ee aaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneneeeees 46 6 6 1 The Password Storage Vault 2 00 0 ceccceeceeceeee cece ce ee ae teeter ar i araa ra eaaa a blanak kan 47 6 6 2 Standard TCP IP Connection ccccceccceeeeeeeeee tees ce eeeeeeeeeeee ee aeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeseeeeaeaaenaes 48 6 6 3 Local Socket Pipe Connection a ea aree a ae cece ee eeeeeeeeee ea a aaae ea EAEE eaaa aAa EAE eS 49 6 6 4 Standard TCP IP over SSH Connection ccceceeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeneeeeeeeeeaeaaeneeeeeeees 50 6 7 SQL o lO A EEA E EAE TT E T E 50 ez sM Menih i a a a a a a eaan 51 TAA TOO Dales ii eet ahs Oi A E E E E AE E AE J 53 61723 SOLE QUe PaE iia a iis aaah ia cue aa EAE A AE 53 6 72 42 Mam Vabsheets r a a a a a A a a aa a Aaa a aa a eee aaa RGA 54 67 5 SIMG Dal asa a a a a a a a 57 MySQL Workbench provides extensive facilities for working directly with SQL c
10. INTO ne for table wtil_test Eik util test t VALUES Basic database exampl atabase exampl atabase exampl atabase exampl atabase exampl Basic database exampl for table util_test t2 T INTO Basic a Basic d Basic d Basic d util_test t2 VALUES Basic database exampl Basic database exampl for table util_test t3 INTO 15 test fkeys 16 test fkeys Data for table util_test t4 util_test t3 VALUES util_test t4 VALUES connected ee E E e S 1 Test Basic database example Test Basic database example 14 test fkeys If the database to be exported does not contain only InnoDB tables and you want to ensure data integrity of the exported data by locking the tables during the read step add a locking lock al1 256 option to the command mysqldbexport server root pass localhost export DATA bulk insert util_test locking lock all Source on localhost USE ut Data INSERT 02 INSERT 2 aia ii test Exporting data from util_test INTO lest lest LESE LESE lest Test INTO Test lest for table utilitest Elk util_test tl VALUES Basic database exampl atabase exampl atabase exampl atabase exampl atabase exampl Basic database exampl for table util test t2 Basic d Basic d Basic d Basic cd util_test t2 VALUES Basic database exampl Basic database exampl connected Il Sa Se TE R
11. Select the Schemata to be Processed E dvdcollection E informationschema E mydb E mysql E test V world After you have selected the desired schemata click the Next button to continue The wizard then displays the tasks it carried out and summarizes the results of the operation 114 Reverse Engineering Figure 7 22 Retrieve Object Information Connection Options Retrieve Object Information Connect to DBMS Select Schemata The following tasks will now be executed Please monitor the execution Press Show Logs to see the execution logs Fetch Object Info amp Retrieve Objects from Selected Schemata Check Results Retrieval Completed Successfully Finished Review the results before clicking Next to continue The next page is the Select Objects page It has a section for each object type present in the schema tables views routines and so forth This page is of special interest if you do not wish to import all the objects from the existing database It gives you the option of filtering which objects are imported Each section has a Show Filter button Click this button if you do not want to import all the objects of a specific type 115 Reverse Engineering Figure 7 23 Select Objects Connection Options 7 Select Objects to Reverse Engineer Connect to DBMS Select Schemata Fetch Object Info V Import MySQL Table Objects Select Objects V Place imported obj
12. slave on host2 connected Test Description Status Checking for binary logging on master pass Are there binlog exceptions pass Replication user exists pass Checking server_id values pass Is slave connected to master pass Check master information file pass 298 mysqlrplcheck Check Replication Prerequisites Checking InnoDB compatibility pass Checking storage engines compatibility pass Checking lower_case_table_names settings pass Checking slave delay seconds behind master pass done As shown in the example you must provide valid login information for both the master and the slave To perform the same command but also display the contents of the master information file on the slave and the values of SHOW SLAVE STATUS as well as additional details use this command mysqlrplcheck master root host1 3310 slave root host2 3311 show slave status vv master on hostl connected slave on host2 connected Test Description Status Checking for binary logging on master pass Are there binlog exceptions pass Replication user exists pass Checking server_id values pass master id 10 slave id 11 Is slave connected to master pass Check master information file pass Master information file Master_Log_File clone bin 000001 Read_Master_Log_Pos 482 Master_Host hostl Master_User rpl Master_Password XXXX Master Port 3310 Connect_Retry
13. 7 7 4 2 3 7 7 4 2 3 1 Any routine groups added to the Physical Schemata also show up in the Catalog palette on the right side of the application They may be added to an EER Digram by dragging and dropping them from this palette Adding Routine Groups to an EER Diagram To add routine groups to an EER Diagram use the Routine Groups tool on the vertical toolbar Make sure that the EER Diagram tab is selected then right click the routine groups icon on the vertical toolbar The routine groups icon is immediately above the lowest toolbar separator Clicking the mouse on this icon changes the mouse pointer to a routine group pointer You can also change the mouse pointer to a routine pointer by pressing the G key Choosing the Rout ine Group tool changes the contents of the toolbar that appears immediately below the menu bar When the Routine Groups pointer is active this toolbar contains a schemata list and a color chart list Use these lists to select the appropriate schema and color accent for the new routine group Make sure that you associate the new routine group with a database The color of your routine group can be changed later using the Properties palette Create a routine group by clicking anywhere on the EER Diagram canvas This creates a new routine group with the default name rout ines1 To revert to the default mouse pointer click the arrow icon at the top of the vertical toolbar Right clicking a routine group opens a p
14. Brief overview of command line utilities This is a brief overview of the MySQL command line utilities See their respective manual pages for further details and examples mysqldbcompare e Compare databases on two servers or the same server e Compare definitions and data e Generate a difference report e Generate SQL transformation statements mysqldbcopy e Copy databases between servers e Clone databases on the same server e Supports rename e mysqldbexport Export metadata and or data from one or more databases e Formats SQL CSV TAB Grid Vertical mysqldbimport e Import metadata and data from one or more files e Reads all formats from mysqldbexport mysqldift e Compare object definitions 238 MySQL Utilities Overview Brief overview of command line utilities Generate a difference report mysqldiskusage e Show disk usage for databases e Generate reports in SQL CSV TAB Grid Vertical mysqlfailover e Performs replication health monitoring e Provides automatic failover on a replication topology e Uses Global Transaction Identifiers GTID MySQL Server 5 6 5 mysqlindexcheck e Read indexes for one or more tables e Check for redundant and duplicate indexes e Generate reports in SQL CSV TAB Grid Vertical mysqlmetagrep e Search metadata Regexp database search e Generate SQL statement for search query mysqlprocgrep e Search process information e Generate SQL statement for search e K
15. Check the MySQL Workbench download page for the latest packages The procedure for installing on Linux depends on which Linux distribution you are using Installing DEB packages On Ubuntu and other systems that use the Debian package scheme you can install MySQL Workbench using a command such as shell gt sudo dpkg i package deb package deb is the MySQL Workbench package name for example mysql workbench oss version_i386 deb where version is the MySQL Workbench version number Note R You may be warned that certain libraries are not available depending on what you already have installed Install the required libraries and then install the MySQL Workbench package again Installing RPM packages On Red Hat based systems and other systems that use the RPM package format MySQL Workbench can be installed by a command such as shell gt sudo rpm i package rpm package rpm is the MySQL Workbench package name for example mysql workbench oss version 1fc10 x86_64 rpm where version is the MySQL Workbench version number 3 3 5 Launching MySQL Workbench on Linux After MySQL Workbench has been installed it can be launched by selecting Applications Programming MySQL Workbench from the main menu MySQL Workbench can also be launched from the command line on Linux Type the command shell gt usr bin mysql workbench help This will display the available command line options mysql workbench lt options gt lt model
16. Edit in New Window Copy SQL to Clipboard e Delete rout ine_name The Edit Routine item opens the routine editor The cut and paste items are useful for copying routines between different schemata Note R Deleting the code for a routine from the Routines tab of the Routine Group Editor results in removal of the routine object from the model Note R To remove a routine from a routine group use the controls on the Routine Group tab of the Routine Group Editor The action of the delete option varies depending upon how you have configured MySQL Workbench For more information see Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab The Routine Editor To invoke the routine editor double click a routine in the Physical Schemata section on the MySoL Model page This opens the routine editor docked at the bottom of the application Any number of routines may be open at the same time Each additional routine appears as a tab at the top of the routine editor 104 Creating Routines and Routine Groups Routine and Privileges tabs appear at the bottom of the routine editor Navigate between different tabs using the mouse or from the keyboard by pressing Control Alt Tab 7 7 4 1 2 1 The Routine Tab Use the Routine tab of the routine editor to perform the following tasks e Rename the routine using the Name field e Enter the SQL to create a routine using the SQL field 7 7 4 1 2 2 The Privileges Tab The Privileges tab of the routine
17. amk www amk ca J E F K K k k K k k E e e e e e k e e k e RR k e A k e A K k A A k A A k e A RR A A k e A k Re k k A k k A ae w APAs rmd160 c CONTENTS A sample C implementation of the RIPEMD 160 hash function TARGET any computer with an ANSI C compiler AUTHOR Antoon Bosselaers Dept Electrical Eng ESAT COSIC DATE iManche 9916 VERSION 1 0 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Copyright c Katholieke Universiteit Leuven 1996 All Rights Reserved The Katholieke Universiteit Leuven makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty of any kind These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and or software K K K KARR A RAR IA I AR k k k k k k k k k k AA k k k k k kk k k k kk kkk A HK A 24 PyODBC License The following software may be included in this product PyODBC Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so THE SOFTWARE IS
18. For detailed information about validation see Section 7 10 MySQL Workbench Schema Validation Plugins Commercial Version The Object Notation Submenu The items under the Object Notation submenu apply exclusively to an EER diagram They are not enabled unless an EER diagram tab is selected The Object Notation submenu has these items e Workbench Default Displays table columns indexes and triggers e Workbench Simplified Shows only a table s columns e Classic Similar to the Workbench Simplified style showing only the table s columns e IDEF1X The ICAM DEFinition language information modeling style The object notation style that you choose persists for the duration of your MySQL Workbench session and is saved along with your model When MySQL Workbench is restarted the object notation reverts to the default 73 Modeling Menus first Changing notation styles after objects have been placed on a diagram can significantly change the appearance of the diagram Note R If you plan to export or print an EER diagram be sure to decide on a notation style 7 5 1 5 4 The Relationship Notation Submenu The items under the Relationship Notation submenu apply exclusively to an EER diagram They are not enabled unless an EER diagram tab is selected The Relationship Notation submenu has these items Crow s Foot IE The default modeling style For an example see Figure 7 47 Adding Tables to the Canvas
19. 205 Drivers 10 4 2 1 Windows Microsoft Windows XP or newer includes an ODBC driver for Microsoft SQL Server so there are no additional actions required 10 4 2 2 Linux Setting up drivers on Linux FreeTDS FreeTDS version 0 92 or greater is required Note that many distributions ship older versions of FreeTDS so it may need to be installed separately Additionally the FreeTDS version provided by distributions may also be compiled for the wrong ODBC library usually to unixODBC instead of iODBC which MySQL Workbench uses Because of that you will probably need to build this library yourself Important using FreeTDS with iODBC R When compiling FreeTDS for use with iODBC the default with the official binaries you must compile it with the nable odbc wide command line option for the configure script Failing to do so will result in crashes and other unpredictable errors A script is provided to compile FreeTDS using the options required for MySQL Workbench You can find it in the usr share mysql workbench extras build_freetds sh directory in Linux or MySQLWorkbench app Contents SharedSupport build_freetds sh folder in the Mac To use it follow these steps 1 Make sure you have the iODBC headers installed In Linux install the 1ibiodbc devel or libiodbc2 dev package from your distribution In Mac OS X the headers come with the system and no additional action is required for this step 2 mkdir freetds to
20. 4 You will see a data grid This is where you can enter the data for your database Remember that the movie_id was set to be autoincrement so you need not enter values directly for this column In the data grid enter the movie information shown in the following table title release_date Gone with the Wind 1939 04 17 The Hound of the Baskervilles 1939 03 31 The Matrix 1999 06 11 Above the Law 1988 04 08 Note E Do not modify any values in the movie_id column 5 Now click the Apply button in the toolbar located in the bottom right corner A list of SQL statements will be displayed Confirm that you understand the operations to be carried out Click Apply to apply these changes to the live server 6 Confirm that the script was executed correctly then click Finish 32 Adding Data to Your Database 7 View the data grid again and observe that the autoincrement values have been generated Figure 4 20 Getting Started Tutorial Edit Data SOL Editor Big kon Server X 7 Be p File Edit View Query Database Plugins Scipting Community Help eo eslcld lt t Browser tae Ao oe bport YY Atoms I tte release sato Gone wth the Wind 19090617 The Hound of the Baskervles 1903 03 31 The Mate 19990331 Above be Law 15880408 Acton 8 Now you will check that the data really has been applied to the live server Launch the MySQL Command Line Client Enter SELECT FROM movies to see the data
21. 60 Master_SSL_Allowed 0 Master_SSL_CA_File Master_SSL_CA_Path Master_SSL_Cert Master_SSL_Cipher Master_SSL_Key Master_SSL_Verify_Server_Cert 0 Checking InnoDB compatibility pass Checking storage engines compatibility pass Checking lower_case_table_names settings pass Master lower_case_table_names 2 Slave lower_case_table_names 2 Checking slave delay seconds behind master pass Slave status Slave_IO_State Waiting for master to send event Master_Host hostl Master_User rpl Master Port 3310 Connect_Retry 60 Master_Log_File clone bin 000001 Read_Master_Log_Pos 482 Relay_Log_File clone relay bin 000006 Relay Log Fos 251 299 mysqlrplshow Show Slaves for Master Server Relay_Master_Log_File Slave_IO_Running Slave SOL Running clone bin 000001 Yes Yes Replicate_Do_DB Replicate_Ignore_DB Replicate_Do_Table Replicate_Ignore_Table Replicate_Wild_Do_Table Replicate_Wild_Ignore_Table best mama 0 Last Error i skip Cetnter 0 Exec_Master_Log_Pos 482 Relay_Log_Space 551 Until_Condition None Until_Log_File Uimestil tec wos s 0 Master_SSL_Allowed No Master_SSL_CA_File Master_SSL_CA_Path Master 55L Cert Master_SSL_Cipher Master_SSL_Key Seconds_Behind_Master 0 Master_SSL_Verify_Server_Cert No Dese TO mrema 0 Last TO Error Last_sOL_Errenoe 0 Last SOL Error done 13 3 16 mysql rplshow Show Slaves for Master
22. Permission to use copy modify and distribute this Python software and its associated documentation for any purpose subject to the restriction in the following sentence without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of InfoSeek not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission This permission is explicitly restricted to the copying and modification of the software to remain in Python compiled Python or other languages such as C wherein the modified or derived code is exclusively imported into a Python module 345 Python License INFOSEEK CORPORATION DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL INFOSEEK CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Execution tracing The trace module contains the following notice portions copyright 2001 Autonomous Zones Industries Inc all rights err reserved and offered to the public under the terms of the
23. Return type datetime datetime lastseen_datetime Returns Date and time of the last read log entry Return type datetime datetime class mysql utilities parser SlowQueryLog stream This class parses the MySQL Slow Query Log Instances are iterable but the class does not provide multiple independent iterators For example to read the log and print the entries 313 mysq utilities parser Parse MySQL Log Files gt gt gt slow_log open var lib mysql mysql slow log gt gt gt log SlowQueryLog slow_log zee for entry an log print entry Parameters stream file type a valid file type for example the result of the built in Python function open version Returns Version of the MySQL server that produced the log Return type tuple program Returns Full path of the MySQL server executable Return type str port Returns TCP IP port on which the MySQL server was listening Return type int socket Returns Full path of the MySQL server Unix socket Return type str start_datetime Returns Date and time of the first read log entry Return type datetime datetime lastseen_datetime Returns Date and time of the last read log entry Return type datetime datetime 314 Appendix A Third Par
24. run finishes 3 3 1 Installing MySQL Workbench on Windows MySQL Workbench for Windows can be installed using the Windows Installer package or installed manually from a Zip file Important A Installing MySQL Workbench using the Installer package requires either Administrator or Power User privileges If you are using the Zip file without an installer you do not need Administrator or Power User privileges Installing MySQL Workbench Using the Installer Package MySQL Workbench can be installed using the Windows Installer msi installation package The MSI package bears the name mysql workbench version win32 msi where version indicates the MySQL Workbench version number Improving the MySQL Installation Wizard depends on the support and feedback of users If you find that the MySQL Installation Wizard lacks some feature important to you or if you discover a bug please report itin our bugs database Select the Report a Bug item from the Help menu 1 To install MySQL Workbench right click the MSI file and select the Install item from the pop up menu or double click the file 2 Inthe Setup Type window you may choose a Complete or Custom installation To use all features of MySQL Workbench choose the Complete option 3 Unless you choose otherwise MySQL Workbench is installed in c 3PROGRAMFILES MySOL MySQL Workbench 5 1 edition_type where PROGRAMFILES is the default directory for programs for your locale The sPROG
25. COLUMN_NAME COLUMN_DATATYPE COLUMN_NOTNULL COLUMN_DEFAULTVALUE COLUMN_COMMENT COLUMNS COLUMNS_LISTING INDICES_LISTING Indices Index Name Columns Primary Unique Type Kind Comment INDICES INDEX_NAME INDICES_COLUMNS INDEX_COLUMN_NAME INDEX_COLUMN_ORDER INDEX_COLUMN_COMMENT INDICES_COLUMNS INDEX_PRIMARY INDEX_UNIQUE INDEX_TYPE INDEX_KIND INDEX_COMMENT 1 INDICES 44 INDICES ULIS TING REL_LISTING Relationships Relationship Name Relationship Type Parent Table Child Table Cardinality REL REL_NAME REL_TYPE REL_PARENTTABLE REL_CHILDTABLE REL_CARD REL REL_LISTING TABLES SCHEMATA End of MySQL Workbench Report 160 Creating a Custom Template This template shows details for all schemata in the model The preceding template file can be edited in any way you like with new markers being added and existing markers being removed as required For the custom template example you might want to create a much simpler template such as the one following Total number of Schemata SCHEMA_COUNT SCHEMATA Schema Name SCHEMA NAME Tables TABLE_COUNT TABLES Table Name TABLE_NAME TABLES SCHEMATA Report Generated On GENERATED En
26. In the following example table6 would be added to the live database and table7 would be dropped from the live database 136 Forward Engineering Figure 7 43 Update Source Button Synchronize Model with Database Connection Opti een Model and Database Differences Double click arrows in the list to choose whether to ignore changes update the model with database changes or Fetch Object Info Update Source Select Changes to Apply a TS tablet T tablez T tables T tables T tables tableS tables gt INA aa gt table It is also possible to control individual changes by clicking the arrows Clicking an arrow causes it to change between the three available synchronization directions from model to source from source to model or bidirectionally In the following example table6 will be created in the live database and table will be created in the model 137 Forward Engineering Figure 7 44 Click Arrows to Change Direction of Synchronization Synchronize Model with Database Connection Options n ETA Model and Database Differences Connect to DBMS Select Schemata A P Double click arrows in the list to choose whether to ignore changes update the model with database changes or Fetch Object Info Model Update Source 4 mydb mydb T tablet tablet T tablez table2 T table3 table3 T tables table4 T tables tableS w mi Select Changes to Apply 7 7 10 4 Creating a Catalog D
27. Search Processes on Servers mysql utilities command proc ID mysql utilities command proc USER mysql utilities command proc HOST mysql utilities command proc DB mysql utilities command proc COMMAND mysql utilities command proc TIME mysql utilities command proc STATE mysql utilities command proc INFO The following constants indicate actions to perform on processes that match the search conditions mysql utilities command proc KILL_QUERY Kill the process query mysql utilities command proc KILL_CONNECTION Kill the process connection mysql utilities command proc PRINT_PROCESS Print the processes Classes class mysql utilities command proc ProcessGrep matches actions use_regexp False This class searches the INFORMATION _SCHEMA PROCESSLIST table for processes on MySQL servers and optionally kills them It can both be used to actually perform the search or kill operation or to generate the SQL statement for doing the job To kill all queries with user mats the following code can be used zor Seon mysql uci lities conmand croc incort gt gt gt grep ProcessGrep matches USER mats actions KILL_QUERY gt gt gt grep execute root server l example com root server 2 example com Parameters matches List of var pat pairs Sequence of field comparison conditions In each condition varis one of the constants listed earlier that specify PROCESSLIST
28. TABLE IF NOT EXISTS myc tablet idtablel INT NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY idtable1 7 ENGINE InnoDB Table mydb table2 CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS mydb table2 idtable INT NOT NULL idtable2 INT NOT NULL idtable INT NOT NULL table1_idtablel INT NULL PRIMARY KEY idtable2 idtable1 idtable3 INDEX fk_table2_table1 table1_idtable1 ASC CONSTRAINT fk_table2_table1 FOREIGN KEY table1_idtable1 REFERENCES mydb table1 idtable1 ON DELETE NO ACTION Save to Other File Copy to Clipboard You may return to the previous page using the Back button The Finish button saves the script file and exits You can then use the saved script to create a database 7 7 10 1 2 Altering a Schema The menu item for altering a schema Forward Engineer SQL ALTER Script is used for updating a database that has been redesigned within MySQL Workbench Typically this option is used when the SQL script of a database has been imported into MySQL Workbench and changed and then you want to create a script that can be run against the database to alter it to reflect the adjusted model For instructions on importing a DDL script see Section 7 7 9 1 Reverse Engineering Using a Create Script Select the File Export Forward Engineer SQL ALTER Script menu item to start the Forward Engineer an ALTER Script wizard You will b
29. To edit first select the object and then the SQL CREATE Script will be shown for the selected object Edit it there then press Apply to save 10 7 10 Data Migration Setup Provides additional options for data transfer including the ability to set up a script to automate this transfer in the future 10 7 11 Bulk Data Transfer The transfer is executed here 10 7 12 Migration Report Displays the final report that can be reviewed to ensure a proper migration was executed 10 8 MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard FAQ Frequently Asked Questions with answers Questions e 10 8 1 212 While using the Postgresq psqlodbc driver see the following error 08001 08001 Already connected 202 SQLDriverConnect Questions and Answers 10 8 1 While using the Postgresq psqlodbc driver see the following error 08001 08001 Already connected 202 SQLDriverConnect This means that PostgreSQL is not configured to accept connections from the source IP 212 Chapter 11 Extending Workbench Table of Contents 11 1 GRT and Workbench Data Organization ccccceceee cece ee cette eee a eeteeeee esse aeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaneneeeees 213 112 MOQUICS aroni n iene ents et Wet da betes lel A idee etd iviea eel 214 A less E ol 6 ah ee een ee eee eee 215 11 4 Adding a GUI to a Plugin Using MFOrms 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee aeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaaes 216 11 5 The Workbench
30. a few days after the date of the tagged ChangeSet because building and testing all packages takes some time The manual included in the source and binary distributions may not be fully accurate when it comes to the release changelog entries because the integration of the manual happens at build time For the most up to date release changelog please refer to the online version instead C 1 MySQL Workbench Change History MySQL Workbench release notes are no longer published in the MySQL Workbench Manual Release notes for the changes in each release of MySQL Workbench are located at http dev mysql com doc relnotes workbench en C 2 MySQL Utilities Change History MySQL Utilities release notes are no longer published in the MySQL Workbench Manual Release notes for the changes in each release of MySQL Utilities are located at http dev mysql com doc relnotes mysa utilities en 355 356
31. compare 246 option That can be useful when there are known missing objects among the databases 3 Compare object definitions The definitions the CREATE statements are compared and differences are presented To skip this test use the skip diff 246 option That can be useful when there are object name differences only that you want to ignore 4 Check table row counts This check ensures that both tables have the same number of rows This does not ensure that the table data is consistent It is merely a cursory check to indicate possible missing rows in one table or the other The data consistency check identifies the missing rows To skip this test use the skip row count 246 option 5 Check table data consistency 243 mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences This check identifies both changed rows as well as missing rows from one or another of the tables in the databases Changed rows are displayed as a diff style report with the format chosen GRID by default and missing rows are also displayed using the format chosen To skip this test use the skip data check 246 option You may want to use the skip xxx options to run only one of the tests This might be helpful when working to bring two databases into synchronization to avoid running all of the tests repeatedly during the process Each test completes with one of the following states pass The test succeeded e F
32. done To perform best slave election supplying a candidate list use the following command 293 mysql rpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication S mysqlrpladmin master root localhost 3331 slaves root localhost 3332 root localhost 3333 root localhost 3334 N candidates root localhost 3333 root localhost 3334 elect Electing candidate slave from candidate list then slaves list Best slave found is located on localhost 3332 i clone To perform failover after a master has failed use the following command S mysqlrpladmin slaves root localhost 3332 root localhost 3333 root localhost 3334 candidates root localhost 3333 root localhost 3334 failover Performing failover Candidate slave localhost 3333 will become the new master Preparing candidate for failover Creating replication user if it does not exist Stopping slaves Performing STOP on all slaves Switching slaves to new master Starting slaves Performing START on all slaves Checking slaves for errors Failover complete done To see the replication health of a topology with GTID MODE ON server version 5 6 5 or higher and discover all slaves attached to the master run the following command We use the result of the failover command above mysqlrpladmin master root localhost 3333 slaves root localhost 3332 root localhost 3334 health Getting health for
33. o gt Overview Select options for the creation of the migrated schema in the target MySQL server and dick Next gt to execute SOURCE amp TARGET Schema Creation Source Selection Target Selection F Create schema in target RDBMS Fetch Schemata List E create a SQL script fle 7 Schemata Selection yt C Users philip nigration_script sql Y Reverse Engineer Source OBJECT MIGRATION Y Source Objects Migration Y Manual Editing Options E Keep schemata if they already exist Objects that already exist will not be recreated or updated Create Schemata Create Target Results DATA MIGRATION Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer REPORT Migration Report Create Schemata Now the schemata is created The complete log is also available here Figure 10 13 MySQL Workbench migration Create Schemata Migration Task List Create Schemata OVERVIEW Overview The SQL scripts generated for the migrated schema objects will now be executed in the target database You can monitor execution in the logs and if there are errors SOURCE amp TARGET you may correct them in the next step Table data will be migrated at a later step Source Selection Target Selection Fetch Schemata List Y Schemata Selection Y Reverse Engineer Source Create Script File Connect to Target Database Perform Checks in Target Create Schemata and Objects OBJECT MIGRATION Y Source Objects Y Migration Y Manual Editing Fin
34. this operation removes the comments Auto complete Triggers the auto completion wizard This is enabled and triggered by default and can be disabled with Preferences SQL Editor Automatically Start Code Completion Auto completion will list functions keywords schema names table names and column names Note R This feature was added in MySQL Workbench 5 2 41 52 Toolbar 6 7 2 Toolbar The toolbar features buttons in two locations in the main toolbar and within the SQL Editor itself The SQL Editor buttons are described below Figure 6 6 SQL Editor Toolbar Ga Ff ACB B siam From left to right these buttons are Open a SQL Script File Loads a saved SQL script to be ready for execution The script is displayed in the SQL Query area e Save SQL Script to File Saves the currently loaded SQL script to a file specified by the user Execute SQL Script Executes the selected portion of the query or the entire query if nothing is selected Execute Current SQL script Execute the statement under the keyboard cursor Explain All or Selection Execute the EXPLAIN command on the query under the keyboard cursor e Stop the query being executed Halts execution of the currently executing SQL script Note the database connection will not be restarted and open transactions will remain open Toggle whether execution of SQL script should continue after failed statements If the red breakpoint circle
35. under Apple s copyrights in this original Apple software the Apple Software to use reproduce modify and redistribute the Apple Software with or without modifications in source and or binary forms provided that if you redistribute the Apple Software in its entirety and without modifications you must retain this notice and the following text and disclaimers in all such redistributions of the Apple Software Neither the name trademarks service marks or logos of Apple Computer Inc may be used to endorse or promote products derived from the Apple Software without specific prior written permission from Apple Except as expressly stated in his notice no other rights or licenses express or implied are granted by pple herein including but not limited to any patent rights that may be nfringed by your derivative works or by other works in which the Apple oftware may be incorporated ne Dp ct he Apple Software is provided by Apple on an AS IS basis APPLE MAKES NO ARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED ARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR URPOSE REGARDING THE APPLE SOFTWARE OR ITS USE AND OPERATION ALONE OR IN COMBINATION WITH YOUR PRODUCTS T W W 2 IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR
36. view_name e Paste e Edit View e Edit in New Window Copy SQL to Clipboard e Delete view_name deletes from both the EER canvas and schema e Remove view_name deletes from the EER canvas but not the schema This option exists as of MySQL Workbench 5 2 45 If the table editor is not open the Edit View item opens it If it is already open the selected table replaces the previous one Edit in New Window opens a new view editor tab The cut and copy items are useful for copying views between different schemata Copy SQL to Clipboard copies the CREATE VIEW statement to the clipboard Warning 6 Use the Delete view_name item to remove a view from the database There will be no confirmation dialog box Any views added to the Physical Schemata section also show up in the Catalog palette on the left side of the application They may be added to an EER Diagram when in the EER Diagram tab by dragging and dropping them from this palette 7 7 3 2 Adding Views to an EER Diagram Views can also be added to an EER Diagram using the Vi ew tool on the vertical toolbar Make sure that the EER Diagram tab is selected then left click the view icon on the vertical toolbar The view icon is the two overlapping rectangles found below the table icon Clicking this icon changes the mouse pointer to a view pointer To change the mouse pointer to a view pointer from the keyboard use the V key Choosing the View t
37. was formed a non profit organization created specifically to own Python related Intellectual Property Zope Corporation is a sponsoring member of the PSF All Python releases are Open Source see http www opensource org for the Open Source Definition Historically most but not all Python releases have also been GPL compatible the table below summarizes the various releases Release Derived Year Owner GPL from compatible 1 29 0 ENEON T9QL 1995 CWI yes 23 selon Le Sa gA 1905 1909 CNRI yes 16 Le s52 2000 CNRI no 2m0 L6 2000 BeOpen com no ha Ge eG 200 CNRI yes 2 Zeal 2s Orpll i 200 PSF no Zaid 2 Oapll S_ I 200 PSF yes evil 2s Mae Oi i 200 PSF yes 22 2 200 PSF yes Zell 57 2 2002 PSF yes Deel 2E 2 2002 PSF yes Dita Deed 2002 PSF yes Dees Rego Dele 2002 PSF yes DZS Bx QD 2003 PSF yes 2m3 PR 2002 2003 PSF yes Devore Ds 2002 2003 PSF yes Dee a Dac 2002 2003 PSF yes DENSI ASIA 2002 2003 PSF yes Operate Dears 2004 PSF yes PRS 7303 Zea 2005 PSF yes 2 4 ad 2004 PSF yes etl 2 4 2005 PSF yes Pate 2 4 2005 PSF yes 338 Python License DATS DAT 2006 PSF yes ZED 2 4 2006 PSE yes DEA e 2 2007 PSF yes Daal Deere 2008 PSF yes ADS De Del 2008 PSF yes 2 2 2008 PSF yes De Ds 2008 PSF yes Deore Dobe il 2009 PSF yes Do 3 ROED 2009 PSE yes 2 6 4 ROS 2010 PSF yes Ze 228 2010 PSE yes HOOENOESS 1 GPL compatible doesn t mean that we re distributing Python under the GPL A
38. which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that 326 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user
39. 0 cc cece cece cece cece eee eeeee eter sete ee ae eae eeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeeeeaeaaed 210 10 7 2 Schemata Retrieval and Selection cccceeeceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeneeeeeeeeeaeaaea 211 10 723 REVErSe ENGIMNGGNIAG sorrir ranna a E stand dewicae ence gaae detec veseadandaeeieavent 211 10 7 4 Object Selection sisi scexsfeevczsassuecdeneeceee esiabdeanceciiedsasiueedseaetneebatiubvaandeeinasahaunndangecegebasiudeuals 211 RORY Ao rel e Ee E E ener air E A ne mre rer E a ere ee Porc terrteer merce a ter eee rer T 211 10 7 0 Manual EGmtin lt 1 ticsccsescseics cance dont egies ee netiedund anaes wabhiiee vst stieieneb natine wed ucied banntiedaed echidna wheetiedendnes 211 10 7 7 Target Creation OPONSE a ia ia 211 10 7 8 Schema Creation sesciieocisseckecdes steals bedeebag tedidea seus E avadvecagtie ea beadeceas tie ceessadextaathcds 212 10 7 9 Create Target Results cccececeee eee eeeeee eter ee ee ee aa eee eter sees eaa iTe 212 10 7 10 Data Migration Set wicssssccdessetenceeitvboactast anedesaut aaia e aa a a aaa iS a a 212 1011 Buik Data Tans serors airin T nletiaeeswedaacduoeeateceead a eeaderateinieeeeies 212 10 7 12 Migration Repor seess iaaa aRU AES KAEA SENEDE KNEE EAEEREN T ASKAR needy 212 10 8 MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard FAQ c ccceceeeee esac ee eeteeeeeee ee aeaaeeneeeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeeeeeeaeaae 212 MySQL Workbench provides the ability to migrate ODBC compliant databa
40. 0 E Diagram R D F oO a 6 8 In the table editor change the name of the column movie_title to title Note that the EER Diagram is automatically updated to reflect this change 9 Atthis point you can save your model Click the main toolbar button Save Model to Current File You have not yet saved this file so you will be prompted to enter a model file name For this tutorial enter Home_Media The Home_Media model may contain further schemata in addition to dvd_collection such as cd_collection Click Save to save the model 10 You can synchronize your model with the live database server First you must tell MySQL Workbench how to connect to the live server From the main menu select Database Manage Connections 1 a In the Manage DB Connections dialog click New 12 Enter Big Iron Server for the connection name This enables you to identify the server to which this connection corresponds although it is possible to create multiple connections to the same server 13 Enter the user name for the account you will use to connect to the server 14 Click on the Store in Vault button and enter the password for the user name you entered in the previous step You can optionally ignore this step and you will be prompted for this password whenever MySQL Workbench connects to the server 15 Click Test Connection to test your connection parameters If everything is okay at t
41. 127 0 0 1 Port 3306 Name or IP address of the server host TCP IP port Username root Name of the user to connect with Password Store in Vault l Clear The user s password Default Schema The schema that will be used as default schema New Delete Duplicate Move Up Move Down Test Connection Close Click New to create a new connection Once created the connection can be selected from the Stored Connections list You can then set various parameters for the connection including the following Connection Name The name used to refer to this connection This connection can then be selected from a list in other wizards requiring a connection e Connection Method The methods available are Standard TCP IP Local Socket Pipe and Standard TCP IP over SSH After you select a connection method the fields available in the Parameters tab and the Advanced tab of the dialog changes accordingly More details about these options and parameters are available in the following sections After all parameters have been set as required you can click the Test Connection button to test the connection to the live server After you are satisfied that the connection works as expected you can close the wizard by clicking the Close button The stored connection then is available for use from any of the wizards requiring a connection to a live server You can duplicate an existing connection using the Duplicate butto
42. 2 MySQL Utilities Change History cccececeeeeeee cece ee aeeeee eect este ee aaa eeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaea 355 vii viii Preface and Legal Notices This is the User Manual for the MySQL Workbench For license information see the Legal Notices This product may contain third party code For license information on third party code see Appendix A Third Party Licenses Legal Notices Copyright 2006 2013 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentati
43. 64 CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_bin NOT NULL DEFAULT Timestamp TIMESTAMP NOT NULL DEFAULT CURRENT_TIMESTAMP ON UPDATE CURRENT_TIMESTAMP Column_priv SET Select Insert Update References CHARACTER SET utf8 NOT NULL DEFAULT PRIMARY KEY Host Db User Table_name Column_name ENGINE MyISAM DEFAULT CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_bin COMMENT Column privileges Click Next to continue if you are satisfied with the generated script The next step of the process is to connect to a MySQL server in order to create the new database schema This page enables you to use a previously stored connection or enter the connection parameters 130 Forward Engineering Figure 7 37 Set Parameters for Connecting to a DBMS Options i Set parameters for connecting to a DBMS Select Objects Stored Connection v Select from saved connection settings Connection Options Connection Method Standard TCP IP v Method to use to connect to the RDBMS Name or IP address of the server host TCP Name of the user to connect with The user s password The schema that will be used as default sche After the connection parameters have been set click Execute The next page of the wizard displays the results of the forward engineering process 131 Forward Engineering Figure 7 38 Forward Engineering Progress tions Opin Forward Engineerin
44. 9 Printing The printing options used to create printouts of your EER Diagrams are found under the File menu To create documentation of your models see Section 7 5 1 5 1 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version 7 9 1 Printing Options The printing menu items not enabled unless an EER Diagram is active These items are available e Page Setup Enables you to choose the paper size orientation and margins Print Sends your EER Diagram directly to the printer This option generates a preview before printing From the preview you can adjust the scale of the view and also choose a multi page view Clicking the printer icon at the top left of this window prints the currently selected EER Diagram Close the print preview window if you need to adjust the placement of objects on the EER Diagram canvas Print to PDF Creates a PDF file of your EER Diagram Print to PS Creates a PostScript file of your EER Diagram 7 10 MySQL Workbench Schema Validation Plugins Commercial Version MySQL Workbench provides validation modules so that you can test your models before implementing them The validation plugins are accessed from the Model menu One plugin performs general validation for any Relational Database Management System RDMS and the other is MySQL specific Beneath these menu items are a number of specific validation tests Running any one of these tests opens an output window docked at the bott
45. ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Sl Be iS POHNAH PR A 3 Bitstream Vera License The following software may be included in this product Bitstream Vera Copyright c 2003 by Bitstream Inc All Rights Reserved Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream T00 Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of the fonts accompanying this license Fonts and associated documentation files the Font Software to reproduce and distribute the Font Software including without limitation the rights to use copy merge publish distribute and or sell copies of the Font Software and to permit persons to whom the Font Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions H he above copyright and trademark notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies of one or more of the Font Software typefaces The Font Software may be modified altered or added to and in particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the Fonts may be modified and additional glyphs or characters may be added to the Fonts only if the fonts are renamed to names not containing either the words 317 Boost Library License Bitstream or the word Vera This License becomes null and void to the extent applicable to Fonts or Font Software that has been modified and is distributed under the Bitstream Vera names 4 he Font Software may be sold as
46. AKERS KREASE SAAR ARANEAE KAASAR KAOTER teas etna 86 Platz Oreating Table S ian peeun n T T eo iaasdeassenes erauatasaeteeetes 86 7 7 2 Creating Foreign Key Relationships cccccceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeees 98 TeS Creating VIEWS sie iscdecctanidacaececeecdesusdenae ET a e i se 101 7 7 4 Creating Routines and Routine Groups 0 ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeees 103 Tlp Creating Layers cesena oda ai ea aes va oneal dap Cap eu a eevee 107 LAB Creating NOS susidar iuern ewbeasvenwedeahd seotelwetues E E AE EEEE eE 108 IAA Creating Text OD OCts seeeiiisdcenceesssvesarynidecaessnvanaveadencerssavesane E Ea 109 Tel 8 Creating Images iii cevcsstevedaesadecdeahuvedenb a nE A A Aa Ae aA ERA AE AA E EE 110 7 7 9 Reverse Engineering rere ieri a AO 111 T10 Forward Engineering sekesi a EA A EEEE 120 T8 Modelno Tutornals ereraa E A E 140 7 8 1 Importing a Data Definition SQL Script ssssessesseserrirsrresssrrrrrnsrsessrnrrrrnnesesrnrnnnt 141 7 8 2 Using the Default Schema cccececccceeeeeeeeeeeeee ee aaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaeneeeeeeeeeaaaaeneeseeeees 142 T83 Basie Modeling weciets ceoresansaeceentittees attaeenebs wetvenetsveedeba nyeeel NE ER 143 7 8 4 Documenting the sakila Database asesssssesrrrresrrsnsernrensrrnneenntennnnnneennennnnnnnee 144 TEE POUT ETE E Hist wwashaiseaet hasebnat E E EN ian E eee nen 146 79l Printing Options siin sab vanpeacien nso a a a a 146
47. BUSINESS INTERRUPTION ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE REPRODUCTION MODIFICATION AND OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE APPLE SOFTWARE HOWEVER CAUSED AND WHETHER UNDER THEORY OF CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR 349 ScintillaNET License OTHERWISE EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright c 2002 Apple Computer Inc All Rights Reserved A 27 ScintillaNET License The following software may be included in this product ScintillaNET ScintillaNET is based on the Scintilla component by Neil Hodgson ScintillaNET is released on this same license The ScintillaNET bindings are Copyright 2002 2006 by Garrett Serack lt gserack gmail com gt All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation GARRETT SERACK AND ALL EMPLOYERS PAST AND PRESENT DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL GARRETT SERACK AND ALL EMPLOYERS PAST AND PRESENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR O
48. Depending on its length LONGBLOB VARBINARY VARBINARY Depending on its length MEDIUMBLOB LONGBLOB TEXT VARCHAR Depending on its length MEDIUMTEXT LONGTEXT NTEXT VARCHAR Depending on its length MEDIUMTEXT LONGTEXT IMAGE TINYBLOB Depending on its length MEDIUMBLOB LONGBLOB SQL_VARIANT not migrated There is not specific support for this datatype TABLE not migrated There is not specific support for this datatype HIERARCHYID not migrated There is not specific support for this datatype UNIQUEIDENTIFIER VARCHAR 64 A unique flag set in MySQL There is not specific support for inserting unique identifier values SYSNAME VARCHAR 160 XML TEXT 10 5 PostgreSQL migration Native support for PostgreSQL 8 x and 9 x was added in MySQL Workbench 5 2 44 MySQL Workbench versions prior to this would migrate PostgreSQL using the generic migration support 10 5 1 Preparations What is required and needed General information about the setup 10 5 2 Drivers General thoughts on the topic Information specific to the psqlodb driver If you are compiling psqlodb first configure with the without libpg option 208 Connection Setup 10 5 3 Connection Setup Using an ODBC DataSource Using Connection Parameters 10 5 4 PostgreSQL Type Mapping Table 10 3 Type mapping Source Type MySQL Type Comment INT INT SMALLINT SMALLINT BIGINT BIGINT SERIAL I
49. ES 166 9 5 Manage Server INStanCes rsr miiia na oa ie idani eia i ina Td eiaa 166 9 6 Creating and Managing Server Instances cccceeeeeeee cece eee eeeeeeee tees ae aaa eeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeeseeeeeeaaa 166 9 6 1 New Server Instance Wizard ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeageeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeees 166 9 6 2 Manage Server Instances Dialog ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeee ee ae ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeneeeeeeees 169 9 7 Server Administration and Configuration ccccceceeeeeeeeeee eee dence eeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaea 171 92721 THE Stanmu pp Tabi ob es Seek tee eed tea taped iva aaa PaSa nae eea Aaaa ate deed 173 9 7 2 The Gontiguration Tab 2 c te00 nadie eid ened eee 174 97 3 The ACCOUNTS TaD a a EEA E E OTEN E a TEA 176 9 7 4 The Connections Tab osimicaiiiin a a a a aia id aidia 178 937 52 Te Variables Tab E E E A E E AE A T T 179 9 7 6 The Data Dump Tab snorders ie ienie A dele ene OA nee AI AAAA eee 180 9 72152 MELS Wal onea O S AE O OA 183 Since version 5 2 6 MySQL Workbench has included functionality for managing server instances A server instance is created to provide a way of connecting to a server to be managed The first step is to create a server instance if none exists or to work with an existing server instance MySQL Workbench also provides functionality to administer and configure a server using these server instances Thus the Server Admi
50. Edit view History Bookmarks Tools Help lt X E A A Fleit tc fbocuments and Settings Tony Bedford My Documents MySQL Workbench Report Detailedjindex html wy eg Google A Most visited Getting Started Latest Headlines Customize Links Free Hotmail Windows Marketplace Windows Media windows ye Osun MySQL Workbench Detailed Model Report Schema mydb gt DDL script Full Details CREATE SCHEMA IF NOT EXISTS world DEFAULT CHARACTER SET latinl Table city 183 Schema Tables 1 AyNiceTable Schema world gt Full Details Columns Schema Tables 3 Key Column Name Datatype Not Null Default Comment cit i PK ID INT 11 Yes country countrylanguage Name CHAR 35 Yes s L CountryCode CHAR 3 Yes District CHAR 20 Yes Population INT 11 Yes ov Indices Index Name Columns Primary Unique Type Kind Comment PRIMARY Yes No PRIMARY DDL script CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS vorld city ID INT 11 NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT Name CHAR 35 NOT NULL DEFAULT CountryCode CHAR 3 NOT NULL DEFAULT District CHAR Z0 NOT NULL DEFAULT Population INT 11 NOT NULL DEFAULT O PRIMARY KEY ID ENGINE MyISAM AUTO_INCREMENT 4080 g Dewan CUAnArTEN CUT Iarini lt gt Done If you wish to create custom templates please refer to Section 7 12 Customizing DBDoc Model Reporting Templates 7 12 Customizing DBDoc Model Reporting
51. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros a
52. Layers pointer is active this toolbar contains a color chart list Use this list to select the color accent for the new layer The color of your layer can be changed later using the Properties palette Create a layer by clicking anywhere on the EER Diagram canvas and while holding the left mouse button down draw a rectangle of a suitable size This creates a new layer with the default name layer1 To revert to the default mouse pointer click the arrow icon at the top of the vertical toolbar The following image shows a layer containing a number of views Figure 7 18 The Layer Object To change the name of a layer use the name property of the Properties palette Right clicking a layer opens a pop up menu with the following items e Cut layer_name e Copy layer_name e Delete layer_name The cut and copy items are useful for copying layers between different schemata 107 Creating Notes 7 7 5 1 1 Since layers are not schema objects no confirmation dialog box opens when you delete a layer regardless of how you have configured MySQL Workbench Deleting a layer does not delete schema objects from the catalog Adding Objects to a Layer To add an object to a layer drag and drop it directly from the Catalog palette onto a layer If you pick up an object from an EER diagram you must press Control as you drag it onto the layer otherwise it will not be locked inside the layer Locking objects to a layer preven
53. Name User Name C Authenticate Using SSH Key SSH Public Key Path C Documents and Settings The Test Application Data sshjid_rsa Check that everything is in order then click Next 8 If a Windows server is used then the Windows configuration parameters must be set 19 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 7 Getting Started Tutorial Windows Management Create New Server Instance Profile Fy Host Machine paih Set Windows configuration parameters for this machine Connection Test DB Connection windows management requires a user account on this machine which has the required privileges to query system status and to control services For configuration file manipulation read write access to the file is needed Select the service to manage from the list below It will also help to find the configuration file MySQLS55 Running Start mode Auto v j Windows Management Path to Configuration File C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data MySQL MySQL Server ka Check that everything is in order then click Next 9 The wizard will now check that it is able to access the MySQL Server configuration file and access the start and stop commands 20 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 8 Getting Started Tutorial Test Host Settings Create New Server Instance Profile Testing Host Machine Settings The connection to the host machine is being test
54. Next to continue to the next page The final page of the wizard provides a summary of the reverse engineered objects 118 Reverse Engineering Figure 7 26 Results Connection Options Reverse Engineering Results Connect to DBMS Select Schemata Fetch Object Info Summary of Reverse Engineered Objects Select Objects 3 tables from schema world Reverse Engineer Results Click Finish to exit the wizard Before exiting MySQL Workbench be sure to save the schema Choose the File Save menu item to save the reverse engineered database as a MySQL Workbench file with the extension mwb 7 7 9 2 1 Errors During Reverse Engineering During reverse engineering the application checks for tables and views that duplicate existing names and disallows duplicate names if necessary If you attempt to import an object that duplicates the name of an existing object you will be notified with an error message To see any errors that have occurred during reverse engineering you can click the button Show Logs This will create a panel containing a list of messages including any error messages than may have been generated Click the Hide Logs button to close the panel 119 Forward Engineering Figure 7 27 Message Log Reverse Engineer Database Connection Options R Reverse Engineering Progress Connect to DBMS Select Schemata The following tasks will now be executed Please monitor the execution Pr
55. Num TO Error KEK KKK KKK KK KEK KEKEKKEKKKK KK KEK oe row KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKEK KK KEK HO Sites locale site porcs S332 role SLAVE state UF gtid_mode ON health OK version 5 6 5 m8 debug log master_log_file mysql bin 000001 master_log_pos 571 IO_Thread Yes SQL_Thread Yes Secs_Behind 0 Remaining_Delay No TOAHGEOrANUM a0 O_ Error kkkkkkk xk xkxkkxkxk xk xk xk xkkxkkkkk kxk x 3 row KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKKKKKKK KK HO Sie loOcalleno site ports 3553 role SLAVE state UPF gtid_mode ON health OK version 5 6 5 m8 debug log master_log_file mysql bin 000001 master_log_pos 571 IO_Thread Yes SQL_Thread Yes Secs_Behind 0 Remaining_Delay No TOAHGEOrANUM 0 TO BError kkkkkkk xk xk xkkxk xk k xk xkxkxkxkxkkkkk kxx x 4 row KEK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKEKKAK KEK HO Site lO calle sits POr F554 role SLAVE state UPF gtid_mode ON health OK version 5 6 5 m8 debug log master_log_file mysql bin 000001 master_log_pos 571 IO_Thread Yes SQL_Thread Yes Secs_Behind 0 Remaining_Delay No LORE nroraNum 0 TO_ Error 4 rows done To run the same failover command above but specify a log file use the following command mysqlrpladmin slaves root localhost 3332 root localhost 3333 root localhost 3334 candidates root localhost 3333 root localhost 3334 log test_log txt failover Performing failover Candidate slave localhost 3333 will
56. Please monitor the execution Press Show Logs to see the execution logs Validation Finished Successfully Ca Ce Cee Click Run Validations to validate the catalog Click Next to continue The next page enables you to set options for the database to be created These options are as described in Section 7 7 10 1 1 Creating a Schema 127 Forward Engineering Figure 7 34 Options Options Set Options for Database to be Created Options DROP Objects Before Each CREATE Object Generate DROP SCHEMA Skip creation of FOREIGN KEYS Omit Schema Qualifier in Object Names Generate USE statements Generate Separate CREATE INDEX Statements E Add SHOW WARNINGS After Every DDL Statement E Do Not Create Users Only Create Privileges E Generate INSERT Statements for Tables Select the required options and then click Next The next page enables you to select the objects to forward engineer 128 Forward Engineering Figure 7 35 Select Objects to Forward Engineer Options Select Objects to Forward Engineer Select Objects To exclude objects of a specific type from the SQL Export disable the corresponding checkbox Press Show Filter and add objects or patterns to the ignore list to exclude them from the export Export MySQL Table Objects 26 Total Objects 26 Selected Export MySQL View Objects 0 Total Objects 0 Selected Export MySQL Routine Objects 0 Total Objects 0 Selected i a
57. Python 2 2 license Author Zooko O Whielacronx nets 2ooko eoms mailto zooko zooko com Copyright 2000 Mojam Media Inc all rights reserved Author Skip Montanaro Copyright 1999 Bioreason Inc all rights reserved Author Andrew Dalke Copyeiuchi 99S Soo Aut OERE eae ee lnG EU eS ESEE Author Skip Montanaro Copyright 1991 1995 Stichting Mathematisch Centrum all rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this Python software and its associated documentation for any purpose without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of neither Automatrix Bioreason or Mojam Media be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission UUencode and UUdecode functions The uu module contains the following notice Copyright 1994 by Lance Ellinghouse Cathedral City California Republic United States of America All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Lance Ellinghouse not be used in adver
58. Scripting Shell 2 0 0 0 ccccececeeeeeee cece eee eae ee ener sees ae aa ee eeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeees 217 11 5 1 Exploring the Workbench Scripting Shell cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 217 11 5 2 The Shell Window 0000 0 ccc cece cece cece dendane inaa ee ee ee aaa tetera eee ee aaa idaan haaie pianinai iaki aa 218 11 5 3 The Files Globals Classes and Modules Tabs ccccccccccce cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 219 11 6 Tutorial Writing PIUQINS 2000 nn nn reenter een EEREN EEEN ENEE 220 MySQL Workbench provides an extension and scripting system that enables the developer to extend MySQL Workbench capabilities While the core of MySQL Workbench is developed using C it is possible to harness this core functionality using both the Lua and Python scripting languages MySQL Workbench also provides access to a cross platform GUI library MForms which enables the creation of extensions that feature a graphical user interface The extension system enables the following capabilities e Automate common tasks e Extend the Workbench user interface e Create plugins code which can be invoked from the Workbench menu system e Manipulate schemata e Create custom Workbench features 11 1 GRT and Workbench Data Organization The GRT or Generic RunTime is the internal system used by Workbench to hold model document data It is also the mechanism by which Workbench can interact
59. Server This utility shows the replication slaves for a master It prints a graph of the master and its slaves labeling each with the host name and port number To explore the slaves for each client use the recurse 302 option This causes the utility to connect to each slave found and attempt to determine whether it has any slaves If slaves are found the process continues until the slave is found in the list of servers serving as masters a circular topology The graph displays the topology with successive indents A notation is made for circular topologies If you use the recurse 802 option the utility attempts to connect to the slaves using the user name and password provided for the master By default if the connection attempt fails the utility throws an error and stops To change this behavior use the prompt 302 option which permits the utility to prompt for the user name and password for each slave that fails to connect You can also use the num retries n 301 option to reattempt a failed connection n times before the utility fails An example graph for a typical topology with relay slaves is shown here Replication Topology Graph localhost 3311 MASTER a loca lnost 2310 SLAVE oe localhost 3312 SLAVE MASTER a llocalhost 23123 SLAVE MASTER SLAVE and SLAVE MASTER indicate that a server is a master only slave only and both slave and master respectively A circula
60. Shutdown E Status and System Variables A Server Logs CONFIGURATION Options File SECURITY Users and Privileges DATA EXPORT RESTORE amp Data Export Data Import Restore WB Admin Opened ma Networking Transactions Log Files Replication InnoDB MyISAM Performance Security Advanced Features have_compress E have_crypt E have_dynamic_loading have_geometry E have_openss E have_profiling have_query_cache E have_rtree_keys E have_ss E have_symlink profiling E profiling_history_size E storage_engine Memory usage E binlog_cache_size E host_cache_size E query_alloc_block_size sort_buffer_size Availability of the zlib compression library Availability of the crypt system call Whether mysqld supports dynamic loading of plugins Whether mysqld supports spatial data types Whether mysqld supports SSL connections Whether statement profiling capability is available Whether mysqld supports query cache YES if RTREE indexes are available NO if not These are used for spatial indexes in MyISAM tables Whether mysqld supports SSL connections Is symbolic link support enabled Enable or disable statement profiling How many statements to maintain profiling information for The default storage engine The size of the cache to hold the SQL statements for the binary log during a transaction The size of the host
61. Specify the output display format Permitted format values are grid csv tab and vertical The default is grid kill connection Kill the connection for all matching processes like the KILL CONNECTION statement kill query 284 mysqlprocgrep Search Server Process Lists Kill the query for all matching processes like the KILL QUERY statement match command lt pattern gt Match all processes where the Command field matches the pattern match db lt pattern gt Match all processes where the Db field matches the pattern match host lt pattern gt Match all processes where the Host field matches the pattern match info lt pattern gt Match all processes where the Info field matches the pattern match state lt pattern gt Match all processes where the State field matches the pattern match user lt pattern gt Match all processes where the User field matches the pattern print Print information about the matching processes This is the default if no kill connection 284 or kill query 284 option is given If a kill option is given print 285 prints information about the processes before killing them regexp basic regexp G Perform pattern matches using the REGEXP operator The default is to use LIKE for matching This affects the match xxx options Server lt source gt Connection information for a server to search in lt users lt passwa gt lt host lt port gt l
62. Tab This enables you to set the default table storage engine 5 4 6 The Diagram Tab Use this tab to determine display settings for an EER diagram Select whether to expand new objects by checking the Expand New Objects check box and select whether to draw line crossings by checking the Draw Line Crossings check box This tab also enables you to set the maximum number of characters for the following items e Column Names Column Types e Routine Names Changes to these values change the display properties only not the objects themselves 42 The Appearance Tab 5 4 7 The Appearance Tab Use this tab to set the available colors for the objects that appear on an EER diagram canvas You can also add colors if you wish Changes made here affect the list of colors that appears on the toolbar when adding objects to an EER diagram canvas For information about using this list see Section 7 5 2 1 Tool Specific Toolbar Items You can also use this tab to set the font face size and style for the following items Editor Layer Title Text Figure Text Text Figure Title Connection Caption Routine Group Figure Item Routine Group Figure Title Table Figure Items Table Figure Section Table Figure Title View Figure Title you need to use characters not supported by the 1at in 1 character set you must Note R On Windows the default font for the editor supports only 1atin 1 characters If change the font here
63. Table 12 4 Arrange menu keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Bring to Front Modifier Shift F EER Diagram Send to Back Modifier Shift B EER Diagram Model Menu Table 12 5 Model menu keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Add Diagram Modifier T Model EER Diagram Validate All Modifier Alt V Model EER Diagram Validate All MySQL Modifier Alt B Model EER Diagram on Mac OS X Query Menu Table 12 6 Query menu keyboard shortcuts Model Options Command Alt Shortcut available only Model EER Diagram Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Execute statement Modifier Return SQL Editor Execute statements Modifier Shift Return SQL Editor New Tab Modifier T SQL Editor Database Menu Table 12 7 Database menu keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Query Database Modifier U All 224 Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Reverse Engineer Modifier R Model EER Diagram Forward Engineer Modifier G Model EER Diagram Synchronize Model Modifier Y Model EER Diagram Scripting Menu Table 12 8 Scripting menu keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Scripting Shell Modifier F3 Modifier Option 3 on Mac All OS X Run Workbench Script File Modifier Shift R All Help Menu Table 12 9 Help menu keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut C
64. Templates This section provides an overview of creating and modifying DBDoc Model Reporting templates as used by MySQL Workbench The MySQL Workbench DBDoc Model Reporting system is based on the Google Template System This discussion does not attempt to explain the Google Template System in detail For a useful overview of how the Google Template System works see the Google document How To Use the Google Template System The templates employed by the DBDoc Model Reporting system are text files that contain Markers These text files are processed by the template system built into MySQL Workbench and the markers replaced by actual data The output files are then generated It is these output files typically HTML or text that are then viewed by the user Markers can be of six types e Template Include e Comment 151 Customizing DBDoc Model Reporting Templates Set delimiter Pragma Variable Section start and Section end The last two are the most commonly used in MySQL Workbench templates and these important markers are briefly described in the following sections Variables The use of variables in the templates is straightforward Any variables denoted by markers in the template file are replaced by their corresponding data prior to the output file being generated The mapping between variables and their corresponding data is stored by MySQL Workbench in what is known as a data dictionary In the data dictionary the
65. The unique field here is Socket Pipe Path Enter the name of the socket or pipe here If the field is left blank the default socket or pipe name is used On Unix the default socket name is tmp mysql sock On Microsft Windows the default pipe name is MySQL This option can be seen in the following screenshot Figure 6 3 Manage DB Connections Socket Pipe Parameters Manage DB Connec E I Stored Connections Connection Name Big Iron Server Type a name for the connection Local intaia PYAR Connection Method Local Socket Pipe v Method to use to connect to the RDBMS Big Iron Server localhost Parameters Advanced Socket Pipe Path Path to local socket or pipe file Leave empty for default Username root Name of the user to connect with Password Store in Vault Clear The user s password Default Schema The schema that will be used as default schema New Coe Dae Groveu Nove Sonn Advanced The only option available in this tab is Use ANSI quotes to quote identifiers This option was discussed in Section 6 6 2 Standard TCP IP Connection 49 Standard TCP IP over SSH Connection 6 6 4 Standard TCP IP over SSH Connection This connection method enables MySQL Workbench to connect to MySQL Server using TCP IP over an SSH connection Parameters In addition to a number of parameters that are in common with Standard TCP IP connections this connection method features
66. To use it the Python code must import the mforms module MForms Containers Given the problems of using an absolute coordinate system across different platforms MForms employs containers that perform automatic layout The basic containers that MForms provides include Form A top level window which can contain a single control usually another container The window will be sized automatically to fit its contents but can also be sized statically 216 The Workbench Scripting Shell e Box This is a container that can be filled with one or more controls in a vertical or horizontal layout Each child control can be set to use either the minimum of required space or fill the box in the direction of the layout In the direction perpendicular to the layout for example vertical in a horizontal layout the smallest possible size that can accommodate all child controls will be employed So in this example the smallest height possible to accommodate the controls would be used e Table This is a container that can organize one or more controls in a grid The number of rows and columns in the table and the location of controls within the grid can be set by the developer e ScrollView This is a container that can contain a single child control and will add scrollbars if the contents do not fit the available space 11 5 The Workbench Scripting Shell The Workbench Scripting Shell provides a means for entering and executing scripts
67. Tutorial Review Script Forward Engineer to Database PRA Review the SQL Script to be Executed Select Objects Review SQL Script SET OLD_UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE UNIQUE_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_SQL_MODE SQL_MODE SQL_MODE TRADITIONAL CREATE SCHEMA IF NOT EXISTS dvd_collection USE dvd_collection Table dvd_collection movies CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS dvd_collection movies movie_id INT NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT title VARCHAR 45 NOT NULL release_date DATE NULL PRIMARY KEY movie_id ENGINE InnoDB 20 Select the connection you created earlier Big Iron Server Click Execute Check the messages for any errors then click Close to exit the wizard 2 _ Ensure that the script ran without error on the server then click Close As a simple test that the script worked launch the MySQL Command Line Client mysql Enter SHOW DATABASES and identify your schema Enter USE dvd_collection to select your schema Now enter SHOW TABLES Enter SELECT FROM movies this will return the empty set as you have not yet entered any data into your database Note that it is possible to use MySQL Workbench to carry out such checks and you will see how to do this later but the MySQL Command Line Client has been used here as you have probably used it previously 22 Ensure that
68. U UUIDs L log entries If the user presses the I key and the 10g 273 option was specified the interface will show the entries in the log file Note example truncated for space allowance MySQL Replication Monitor and Failover Utility Failover Mode auto Next Interval Mon Mar 19 16 06 13 2012 Master Information Position LIY Binary Log File mysql bin 000001 Binlog_Do_DB Binlog_Ignore_DB GTID Executed Set 2A67DE00 2DA1 11E2 A711 00764F2BE90F 1 7 Log File 4 4 Date Entry 4 4 ORTES RPM ETNE O ManslhovermConsolmlemctcmEec Zoe 2012 03 19 15 55 33 PM INFO Failover mode auto sae AQIZ O3 12 W5g55 9 Sis IM ENO Cercieaine Ineeilein tere maces leceullaos oso AQIZ O3 12 S IM WFO Mester Seetctigg loimiloge myysell oiin O0 oso 4 4 Q quit R refresh H health G GTID Lists U UUIDs L log entries Up Down scroll 13 3 10 mysqlindexcheck Identify Potentially Redundant Table Indexes This utility reads the indexes for one or more tables and identifies duplicate and potentially redundant indexes To check all tables in a database specify only the database name To check a specific table name the table in db table format It is possible to mix database and table names You
69. Workbench increase import performance When a model is exported using the main menu item File Export Forward Engineer SQL CREATE Script some server variables are temporarily set to enable faster SQL import by the server The statements added at the start of the code are SET OLD_UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_SQL_MODE SQL_MODE SQL_MODE TRADITIONAL These statements function as follows e SET OLD_UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS 0 Determines whether InnoDB performs duplicate key checks Import is much faster for large data sets if this check is not performed SET OLD_FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS 0 Determines whether the server should check that a referenced table exists when defining a foreign key Due to potential circular references this check must be turned off for the duration of the import to permit defining foreign keys e SET OLD_SQL_MODE SQL_MODE SQL_MODE TRADITIONAL Sets SQL_MODE to TRADITIONAL causing the server to operate in a more restrictive mode These server variables are then reset at the end of the script using the following statements SET SQL _MODE OLD_SQL_MODE SET FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS OLD_FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS SET UNIQUE_CHECKS OLD_UNIQUE_CHECKS B 2 MySQL Workbench 5 0 appears to run slowly How can increase performance Although graphi
70. a script to alter an existing database or create a new database The script to create a database is similar to the one created using the mysqldump db_name command If you choose to create a database there are several export options available 7 7 10 1 1 Creating a Schema Select the File Export Forward Engineer SQL CREATE Script menu item to start the Forward Engineer SQL Script wizard The following figure shows the first page of the wizard Figure 7 28 SQL Export Options SQL Export Options SQL Export Options Output SQL Script File Leave blank to view generated script but not save to a file SQL Options E Generate DROP Statements Before Each CREATE Statement E Generate DROP SCHEMA E Skip Creation of FOREIGN KEYS E Omit Schema Qualifier in Object Names _ Generate USE statements E Generate Separate CREATE INDEX Statements E Add SHOW WARNINGS After Every DDL Statement E Do Not Create Users Only Export Privileges E Generate INSERT Statements for Tables The SQL Export Options displays the following facilities Output SQL Script File 121 Forward Engineering To specify the output file name enter it into the Output SQL Script File field or use the Browse button to select a file If this field is left blank you will be able to view the generated script but it will not be saved to a file Generate DROP Statements Before Each CREATE Statement Select this option to generate a sta
71. a number of specialized parameters These are listed here SSH Hostname This is the name of the SSH server An optional port number can also be provided e SSH Username This is the name of the SSH user name to connect with e SSH Password The SSH password It is recommended that an SSH key file is also used e SSH Key File A path to the SSH key file Note Only key files in OpenSSH format are currently supported These options can be seen in the following screenshot Figure 6 4 Manage DB Connections SSH Parameters O x Stored Connections Connection Name Big Iron Server Type a name for the connection etree a Connection Method Standard TCP IP over SSH v Method to use to connect to the RDBMS localhost Parameters Advanced SSH Hostname 127 0 0 1 22 SSH server hostname with optional port number SSH Username user Name of the SSH user to connect with SSH Password Store in Vault Clear Password for the SSH tunnel SSH Key File aas Path to SSH private key file MySQL Hostname 127 0 0 1 MySQL server host relative to the SSH server MySQL Server Port 3306 TCP IP port of the MySQL server Username root Name of the user to connect with Password Store in Vault Clear The MySQL user s password Default Schema The schema that will be used as default schema New Delete Duplicate Moveup Move Down Advanced The options here are the same as fo
72. accordingly to this choice 189 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 3 MySQL Workbench migration Source Selection Parameters Migration File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Source Selection OVERVIEW 3 Overview Source RDBMS Connection Parameters SOURCE amp TARGET Database System MySQL Select a RDBMS from the list of supported systems Sou ion Target Selection Stored Connection y Select from saved connection settings Fetch Schemata List Connection Method Standard TCP IP v Method to use to connect to the RDBMS Schemata Selection Parameters Advanced Reverse Engineer Source l OBJECT MIGRATION Hostname 127 0 0 1 Name or IP address of the server host TCP IP port Source Objects Migration gt Manual Editing Password Storein Vault Clear The user s password Will be requested later if it s not set Target Creation Options Create Schemata Default Schema The schema to use as default schema Leave blank to select it later Username root Name of the user to connect with Create Target Results DATA MIGRATION Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer REPORT Store connection for future usage as Migration Report The optional Store connection option will save the connection details It must be set before proceeding to the next step by clicking Next Target Selection The target is the MySQL databas
73. ae aa ae aa eeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeneeeeeeeeeaaa 166 9 6 Creating and Managing Server Instances cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeee ee aeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeneeeeeeeeeaeaaeeees 166 9 6 1 New Server Instance Wizard 0 0 22 ccceceeeeeee eee cence eeeeee ee ae aaa eeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeeeeeeaeaaea 166 MySQL Workbench 9 6 2 Manage Server Instances Dialog cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeee ee ae eae teeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeaeaaed 169 9 7 Server Administration and Configuration ccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaea 171 OFF We TAC Stanup Tabi vit teases EAE acl nk a ae nl ek ead a cn at 173 9 7 2 The Configuration Tab cccceecccceeeeeeeee cece ee aaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeceeeeeeeeeaaaaeeneeeeseeeeaeaaeaees 174 9 7 3s TNE ACCOUNTS VAD mi cctoncdscocncebeecontiegorunreth isons dectedumsdectentdvenunessatconedacocamebecventieeands 176 9 7 4 The Connections Tab 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeee cece ee eeteee sees ee ae aa aaa cesses eeaeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaeeeeeees 178 9700 The Variables Tab vies te aee vb bias edeet erin EEEE ieee 179 9 7 62 The Data Dump Tab rcer a EEE AA EAEEREN 180 OF 5 2 TNE LOGS TaD ehes r A a A ER EA oben dnetaeubontadedesersices 183 10 Database Migration WiZard see terieri rieni E n E RE A EA SAL A RE AAR EETA 185 10 1 General installation requirements seesesssssssesssssrtirsrrssttrttrtittssttnttnrrtnststtrtnrnnnsnennnnt 186 103161 ODBC pra aS a a aA E AE A A n AA 186 10
74. and its slaves The utility is designed to run interactively or continuously refreshing the health information at periodic intervals Its primary mission is to monitor the master for failure and when a failure occurs execute failover to the best slave available The utility accepts a list of slaves to be considered the candidate slave This utility is designed to work exclusively for servers that support global transaction identifiers GTIDs and have GTID_ MODE ON MySQL server versions 5 6 5 and higher support GTIDs See the MySQL server online reference manual for more information about setting up replication with GTIDs enabled The user can specify the interval in seconds to use for detecting the master status and generating the health report using the interval 273 option At each interval the utility will check to see if the server is alive via a ping operation followed by a check of the connector to detect if the server is still reachable The ping operation can be controlled with the ping 274 option see below If the master is found to be offline or unreachable the utility will execute one of the following actions based on the value of the fai lover mode 273 option auto Execute automatic failover to the list of candidates first and if no slaves are viable continue to locate a viable candidate from the list of slaves If no slaves are found to be a viable candidate the utility will generate and error and exit Once
75. and port 6 Are there conflicts between the master info file on the slave and the values shown in SHOW SLAVE STATUS on the master 7 Are the InnoDB configurations compatible plugin vs native 8 Are the storage engines compatible have same on slave as master 9 Are the lower_case_tables_names settings compatible Warn if there are settings for lowercase uppercase table names that can cause problems See Bug 59240 10 Is the slave behind the master The utility runs each test in turn unless there is a fatal error preventing further testing such as a loss of connection to the servers Each test can complete with one of the following states pass the prerequisites are met fail the prerequisites were met but one or more errors occurred or there are exceptions to consider or warn the test found some unusual settings that should be examined further but may not be in error Use the verbose 298 option to see additional information such as server IDs lower_case_table_name settings and the contents of the master information file on the slave To see the values from the SHOW SLAVE STATUS statement use the show slave status 298 option OPTIONS mysqlrplicheck accepts the following command line options e help Display a help message and exit 297 mysqlrplcheck Check Replication Prerequisites NOTES e master lt source gt Connection information for the master server in lt user
76. and user accounts browse status variables manage database objects synchronize schemas report and server logs G Open Connection to Start Querying ta Open Existing EER Model amp Server Administration gt tee localhost model Sa mysqid localhost ag User root Host localhost 3306 Last modified Tue Sep 6 10 55 20 2011 Local Type MacOS X amp Big Iron Server 5y Home_Media amp New Connection Sa New Server Instance Ei Edit Table Data Be Create New EER Model pe Manage Import Export s Edit SQL Script Create EER Model From Existing Database Manage Security cs 6 Manage Connections 5 Create EER Model From SQL Script g Manage Server Instances _ Ready You can launch any of the utilities listed by typing the name of the command To find out what options are available use the option or read the appropriate manual page 13 1 2 Connection Parameters To connect to a server it is necessary to specify connection parameters such as user name host name password and perhaps also port or socket Whenever connection parameters are required they can be specified three different ways e Asa dictionary containing the connection parameters e As a connection specification string containing the connection parameters e As a Server instance When providing the connection parameters as a dictionary the parameters are passed unchanged to the connector s connect function This enables you to pass parameters not supported th
77. any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by
78. appearing in either database produce an error To compare a specific pair of objects add an object name to each database name in db obj format For example use db1 obj1 db2 0b 42 to compare two named objects or db1 obj1 to compare an object 263 mysqldiff Identify Differences Among Database Objects with the same name in databases with the same name It is not legal to mix a database name with an object name For example db1 obj1 db2 and db1 db2 0bj2 are illegal The comparison may be run against a single server for comparing two databases of different names on the same server by specifying only the server1 265 option Alternatively you can also connect to another server by specifying the server2 265 option In this case the first object to compare is taken from server1 and the second from server2 By default the utilty generates object differences as a difference report However you can generate a transformation report containing SQL statements for transforming the objects for conformity instead Use the sql value for the difftype 265 option to produce a listing that contains the appropriate ALTER commands to conform the object definitions for the object pairs specified If a transformation cannot be formed the utility reports the diff of the object along with a warning statement See important limitations in the NOTES section To specify how to display diff style output use one of the following values with
79. are unified context differ and sql The default is unified disable binary logging If binary logging is enabled disable it during the operation to prevent comparison operations from being written to the binary log Note Disabling binary logging requires the SUPER privilege 245 mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences NOTES format lt format gt f lt format gt Specify the display format for changed or missing rows Permitted format values are grid csv tab and vertical The default is grid quiet q Do not print anything Return only an exit code of success or failure run all tests a Do not halt at the first difference found Process all objects server1 lt source gt Connection information for the first server in lt user gt lt passwad gt lt host gt lt port lt socket gt format server2 lt source gt Connection information for the second server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port lt socket gt format show reverse Produce a transformation report containing the SQL statements to conform the object definitions specified in reverse For example if changes for is set to server1 also generate the transformation for server2 Note The reverse changes are annotated and marked as comments skip data check Skip the data consistency check skip diff Skip the object definition difference check Skip object compare Skip the
80. as associated with the default or main section no data is generated in Note R If a template has no sections any variables used in the template are looked up in the output file for that marker Evaluation of variables The tree structure of the data dictionaries is important with respect to variable evaluation As variables are defined in data dictionaries their associated values have meaning only when that particular data dictionary is active and that means when the section associated with that data dictionary is active When a variable lookup occurs the system checks the data dictionary associated with the current section If the variable value can be found there the replacement is made However if the variable s value is not found in the current data dictionary the parent data dictionary is checked for the variable s value and so on up the tree until the main data dictionary or root is reached Suppose that we want to display the names of all columns in a model Consider the following template as an attempt to achieve this Report Column Name COLUMN_NAME This template produces no output even for a model that contains many columns In this example the only data dictionary active is the main dictionary However COLUMN_NAME is stored in the COLUMNS data dictionary which is associated with the COLUMNS section With this knowledge the template can be improved as follows Report COLUMNS Column Name
81. based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy 325 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above ona medium customarily used for software interchange
82. cache Allocation block size for query parsing and execution Each thread that needs to do a sort allocates a buffer of this size Configuration File C PROGRA 1 MySQL ENTERP 1 Monitor mysql my ini mysqld z 175 The Accounts Tab Security Tab Figure 9 6 Administrator Configuration Security Tab Admin mysqld localhost Xx File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help ORACLE Task and Object Browser Options File MANAGEMENT Locate option Find J Serer Status g Startup Shutdown E Status and System Variables A Server Logs Networking Transactions Log Files General Replication InnoDB MyISAM Performance Security Advanced Security V automatic_sp_privileges Creating and dropping stored procedures alters ACLs E local_infile Whether LOCAL is supported for LOAD DATA INFILE statements CONFIGURATION ol passed ef oasrrd nest metod SECURITY read_only Make all nontemporary tables read only Users and Privileges Validate password DATA EXPORT RESTORE d anes validate_password_dictionary_file validate_password dictionary file Data Export amp Data Import Restore validate_password_length validate_password required password length validate_password_mixed_case_count 1 validate_password required number of uppercase lowercase characters validate_password_number_count 1 validate_password required nu
83. can scan tables in any database except the internal databases mysql INFORMATION_SCHEMA and performance_schema Depending on the index type the utility applies the following rules to compare indexes designated as idx_a and idx_b e BTREE idx_b is redundant to idx_a if and only if the first n columns in idx_b also appear in idx_a Order and uniqueness count e HASH idx_a and idx_b are duplicates if and only if they contain the same columns in the same order Uniqueness counts e SPATIAL idx_a and idx_b are duplicates if and only if they contain the same column only one column is permitted 277 mysqlindexcheck Identify Potentially Redundant Table Indexes e FULLTEXT idx_b is redundant to idx_a if and only if all columns in idx_b are included in idx_a Order counts To see DROP statements to drop redundant indexes specify the show drops 279 option To examine the existing indexes use the verbose 279 option which prints the equivalent CREATE INDEX or ALTER TABLE for primary keys To display the best or worst nonprimary key indexes for each table use the best 278 or worst 279 option This causes the output to show the best or worst indexes from tables with 10 or more rows By default each option shows five indexes To override that provide an integer value for the option To change the format of the index lists displayed for the show indexes 279 best 278 and worst 279
84. clause for events are not supported SQL extensions specific to MySQL Cluster are not supported For the difftype 265 option the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example difftype d 265 specifies the differ type An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES To compare the employees and emp databases on the local server use this command mysqldiff serverl root localhost employees emp1 serverl on localhost connected WARNING Objects in serverl employees but not in server2 empl1 EVENT el Compare failed One or more differences found mysqldiff serverl root localhost employees tl empl t1l employees t3 emp1 t3 serverl on localhost connected Comparing employees tl to empl tl PASS serverl on localhost connected Comparing employees t3 to empl t3 PASS Success All objects are the same se 2 a 2 mysqldiff serverl root localhost employees salaries empl salaries differ serverl on localhost connected Comparing employees salaries to empl salaries FAIL Object definitions are not the same CREATE TABLE salaries emp_no gt int 11 NOT NULL seders abe lil WOT NO from_date date NOT NULL to_date date NOT NULL PRIMARY KEY emp_no from_date KEY emp_no emp_no ENGINE InnoDB DEF
85. column name Added in MySQL Workbench 5 2 45 Delete Selected Columns Select multiple contiguous columns by right clicking and pressing the Shift key Use the Control key to select noncontiguous columns Refresh Update all information in the Columns tab Clear Default Clear the assigned default value Default NULL Set the column default value to NULL 89 Creating Tables e Default 0 Set the column default value to 0 e Default CURRENT_TIMESTAMP Available for TIMESTAMP data types Default CURRENT_TIMESTAMP ON UPDATE CURRENT_TIMESTAMP Available for TIMESTAMP data types To add a column click the Column Name field in an empty row and enter an appropriate value Select a data type from the Datatype list Select the column property check boxes as required according to the list of column properties below and also read the CREATE TABLE documentation for information about what these options mean PK PRIMARY KEY NN NOT NULL UQ UNIQUE INDEX BIN BINARY UN UNSIGNED ZF ZEROFILL Al AUTO_INCREMENT To change the name data type default value or comment of a column double click the value you wish to change The content then becomes editable You can also add column comments to the Column Comment field It is also possible to set the column collation using the list in the Column Details panel To the left of the column name is an icon that indicates whether the column is a member of the primary
86. copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GN
87. copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license the Software to use reproduce display distribute execute and transmit the Software and to prepare derivative works of the Software and to permit third parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so all subject to the following The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement including the above license grant this restriction and the following disclaimer must be included in all copies of the Software in whole or in part and all derivative works of the Software unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine executable object code generated by a source language processor THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE 318 Cairo License A 5 Cairo License The following software may be included in this product Cairo You are receiving a copy of the Cairo in both source and object code in the following DLL libcairo dll or dynamic libraries MySQLWorkbench app Contents Frame
88. corrupted tables Directory where to put the tables data file This works only for MyISAM tables only and not on some operating systems Windows Directory where to put the tables index file This works only for MyISAM tables only and not on some operating systems Windows Comma separated list of MyISAM tables that should be used by the MERGE table Enclose the ist with parentheses The union table which should be used for inserts teciiuem Options which are grouped into the following sections e Row Options General Options Storage Options Merge Table options The following discussion describes these options in more detail General Options Section 95 Creating Tables 7 7 1 3 8 In the General Options section choose a pack keys option The options are Default Pack None and Pack A11 You may also encrypt the definition of a table The AUTO_INCREMENT and delayed key update behaviors apply only to My I SAM tables Row Options Section To set the row format choose the desired row format from the list For more information about the different row formats that are available see My ISAM Table Storage Formats These options are e Default e Dynamic e Fixed Compressed e Redundant Compact When you expect a table to be particularly large use the Avg Row Min Rows and Max Rows options to enable the MySQL server to better accommodate your data See CREATE TABLE Syntax for more inform
89. create a directory within the users home directory 3 Copy the build_freetds sh script to freetds 4 Get the latest FreeTDS sources from ftp ftp freetds org pub freetds and place it in the freetds directory Make sure to get version 0 92 or newer 5 cd freetds 6 Execute build_freetds sh 7 After compilation is done install it using make install from the path given by the script 8 Install the driver in the ODBC Administrator to make the ODBC subsystem to recognize it The name of the driver file is 1ibtdsodbc so and is located in usr lib or usr local lib Once the driver is installed you should be able to create data sources for it from the ODBC Administrator GUI Protocol version selection in FreeTDS When using FreeTDS TDS_VERSION 7 0 is needed in the connection string If you pick a FreeTDS specific connection method option in the connection dialog that option is added to the connection string automatically 206 Connection Setup 10 4 2 3 Mac OS X See the FreeTDS setup notes for Linux 10 4 3 Connection Setup Using an ODBC DataSource Using Connection Parameters Table 10 2 Type mapping 10 4 4 Microsoft SQL Server Type Mapping Source Type MySQL Type Comment INT INT TINYINT TINYINT UNSIGNED flag set in MySQL SMALLINT SMALLINT BIGINT BIGINT BIT TINYINT 1 FLOAT FLOAT Precision value is used for storage size in both REAL FLOAT NUMERIC DE
90. create a plugin from an arbitrary script it is first necessary to make the file a module and export the required function from it It is then necessary to declare the module as a plugin and specify the return type and input arguments from wb import Impor Gee ModuleInfo DefineModule name AutoFK author John Doe version 1 0 ModuleInfo plugin sample createGuessedForeignKkeys caption Create Foreign Keys from ColumnNames input wbinputs objectOfClass db mysql schema groups Overview Utility ModuleInfo export grt INT grt classes db_mysql_Schema def auto_create_fks schema With the addition of the preceding code the auto_create_fks function is exported and will be added to the schema context menu in the model overview When invoked it receives the currently selected schema as its input 221 222 Chapter 12 Keyboard Shortcuts The following tables list keyboard shortcuts for MySQL Workbench commands Modifier in the tables stands for the platform specific modifier key This is Command on Mac OS X Control on other platforms On Mac OS X the Alt key is Option There are keyboard shortcut tables for the File Edit View Arrange Model Query Database Scripting Help and EER Diagram Mode menus File Menu Table 12 1 File menu keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut Context New Model Modifier N All Open Model Modif
91. databases option with mysqldump if you wish to create the database as well as all its objects If there is no CREATE DATABASE db_name Statement in your script file you must import the database objects into an existing schema or if there is no schema a new unnamed schema is created If your script creates a database MySQL Workbench creates a new physical schemata tab on the MySOL Model page Any database objects may be imported from a script file in this fashion tables views routines and routine groups Any indexes keys and constraints are also imported Objects imported using an SQL script can be manipulated within MySQL Workbench the same as other objects Before exiting be sure to save the schema Choose the File Save menu item and the reverse engineered database will be saved as a MySQL Workbench file with the extension mwb See Section 7 8 1 Importing a Data Definition SQL Script for a tutorial on reverse engineering the sakila database 7 7 9 2 Reverse Engineering a Live Database To reverse engineer a live database choose the Database Reverse Engineer menu item from the main menu This opens the Reverse Engineer Database wizard 111 Reverse Engineering Figure 7 19 Reverse Engineer Database Wizard Connection Options Set parameters for connecting to a DBMS Stored Connection y Select from saved connection settings Connection Method Standard TCP IP v Method to use to connect t
92. departments 1 4 1 4 kkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk k ile row kkxkxkxkxkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkx k dept_no d002 dept_name dunno dept_name Finance IL rows Rows in empl departments not in emp2 departments KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK ee row KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK dept_no d008 dept_name Research 1 rows Rows in emp2 departments not in empl departments KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEK lee row KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK dept_no d100 dept_name stupid 1 rows TABLE dept_manager pass pass pass Database consistency check failed done Given two databases with the same table layout Data for each table contains mysql gt select from db1 tl il Test 789 2 Test 456 3 Test is 4 New row dbl 4 rows in set 0 00 sec 247 mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences mysql gt select from db2 t1 ll Test 123 2 Test 456 3 Test 789 5 New row db2 4 rows in set 0 00 sec To generate the SQL statements for data transformations to make db1 t1 the same as db2 t1 use the changes for serverl 245 option We must also include the a option to ensure that the data consistency test is run The following command illustrates the options used and an excerpt from the results generated mysqldbcompare serverl root root localhost server2 root root localhost dbl db2 changes for serverl aN difftype sql Defn Row Data Type Object Name
93. derivative version prepared by Licensee Be or the derivative work available to others as provided herein In the event Licensee prepares a derivative work that is based on incorporates Python or any part thereof and wants to make then Licensee hereby agrees to include in any such work a brief summary of the changes made to Python 4 PSF is making Python available to Licensee on an AS IS basis PSF MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED BY WAY OF EXAMPLE BUT NOT LIMITATION PSF MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PU RPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF PYTHON WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD PA Bs Rube O RIGCHTS PSF SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF PYTHON FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A RESULT OF MODIFYING DISTRIBUTING OR OTHERWISE USING PYTHON OR ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF 339 Python License 6 This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms and conditions 7 Nothing in this License Agreement shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency partnership or joint venture between PSF and Licensee This License Agreement does not grant permission to use PSF trademarks or trade name in a trademark sense to endorse or promote products or services of Licensee or any third part
94. displays your model If you already have created a connection to a database it will appear in this panel as an icon Double clicking the icon directly launches an SQL Editor tab and connects you to the database as defined by the connection To read more about modeling see Section 7 5 Model Editor 7 2 Create New EER Model Clicking this action item launches a new MySQL Model tab with a blank model ready for you to work on To read more about modeling see Section 7 5 Model Editor 7 3 Create EER Model from Existing Database This action item enables you to create an EER Model from an existing live database Clicking this action item launches the Reverse Engineer Database This is a multi stage wizard that enables you to select a connection to a live server and select the schema and objects you wish to reverse engineer into your new model This is a convenient way to see how an existing database is structured For further information about reverse engineering see Section 7 7 9 2 Reverse Engineering a Live Database 7 4 Create EER Model from SQL Script This action item enables you to create a model from an SQL Create script Such a script may have been created by hand or as a result of reverse engineering an existing database The script may then be 64 Model Editor modified according to requirements Clicking this action item launches the Reverse Engineer SQL Script wizard This is a multi stage
95. example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 06 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 07 Test Basic database example done Connecting to the current server as master CHANGE MASTER TO MASTER_HOST localhost MASTER_USER rpl MASTER_PASSWORD rpl MASTER_PORT 3311 MASTER_LOG_FILE clone bin 000001 MASTER_LOG_POS 106 Starting slave START SLAVE Similarly to export a database and include the replication commands to use the current server s master for example to start a new slave using the same the master use the following command mysqldbexport server root localhost 3311 util_test export both rpl user rpl rpl rpl slave v Source on localhost connected Stopping slave STOP SLAVE Source on localhost connected Exporting metadata from util_test DROP DATABASE IF EXISTS util_test 259 mysqldbimport Import Object Definitions or Data into a Database CREATE DATABASE util_test USE util_test TABLE MUCI IERES SERE CREATE TABLE tl a gt char 30 DEFAULT NULL ENGINE MEMORY DEFAULT CHARSET latinl done SOURCE Cin LOCEIURGSES coo CeminEeciEael USH util test Exporting data from util_test Date for table util test 21 NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 01 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 02 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 03 Te
96. from the two original tables An identifying relationship is indicated by a solid line between the tables and a nonidentifying relationship is indicated by a broken line Create or drag and drop the tables that you wish to connect Ensure that there is a primary key in the table that will be on the one side of the relationship Click on the appropriate tool for the type of relationship you wish to create If you are creating a one to many relationship first click the table that is on the many side 98 Creating Foreign Key Relationships of the relationship then on the table containing the referenced key This creates a column in the table on the many side of the relationship The default name of this column is table_name_key_name where the table name and the key name both refer to the table containing the referenced key When the many to many tool is active double clicking a table creates an associative table with a many to many relationship For this tool to function there must be a primary key defined in the initial table Use the Model menu Menu Options menu item to set a project specific default name for the foreign key column see Section 7 5 1 5 4 The Relationship Notation Submenu To change the global default see Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab To edit the properties of a foreign key double click anywhere on the connection line that joins the two tables This opens the relationship editor Mousing
97. graphics hardware To solve this problem renew the ATI drivers pack which can be downloaded from the AMD Web site B 4 What do the column flag acronyms PK NN UQ BIN UN ZF Al in the MySQL Workbench Table Editor mean Checking these boxes will alter the table column by assigning the checked constraints to the designated columns Hover over an acronym to view a description and see the MySQL Workbench Table Editor and MySQL CREATE TABLE documentation for further information 354 Appendix C MySQL Workbench and Utilities Change History Table of Contents C 1 MySQL Workbench Change History 0 cccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeee seca ae eae eeeeeeee ee aa aaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaea 355 C 2 MySQL Utilities Change History ccceceeeeeee cence teeter eset ee aaa teen tees ee ee aa aaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaneeeeeeeeeeeaaa 355 This appendix lists the changes from version to version in the MySQL Workbench and MySQL Utilities source code Note that we tend to update the manual at the same time we make changes to MySQL If you find a recent version of the MySQL Workbench or Utilities listed here that you can t find on our download page http dev mysql com downloads it means that the version has not yet been released The date mentioned with a release version is the date of the last Bazaar ChangeSet on which the release was based not the date when the packages were made available The binaries are usually made available
98. gt amp New Connection S New Server Instance Ei Edit Table Data m Create New EER Model P Manage Import Export z Edit SQL Script Create EER Model From Existing Database Manage Security Di ps Manage Connections E gt Create EER Model From SQL Script ig Manage Server Instances Sni 2 To administer your MySQL Server you must first create a Server Instance The instance contains information about the target server including how to connect to it From the MySQL Workbench Home window click New Server Instance The Create New Server Instance Profile wizard will be displayed 3 In this tutorial you will connect to a locally installed server so click Next 14 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 2 Getting Started Tutorial Specify Host Machine Create New Server Instance Profile Specify Host Machi ee cn Becca Specify the Host Machine the Database Server is running on This wizard will guide you through the creation of a Server Profile to manage a MySQL server To fully support management of a remote MySQL server an SSH daemon must be running on the target machine Alternatively if you are going to manage a Windows server from a Windows computer you can also use native Windows Management tools Remote management is used to start and stop a server and do server configuration You may create a Profile without remote management if you do not need that Functionality If your database server is runnin
99. has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice
100. have names similar to the script A command module includes classes and methods from one or more common modules where the abstract objects and method groups are kept The common modules reside in the mysql utilities 229 Introduction to extending the MySQL Utilities common folder of the source tree The following illustrates this arrangement using the mysqlserverinfo utility scripts mysqlserverinfo py mysql utilities command serverinfo py GF mysql utilities common options py ee mysql utilities common server py oe mysql utilities common tools py ee mysql utilities common format py Each utility script is designed to process the user input and option settings and pass them on to the command module Thus the script contains only such logic for managing and validating options The work of the operation resides in the command module Command modules are designed to be used from other Python applications For example one could call the methods in the serverinfo py module from another Python script This enables developers to create their own interfaces to the utilties It also permits developers to combine several utilities to form a macro level utility tailored to a specified need For example if there is a need to gather server information as well as disk usage it is possible to import the serverinfo py and diskusage py modules and create a new utility that performs both operations Common modules are the heart of t
101. is displayed the script terminates on a statement that fails If the button is depressed so that the green arrow is displayed execution continues past the failed code possibly generating additional result sets In either case any error generated from attempting to execute the faulty statement is recorded in the Output tabsheet e Commit Commits the current transaction Note All query tabs in the same connection share the same transactions To have independent transactions a new connection must be opened Rollback Rolls back the current transaction Note All query tabs in the same connection share the same transactions To have independent transactions a new connection must be opened Toggle Auto Commit Mode If selected each statement will be committed independently Note All query tabs in the same connection share the same transactions To have independent transactions a new connection must be opened Beautify SQL Beautify reformat the SQL script e Find panel Show the Find panel for the editor e Invisible characters Toggle display of invisible characters such as newlines tabs spaces 6 7 3 SQL Query Panel In this area you can enter SQL statements directly The statements entered can be saved to a file or snippet for later use At any point you can also execute the statements you have entered To save a snippet of code entered into the SQL Query panel click the Save SQL to Snippets List icon in the Snippets panel
102. is to get a list of all of the databases on the server We use the new server class instance to retrieve all of the databases on the server db_list for db in serverl get_all_databases db_list append db 0 None If you wanted to supply your own list of databases you could use an option like the following You could also add an else clause which would enable you to either get all of the databases by omitting the databases option or supply your own list of databases for example dat abases db1 db2 db3 databases action store dest dbs_to_copy parser add_option d type string help comma separated list of databases to include in the copy omit for all databases default None if opt dbs_to_copy is None for db in serverl get_all_databases db_list append db 0 None else zoe Clo iim ej closiite coon Sollie V 3 db_list append db None Notice we are creating a list of tuples This is because the dbcopy module uses a list of tuples in the form old_db new_db to enable you to copy a database to a new name For our purposes we do not want a rename so we leave the new name value set to None Next we want a list of all of the users Once again you could construct the new solution to be flexible by permitting the user to specify the users to copy We leave this as an exercise In this case we do not have a primitive for getting all users created on a server But we do have the a
103. key If the icon is a small key that column belongs to the primary key otherwise the icon is a blue diamond or a white diamond A blue diamond indicates the column has NN set To add or remove a column from the primary key double click the icon You can also add a primary key by checking the PRIMARY KEY check box inthe Column Details section of the table editor If you wish to create a composite primary key you can select multiple columns and check the PK check box However there is an additional step that is required you must click the Indexes tab then in the Index Columns panel you must set the desired order of the primary keys Workbench will attempt to automatically add quotation marks if the user does not start their entry with one For other data types the user must manage quoting if Note R When entering default values in the case of CHAR and VARCHAR data types MySQL required as it will not be handled automatically by MySQL Workbench Caution A Care must be taken when entering a default value for ENUM columns because a nonnumeric default will not be automatically quoted You must manually add single quote characters for the default value Note that MySQL Workbench will not prevent you from entering the default value without the single quotation marks If a nonnumeric default value is entered without quotation marks this will lead to errors For example if the model is reverse engineered the script will contain unquoted defau
104. licensed under Section A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 331 Libintl License A 16 Libintl License The following software may be included in this product libintl Copyright C 1994 X Consortium Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in he Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to se copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of he Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so ubject to the following conditions OY Gr is wir The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of the X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written
105. localhost connected Checking for binary logging on master Setting up replication done The following command starts replication from the beginning of a specific master binary log file mysqlreplicate master root localhost 3306 slave root localhost 3307 rpl user rpl rpl master log file my_log 000003 master on localhost connected slave on localhost connected Checking for binary logging on master Setting up replication done The following command starts replication from specific master binary log coordinates specific log file and position mysqlreplicate master root localhost 3306 slave root localhost 3307 rpl user rpl rpl master log file my_log 000001 master log pos 96 master on localhost connected slave on localhost connected Checking for binary logging on master Setting up replication done RECOMMENDATIONS You should set read_only 1 in the my cnf file for the slave to ensure that no accidental data changes such as INSERT DELETE UPDATE and so forth are permitted on the slave other than those produced by events read from the master Use the pedantic 287 and vv options for setting up replication on production servers to avoid possible problems with differing storage engines 289 mysqlrpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication 13 3 14 mysql rpladmin Administration u
106. log file entries The Administrator also displays system and server status System status includes e CPU utilization e Memory usage e Connection Health For server health the following are displayed Connection Usage e Traffic Query Cache Hit Rate e Key Efficiency 172 The Startup Tab Figure 9 3 MySQL Workbench Admin Page i MYSQL Workbench oee Admin mysqld 127 0 0 1 X File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help Task and Object Browser Server Status MANAGEMENT SERVER HEALTH eae Name mysqld 127 0 0 1 f Startup Shutdown Host WA Server E Status and System Variables a A Server Logs Status Runni CPU 19 Mem 73 Connection Usage 5 Traffic 7 95 KB s Query Cache Hitrate 0 00 K CONFIGURATION Host amp Options File localhost 49171 localhost 53528 localhost 53529 Users and Privileges localhost 55277 SHOW PROCESSLIST localhost 55278 SECURITY DATA EXPORT RESTORE Data Export and Restore Kill Query Kill Connec WB Admin Opened 9 7 1 The Startup Tab The Startup tab has several purposes To display database server status e To start up and shut down the server e To display the Startup Message log e To select whether the server starts when the system starts 173 The Configuration Tab Figure 9 4 Administrator Startup Tab G MySQL Workbench Admin mysqld 127 0 0 1 X File Edit View Da
107. md5 h is L Peter Deutsch lt ghost aladdin com gt Other authors are noted in the change history that follows in reverse chronological order 2002 04 13 lpd Removed support for non ANSI compilers removed references to Ghostscript clarified derivation from RFC 1321 now handles byte order either statically or dynamically 999 11 04 lpd Edited comments slightly for automatic TOC extraction 999 10 18 lpd Fixed typo in header comment ansi2knr rather than md5 added conditionalization for C compilation from Martin Purschke lt purschke bnl gov gt 9399 05 03 ied OPaGinagl Vveraron Asynchronous socket services The asynchat and asyncore modules contain the following notice 344 Python License Copyright 1996 by Sam Rushing All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Sam Rushing not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission SAM RUSHING DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM RUSHING BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM
108. mm 0 NULL 0 00 ATF French Southe Antarctica Antarctica 7780 00 putt 0 nuet 0 00 nue ATG Antigua and B North America Caribbean 442 00 1981 68000 70 5 612 00 584 00 AUS Australia Oceania Australia and 7741220 00 1901 18886000 79 8 351182 00 392911 00 AUT Austria Europe Western Europe 83859 00 1918 8091800 dad 211860 00 206025 00 AZE Azerbaijan Asia Middle East 86600 00 1991 7734000 62 9 4127 00 4100 00 BDI Burundi Africa Eastern Africa 27834 00 1962 6695000 46 2 903 00 982 00 BEL Belgium Europe Western Europe 30518 00 1830 10239000 77 8 249704 00 243948 00 BEN Benin Africa Western Africa 112622 00 1960 6097000 50 2 2357 00 2141 00 Country 1 Apply Revert Action Output Time Action Response Duration Fetch Time O 1 18 18 08 SELECT FROM world Country LIMIT 0 1000 239 row s returned 0 000 sec 0 001 sec _ Query Completed 56 Sidebar These additional controls enable you to make changes other than simple edits like inserting removing rows and exporting the data From left to right the additional controls are Edit current row Enters edit mode for the currently selected row Double clicking a cell has the same effect Note 9 It is possible to enter a function or other expression into a field Use the prefix func to prevent MySQL Workbench from escaping quotation marks For example for the expression md5 fred MySQL Workbench normally would generate the code md5 fred To prevent this enter t
109. new connection To read more about creating and managing connections see Section 6 6 Manage DB Connections Dialog 6 3 Edit Table Data Clicking this action item launches the Edit Table Data wizard which enables you to edit table data This is a two stage wizard The first stage enables you to select a Stored Connection The second stage enables you to select the Schema and Table you want to edit After the wizard is completed an SQL Editor tab is launched which displays a data grid that enables you to interactively edit table data as required To read more about the SQL Editor see Section 6 7 SQL Editor 6 4 Edit SQL Script Clicking this action item launches the Edit SQL Script wizard This is a two stage wizard The first stage enables you to select a Stored Connection The second stage enables you to select an SQL Script file and optionally have the script executed after it is opened After the wizard is completed an SQL Editor tab will be launched with the script displayed If you selected to run the script MySQL Workbench runs the script and displays the results Working with large data sets R The Edit SQL Script wizard is not well suited for executing large dump files and instead the Server Administration Manage Import Export feature should be used 6 5 Manage Connections Clicking this action item launches the Manage DB Connections wizard This wizard also displays Stored Connections which can be sele
110. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS 319 CURL 1libcur1 License SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE A 7 CURL 1libcur1 License The following software may be included in this product SURTE EC Use of any of this software is governed by the terms of the license below COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright c 1996 2009 Daniel Stenberg lt daniel haxx se gt All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all co
111. number of columns in all Variable MAIN tables in all schemata in the model The number of indexes in the model TOTAL_FK_COUNT Variable MAIN The number of foreign keys in the model SCHEMATA Section MAIN Used to mark the start and end of a SCHEMATA section the SCHEMATA data dictionary becomes active in this section SCHEMA_NAME Variable SCHEMATA The schema name SCHEMA_ID Variable SCHEMATA The schema ID TABLE_COUNT Variable SCHEMATA The number of tables in the current schema COLUMN_COUNT Variable SCHEMATA The number of columns in the current schema INDICES COUNT Variable SCHEMATA The number of indexes in the current schema COLUMNS_LISTING FOREIGN_KEYS_ COUNT Variable SCHEMATA The number of foreign keys in the current schema TABLES Section SCHEMATA Marks the start and end of a TABLES section the TABLES data dictionary becomes active in this section TABLE_NAME Variable TABLES The table name TABLE _ID Variable TABLES The table ID Section TABLES Marks the start and end of a COLUMNS _LISTING section the COLUMNS LISTING data dictionary becomes active in this section COLUMNS Section COLUMNS LISTING Marks the start and end of a COLUMNS section the COLUMNS data dictionary becomes active in this section COLUMN_KEY Variable COLUMNS Whether the column is a primary key COLUMN_NAME Variable COLUMNS The column
112. objects This feature works only for EER diagrams Enter the text you wish to search for in the Find Text list You may also select any or all of the following check boxes e Match Case e Whole Word e Use Regular Expression e Search in Comments e Search in SQL for Views SPs etc Any text you enter into the Find Text list is retained for the duration of your session Use the Next or Previous buttons to find occurrences of your search criterion Clicking the Find All button opens a Find Results window anchored at the bottom of the application If you wish you may undock this window as you would any other Use this window to navigate to objects For example double clicking the Description of an object located on an EER diagram navigates to the specific diagram and selects the object Notice that the properties of the object are displayed in the Properties palette The Find dialog window can also be opened using the Control F key combination Use Control G to find the next occurrence and Control Shift G to find a previous occurrence Close the Find dialog window by clicking the x in the top right corner or by pressing the Esc key 7 5 1 2 2 Workbench Preferences This menu item enables you to set global preferences for the MySQL Workbench application 70 Modeling Menus For further information see Section 5 4 Workbench Preferences 7 5 1 3 The View Menu The View menu has these items Home Selects the Home
113. of the table from table1 to movies Next add several columns Double click a cell within the Column Name column and the first field will default to moviesid because MySQL Workbench appends id to the table name as the default for the initial field Change the name to movie_id and keep the Datatype as INT Then be sure PK PRIMARY KEY NN NOT NULL and Al AUTO_INCREMENT are all checked Add two additional columns using the same method as described above Column Name Data Type Column Properties movie_title VARCHAR 45 NN release_date DATE YYYY MM DD None 27 Creating a Model Figure 4 15 Getting Started Tutorial Columns D File Edit View Amage Modei Database Plugins Scripting Community Heip BewerD3099 aa Desorption Editor Model Overnew Defirvsen Fag TINYINTI TINYINT DECMaL 10 FLOAT DOUBLE TINYINT 4 SMALLINT S MEDIUMINT InT 31 t movies BIGINT 20 gt movie ttie VARCHAR 45 INT I1 release_date ate MEDIUMELOS MEDIUMTEXT MEDIUMTEXT MEDIUMINT CEC mAL 10 DECAL 10 7 Now you can obtain a visual representation of this schema so far From the main menu select Model Create Diagram from Catalog Objects The EER Diagram will be created and displayed 28 Creating a Model Figure 4 16 Getting Started Tutorial EER Diagram File Edit View Arrange Medel Database Plugins Scripting Cemmunty Help Bew 7 g
114. on the vertical toolbar Make sure that the EER Diagram tab is selected then right click the image icon on the vertical toolbar The image icon is the icon just above the table icon Clicking the mouse on this icon changes the mouse pointer to an image pointer You can also change the mouse pointer to an image pointer by pressing the I key Create an image by clicking anywhere on the EER Diagram canvas This opens a file open dialog box Select the desired image then close the dialog box to create an image on the canvas To revert to the default mouse pointer click the arrow icon at the top of the vertical toolbar Right clicking this object opens a pop up menu with the following items Cut Image Copy Image e Edit Image Edit in New Window e Delete Image These menu items function in exactly the same way as they do for other objects on an EER diagram However images are not database objects so there is no confirmation dialog box when they are deleted 7 7 8 2 The Image Editor 7 7 8 2 1 To invoke the image editor double click an image object on an EER Diagram canvas This opens the image editor docked at the bottom of the application Double clicking the image editor tab undocks the editor Double click the title bar to redock it Any number of images may be open at the same time Each additional image appears as a tab at the top of the image editor The Image Tab Use the Image tab of the image editor to pe
115. over a relationship connector highlights the connector and the related keys as shown in the following figure The film and the film_actor tables are related on the fi1m_id field and these fields are highlighted in both tables Since the i1m_id field is part of the primary key in the film_actor table a solid line is used for the connector between the two tables Figure 7 16 The Relationship Connector film v Film_id SMALLINT 5 title VARCHAR 255 description TEXT release_year YEAR Q language_id TINYINT 3 original_language_id TINYINT 3 m fiim _actor v rental_duration TINYINT 3 film actor fil actor_id SMALLINT S gt rental_rate DECIMAL 4 2 Film_id SMALLINT S length SMALLINT S last_update TIMESTAMP replacement_cost DECIMALS 2 gt rating ENUM G PG PG 13 gt special_features SET Trailers Comm last_update TIMESTAMP b gt If the placement of a connection s caption is not suitable you can change its position by dragging it to a different location If you have set a secondary caption its position can also be changed For more information about secondary captions see Section 7 7 2 3 Connection Properties Where the notation style permits Classic for example the cardinality indicators can also be repositioned The relationship notation style in Figure 7 16 The Relationship Connector is the default crow s foot You can ch
116. permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 282 specifies the grid format An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES Find all objects with a name that matches the pattern t_ the letter t followed by any single character mysqlmetagrep pattern t_ server mats localhost 4 4 4 4 Connection Object Type Object Name Database 4 4 4 4 mats localhost 3306 TABLE ea test Mets localhost 23306 TABLE 2 test mats localhost 3306 TABLE eee test 4 4 4 4 To find all object that contain t2 in the name or the body for routines triggers and events mysqlmetagrep b pattern t2 server mats localhost 3306 4 4 4 4 Connection Object Type Object Name Database 4 4 4 4 Poot localtios 2306 TRIGGER IEC EESO test POoes localtiost 3306 TABLE 2 test 4 4 4 4 In the preceding output the trigger name does not match the pattern but is
117. ping lt number gt Number of ping attempts for detecting downed server Note on some platforms this is the same as number of seconds to wait for ping to return seconds behind lt seconds gt Used to detect slave delay The maximum number of seconds behind the master permitted before slave is considered behind the master Default 0 slaves lt slave connections gt Connection information for slave servers in the form lt users lt passwd gt lt host lt port gt lt socket gt List multiple slaves in comma separated list timeout lt seconds gt Maximum timeout in seconds to wait for each replication command to complete For example timeout for slave waiting to catch up to master Default 3 verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit The login user must have the appropriate permissions to execute SHOW SLAVE STATUS SHOW MASTER STATUS and SHOW VARIABLES on the appropriate servers as well as grant the REPLICATE SLAVE privilege The utility checks permissions for the master slaves and candidates at startup At startup the console will attempt to register itself with the master If another console is already registered and the failover mode is auto or elect the console will be blocked from running failover When a c
118. public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free S
119. schema for each column in the table look for another table whose name and primary key name match the current column name if such a table is found add a foreign key referencing it As iterating the complete table list to find a match can be slow for models with a large number of tables it is necessary to optimize by pre computing all possible foreign key names in a given schema import grt def auto_create_fks schema fk_name_format table s_ pk s possible _fks create the list of possible foreign keys from the list of tables for table in schema tables if table primaryKey format_args table table name pk table primaryKey name fkname fk_name_format format_args possible _fks fkname table 220 Tutorial Writing Plugins go through all tables in schema this time to find columns that may be a fk for table in schema tables for column in table columns if possible_fks has_key column name ref_table possible_fks column name if ref_table primaryKey formattedType column type continue fk table createForeignKey column name _fk k referencedTable ref_table k columns append column fk referencedColumn append ref_table primaryKey print Created foreign key s from s s to s s amp fk name table name column name ref_table name ref_table primaryKey name auto_create_fks grt root wb doc physicalModels 0 catalog schemata 0 Creating a Plugin from a Script To
120. section of the MySQL Model page Notes are typically used to help document the design process 7 7 6 1 Adding Notes Double clicking the Add Note iconin the Model Notes section of the MySQL Model page adds a note with the default name of notel If a note with this name already exists the new note is named note2 Adding a new note automatically opens the note editor docked at the bottom of the application For information about using the note editor see Section 7 7 6 2 The Note Editor Right clicking a note opens a pop up menu with the following items e Rename e Cut note_name Copy note_name 108 Creating Text Objects Delete note_name The Edit Note item opens the note editor For information about using the note editor see Section 7 7 6 2 The Note Editor The cut and copy items are useful for copying notes between different schemata Notes can be added only on the MySQL Model page 7 7 6 2 The Note Editor To invoke the note editor double click a note object in the Model Note section on the MySQL Model page This opens the note editor docked at the bottom of the application Double clicking the note tab undocks the editor Double click the title bar to redock it Any number of notes may be open at the same time Each additional note appears as a tab at the top of the note editor Use the editor to change the name of a note or its contents 7 7 7 Creating Text Objects Text objects are
121. sections describe each of these in more detail 6 7 4 1 Output and History Tabsheet The Output and History tabsheet is located at the bottom of MySQL Workbench and can be toggled on or off It contains a select box that includes Action Output Text Output and History options The Action Output tabsheet displays a summary of the communication between the script and the server The messages displayed can be information or errors Each message displays the time the action that was carried out and the response from the server This output is useful for troubleshooting scripts The Text Output tabsheet will display a textual representation of the query as displayed using the MySQL Console Use Query Execute All or Selection to Text to send output to this tabsheet The History tabsheet provides a history of SQL operations carried out The time and SQL code for each operation is recorded To view the SQL executed click the time and the SQL code executed will be displayed in the SQL column 6 7 4 2 Results Tabsheets The results area of the screen shows the results from any queries that have been executed If the script contains multiple queries a result tab will be generated for each query that returns results Figure 6 9 SQL Editor Results Tabsheets Overview Output History Saeg Result 1 x Ko gt he IE AS gt SaOXe Q Fetched 239 records name code Netherlands NLD Netherlands Antiles ANT Albania ALB Algeria DZA America
122. specifies 305 mysqlserverinfo Display Common Diagnostic Information from a Server To run the utility against several servers specify the server 306 option multiple times In this case the utility attempts to connect to each server and read the information To see the MySQL servers running on the local machine use the show servers 306 option This shows all the servers with their process ID and data directory On Windows the utility shows only the process ID and port OPTIONS mysqlserverinfo accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit basedir lt basedir gt The base directory for the server This option is required for starting an offline server datadir lt datadir gt The data directory for the server This option is required for starting an offline server format lt format gt f lt format gt Specify the output display format Permitted format values are grid csv tab and vertical The default is grid no headers h Do not display column headers This option applies only for csv and tab output port range lt start end gt The port range to check for finding running servers This option applies only to Windows and is ignored unless show servers 306 is given The default range is 3306 3333 Server lt server gt Connection information for a server in lt user gt lt passwa gt lt host lt port gt lt socket gt format Use thi
123. svdca vat avevagaiawetavede devas aiaa A16 LIDINTMLICEG NSE seninem E TE a a A A17 CIXI LICENSE riirii aa a Aaa aE EAE A AE aA A a a aa yaa sam Ml oy 4 0 GICONSG rra E T T A19 Lua iblua LICGNSS siscocisesseonenssdeces en NER AEAEE RRA ERE S A20 Paramiko LICENSE ensce T RE A21 PORE LICENSE dersien a a a a a a aa aa T A22 PIXMaty LICENS Eir a aaan a a a a a a O RES A 23 P yGtrypto LICENSE secssseveiccsesteecsendsd cece vueerh ene cecanshuedevad aaa a aE a aa iaaa aaa A24 PYODBG License smaru nn E E E A E A25 Python LICGMSO esisi ssion KERERE EEE E RAEE EEES NEEE SEERA KAE E A26 S mtila LICENSE Herendeen a a a a a a EEA A 27ScintilaNED LICENSE sssrinin aa Eaa n EA EA Ea EAEE EE Aee TINY AME LICENS ern nE E S A 29 TreeViewAdv for NET LICENSE ccccc cece eeaseceeeseceeeneceeaneceesneceesgeceeaeeeeaeceeaeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeees A 30 VSQLItE 4 LICENSE sivas cisecesasiaestasdeuudeastagvdenses a ve sivwevdoaiendsoatasvdeasaaweasagsiaonnaae ASt zr ELON SE aaisan a AE A A AEEA sxeres aiewedesetaverebaaalen Use of any of this software is governed by the terms of the licenses that follow MySQL Workbench Section A 1 NET Flat TabControl License Section A 2 ANTLR 3 4 License Section A 3 Bitstream Vera License Section A 4 Boost Library License Section A 5 Cairo License Section A 6 CTemplate Google Template System License Section A 7 CURL 1ibcur1 License 315
124. table fields and patis a pattern For a process to match all field conditions must match sql only_body False Return the SQL code for executing the search and optionally the kill If only_body is True only the body of the function is shown This is useful if the SQL code is to be used with other utilities that generate the routine declaration If only_body is False a complete procedure will be generated if there is any kill action supplied and just a select statement if it is a plain search Parameters only_body boolean Show only the body of the procedure If this is False a complete procedure is returned 237 Manual Pages Returns SQL code for executing the operation specified by the options Return type string execute connections output sys stdout connector mysql connector Execute the search on each of the connections supplied If outout is not None the value is treated as a file object and the result of the execution is printed on that stream Note that the output and connector arguments must be supplied as keyword arguments All other arguments are treated as connection specifiers Parameters connections Sequence of connection specifiers to send the search to output File object to use for writing the result e connector Connector to use for connecting to the servers 13 3 Manual Pages 13 3 1 MySQL Utilities Overview
125. table2_idtable2 NTI NULL DEFAULT NULL PRIMARY KEY idtable3 INDEX tk_table3_table21 table2_idtable2 ASC CONSTRAINT fk_table3_table21 FOREIGN KEY table2_idtable2 REFERENCES mydb table2 idtable2 ON DELETE NO ACTION ON UPDATE NO ACTION ENGINE InnoDB DEFAULT CHARACTER SET latint COLLATE latint _swedish_ci SET SQL_MODE OLD_SQL_MODE SET FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS OLD_FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS SET UNIQUE_CHECKS 0LD_UNIQUE_CHECKS Copy to Clipboard Here you can review and change the alter script that will be generated Make any changes you wish and if you are happy with the changes save the ALTER script to file using the Save to File button You can also click the Execute button to tell MYSQL Workbench to write the script to the previously specified output file The generated script can then be used to update the database 7 7 10 2 Forward Engineering to a Live Server Use forward engineering to export your schema design to a MySQL server Select the schema that you wish to forward engineer and then choose the Database Forward Engineer menu item from the main menu The first page to be displayed is Catalog Validation validation is available only in the Standard Edition 126 Forward Engineering Figure 7 33 Catalog Validation Forward Engineer to Database Catalog Validati atalog alidation Catalog Validation The following tasks will now be executed
126. the difftype 265 option unified default Display unified format output context Display context format output differ Display differ style format output sql Display SQL transformation statement output The changes for 265 option controls the direction of the difference by specifying the object to be transformed in either the difference report default or the transformation report designated with the difftype sql 265 option Consider the following command mysqldiff serverl root host1 server2 root host2 difftype sql db1 tablel dbx table3 The leftmost database db1 exists on the server designated by the server1 265 option host1 The rightmost database dbx exists on the server designated by the server2 265 option host 2 e changes for server1 265 Produce output that shows how to make the definitions of objects on server1 like the definitions of the corresponding objects on server2 changes for server2 265 Produce output that shows how to make the definitions of objects on server2 like the definitions of the corresponding objects on server1 The default direction is server1 For sql difference format you can also see the reverse transformation by specifying the show reverse 265 option The utility stops on the first occurrence of missing objects or when an object does not match To override this behavior specify the force 265 option to cause the util
127. the Catalog Tree to the Note R On Linux there is a quirk in the GTK tree control where a simple click always EER diagram canvas you must perform the operation as follows 80 The Layers Palette 1 Click the first item in the tree 2 Hold the Shift key click the last item and do not release the Shift key 3 Keep the Shift key depressed and commence the dragging operation 4 Release the Shift key before you release the mouse button to drop selected objects onto the canvas This procedure also applies to use of the Control key when selecting multiple nonadjacent elements in the Catalog Tree You can toggle the sidebar on and off using the Toggle Sidebar button which is located in the top right of the application 7 5 11 The Layers Palette 7 5 11 1 This palette shows all the layers and figures that have been placed on an EER diagram If a layer or figure is currently selected an x appears beside the name of the object and its properties are displayed in the Properties palette This can be especially useful in determining which objects are selected when you have selected multiple objects using the various options under the Select menu item For more information on this topic see Section 7 5 1 2 The Edit Menu Selecting an object in the Layers palette also adjusts the view port to the area of the canvas where the object is located Finding Invisible Objects Using the Layers Palette In some circumstances
128. the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Scintilla includes some files copyright Apple Computer Inc Disclaimer IMPORTANT This Apple software is supplied to you by Apple Computer Inc Apple in consideration of your agreement to the following terms and your use installation modification or redistribution of this Apple software constitutes acceptance of these terms If you do not agree with these terms please do not use install modify or redistribute this Apple software In consideration of your agreement to abide by the following terms and subject to these terms Apple grants you a personal non exclusive license
129. the console will complete the option For the cases where an option requires a value the console will complete the option name and append the character Tab completion for options works for both the full name and the alias if available If the user presses TAB twice the console will display a list of matching options Pressing TAB twice immediately after typing the name of a MySQL Utility will display a list of all options for that utility Tab completion for variables works the same as that for options In this case the user must first type the character then press TAB For example if a variable SERVER1 exists when the user types server SER lt TABs gt the console will complete the SERVER variable name For cases where there are multiple variables pressing TAB twice will display a list of all matches to the first N characters Pressing TAB twice after typing only the character will display a list of all variables Note the console does not require typing the mysq l prefix for the utility For example if the user types disku lt TAB gt the console will complete the command with diskusage Executing utilities is accomplished by typing the complete command and pressing ENTER The user does not have to type python or provide the py file extension The console will add these if neeeded The user can also run commands using the option The value for this option is a semi colon separated list of commands to e
130. the following command S mysqlrplshow recurse prompt num retries 1 master root localhost 3331 Server localhost 3331 is running on localhost master on localhost connected Finding slaves for master localhost 3331 Server localhost 3332 is running on localhost master on localhost FAILED Connection to locelnost 3322 has failed Please enter the following information to connect to this server User name root Password master on localhost connected Finding slaves for master localhost 3332 Server localhost 3333 is running on localhost master on localhost FAILED Connection to locelinost 3323 has failed Please enter the following information to connect to this server User name root Password master on localhost connected Finding slaves for master localhost 3333 Server localhost 3334 is running on localhost master on localhost FAILED Connection to localhost 3334 has failed Please enter the following information to connect to this server User name root Password master on localhost connected Finding slaves for master localhost 3334 Replication Topology Graph localhost 3331 MASTER lloezllnoses S332 Siena toe I ezullievscies 33S SibAwia MASER 7 loe azllinoses o e Siena 13 3 17 mysqlserverclone Clone Existing Server to Create New Server This utility permits an administrator to clone an existing MySQL server ins
131. this starting point is the root of the tree that is You can expand or collapse the GRT Globals tree as desired The GRT Globals tree is the structure in which MySQL Workbench stores document data Clicking any item results in its name and value being displayed in the panel below the tree The Classes Tab A class is a user defined data type formed by combining primitive data types integers doubles strings dicts lists and objects This tab shows the definitions of the classes used by the objects in the Modules tab Clicking a class causes a brief description of the class to be displayed in a panel below the classes explorer When the Classes tab is selected the list displays the following items Group by Name Group by the object name 219 Tutorial Writing Plugins e Group by Hierarchy Group by inheritance e Group by Package Group by functionality The default view for this tab is Group By Name This view shows all the different objects arranged alphabetically Click the icon or double click a package to show the properties of the struct If you switch to the hierarchical view you will see Grt Ob ject the parent object from which all other objects are derived The Modules Tab The Modules tab enables you to browse the MySQL Workbench installed modules and their functions Clicking a module within the explorer causes its details to be displayed in a panel below the explorer This facility is useful for explor
132. to extending the MySQL Utilities result do_something_wonderful 1l obj_l obj_2 opt_dictionary The documentation block for the preceding method is the style used throughout the library Example Now that you are familiar with the MySQL utilities and the supporting library modules let us take a look at an example that combines some of these modules to solve a problem Suppose that you want to develop a new database solution and need to use real world data and user accounts for testing The mysqlserverclone MySQL utility looks like a possibility but it makes only an instance of a running server It does not copy data However mysqidbcopy makes a copy of the data and mysqluserclone clones the users You could run each of these utilities in sequence and that would work but we are lazy at heart and want something that not only copies everything but also finds it for us That is we want a one command solution The good news is that this is indeed possible and very easy to do Let us start by breaking the problem down into its smaller components In a nutshell we must perform these tasks e Connect to the original server Find all of the databases Find all of the users e Make a clone of the original server Copy all of the databases Copy all of the users If you look at the utilities and the modules just listed you see that we have solutions and primitives for each of these operations So you need not even call the MySQL
133. version e About Workbench Displays the MySQL Workbench About window 7 5 1 10 1 System Info Use the System Info menu item to display information about your system This item is especially useful for determining your rendering mode Sample output follows read_mysql_cfg_file C Program Files MySQL MySQL Server 5 1 my ini M empnt aple Esi Zen AOM GQinyalsammis omtmbui temmsaze eM y trable cachet 1256 read_rnd_buffer_size 256K frome VISOG VME Connect Tons VALOO inniodbabuikersmpOOlmSHiZew m ASMI myisam_max_sort_file_size 100G sql mode STRICT_TRANS_TABLES NO_AUTO_CREATE_USER NO_LENGINE_SUBSTITUTION pacedi C Program Files MySOL MySOL Server 5 1 tdetault elagicacicer eeie lV dletealimil datadir C ProgramData MySQL MySQL Server 5 1 Data innodb_log_buffer_size 1M annodbmlogmialelisaze YOM iy Geinnodbmichneadliconcimeraenciyaly Coy read buffer size VOAR innodb_additional_mem_pool_size 2M thread_cache_size 8 agnela se llinela oe eae jem Come p Ey query_cache_size 0 sorc putter corer AZADOR 5 default storage engine INNODB key_buffer_size 11M MySQL Workbench OSS for Windows version 5 2 8 Cairo Version 1 8 6 Rendering Mode GDI requested create a diagram to confirm OpenGL Driver Version Not Detected OS unknown CPU Intel R Core TM 2 Duo CPU T9300 2 50GHz 1 0 GB RAM Video a
134. window Windows A submenu with items that provide a means for opening the windows associated with them e Model Navigator Opens the Model Navigator palette e Catalog Opens the Catalog palette e Layers Opens the Layers palette User Datatypes Opens the User Datatypes palette e Object Descriptions Opens the Description palette Object Properties Opens the Properties palette e Undo History Opens the History palette Output Displays the console output The keyboard shortcut for this menu item is Control F2 Reset Window Layout Resets all windows to their default layout Zoom 100 The default level of detail of an EER diagram Zoom In Zooms in on an EER diagram Zoom Out Zooms out from an EER diagram The ability to zoom in on an EER diagram is also available using the slider tool in the Model Navigator palette See Section 7 5 9 The Model Navigator Panel Set Marker Bookmarks an object From the keyboard select the object you wish to bookmark then use the key combination Control Shift and the number of the marker 1 through 9 You may create up to nine markers Go To Marker Returns to a marker From the keyboard use the Control key and the number of the marker Toggle Grid Displays grid lines on an EER diagram Toggle Page Guides Toggles Page Guides 7 5 1 4 The Arrange Menu The Arrange menu items apply only to objects on an EER diagram canvas and are enabled only if an EER diagram view is active The A
135. window to set the options for creating documentation of your database models For more information see Section 7 11 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version The Validation Submenus Commercial Version The Model menu has two validation submenus Validation and Validation MySQL Use these submenus for general validation and MySQL specific validation of the objects and relationships defined in your model Note R These items are not available in the MySQL Workbench OSS version The Validation submenu has these items e Validate All Performs all available validation checks e Empty Content Validation Checks for objects with no content such as a table with no columns e Table Efficiency Validation Checks the efficiency of tables such as a table with no primary key defined Duplicate Identifiers Validation Checks for duplicate identifiers such as two tables with the same name Consistency Validation Checks for consistent naming conventions e Logic Validation Checks for example that a foreign key does not reference a nonprimary key column in the source table The Validation MySQL submenu has these items e Validate All Performs all available validation checks e Integrity Validation Checks for invalid references such as a table name longer than the maximum permitted e Syntax validation Checks for correct SQL syntax e Duplicate Identifiers Validation Additions Checks for objects with the same name
136. with Modules and Plugins Workbench model data such as diagrams schemata and tables is stored in a hierarchy of objects that can be accessed by any plugin The information is represented using standard data types integers doubles strings dicts lists and objects The GRT can be accessed using external scripting languages such as Lua and Python Awareness is required of how the GRT data types map into the scripting language In Python for example the GRT integer double and string data types are seen as corresponding Python data types Lists and dicts are kept in their internal representation but can generally be treated as Python lists and dicts and accessed in the usual way Objects contain data fields and methods but the GRT recognizes only objects from a pre registered class hierarchy It is possible to fully examine the classes contained within the GRT using the Workbench Scripting Shell Dots in class names are changed to underscores in their Python counterparts For example db mysql Table becomes db_mysql_Table in Python The Application Objects Tree GRT Tree 213 Modules As mentioned previously Workbench document data is stored in an object hierarchy This hierarchy is known as the GRT Tree The GRT Tree can be accessed and modified from supported external scripting languages such as Python Care should be taken when modifying the GRT Tree to prevent a mistake from leading to corruption of the document Backups
137. you may want to make an object on an EER diagram invisible Select the object and in the Properties palette set the visible property to False The Layer palette provides an easy way to locate an object such as a relationship that has been set to hidden Open the Layers palette and select the object by double clicking it You can then edit the object and change its visibility setting to Fully Visible 7 5 12 The Properties Palette The Properties palette is used to display and edit the properties of objects on an EER diagram It is especially useful for editing display objects such as layers and notes All objects except connections have the following properties except as noted color The color accent of the object displayed as a hexadecimal value Change the color of the object by changing this value Only characters that are legal for hexadecimal values may be entered You can also change the color by clicking the button to open a color changer dialog box e description Applicable to layers only A means of documenting the purpose of a layer expanded This attribute applies to objects such as tables that can be expanded to show columns indexes and triggers height The height of the object Depending upon the object this property may be read only or read write e left The number of pixels from the object to the left side of the canvas 81 EER Diagram Editor locked Whether the object is locked The val
138. your model is saved Click Save Model to Current File on the main toolbar 4 3 Adding Data to Your Database In the previous section you created a model schema and table You also forward engineered your model to the live server In this section you will see how you can use MySQL Workbench to add data into your database on the live server 1 On the Home window click the link Edit Table Data in the SQL Development area of the Workspace This launches Edit Table Data wizard 31 Adding Data to Your Database Figure 4 19 Getting Started Tutorial Edit Table Data ere Roos What s New in This Release sini gt Workbench Read about ali o l Changes in this MySQL Workbench release Workspace SQL Development cal Data Modeling Server Administration Conn bases and run v7 Crew forwar Ci Gatabase server setup a e abe 3 sync epot and se gt Open Easting EER Model E Server Administration a im Local instance MySQLSS i User rost Host beshost 3306 Gy tow Connection sm New Server Instance v T oe Table Data 8 Create New EER Model ah Manage Import Export ESE Sr Create EER Model From Easting Database Manage Security 5 E Manage Connections Create EER Model From SQL Script gg Manage Server Instances gt a 2 In the wizard select the Big Iron Server connection from the stored connection list Click Next 3 Select the schema dvd_collection Select the table to edit movies Click Finish
139. 1 and slow down operation lt Interval to perform auto saving of the open m Auto save model interval 1 minute The model will be restored from the last auto if Workbench unexpectedly quits SQL Editor M Save snapshot of open editors on close Interval to perform auto saving of all open script tab Auto save scripts interval 1 minute The scripts will be restored from the last auto saved if Workbench unexpectedly quits _ Place sidebar on the right side P Select the language to use in the interactive GRT shell Interactive GRT Shell languag python Scripts modules and plugins will work regardless of this set This option requires a restart ax Cancel The preferences dialog box contains the following tabs e General Configuration of general purpose options Administrator Configuration of tools used by the Administrator functionality e SQL Editor Configuration of the SQL Editor e Model Default object names e MySQL Configuration of the default storage engine e Diagram EER diagram settings e Appearance Change colors and fonts used by various Workbench components A more detailed discussion of these options follows 38 The General Tab 5 4 1 The General Tab The General tab enables you to set the following options e Automatically Reopen Previous Model When Started Check this if you want the model on which you previously worked to be automatically reopened when
140. 12 ODBC DiVersi a aa a aa aa e raaa a aria A 187 10 2 Migration Overview ssssssssssssssrsessssssrtrrrrrrsssstnntntttrsstsnntnttttastsnntntttnessnttnnttnoessnenn rennene 187 10 2 1 A visual guide to performing a database migration ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 188 10 2 2 Migrating from supported databases eee cece cece tere tena eee eeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeees 202 10 2 3 Migrating from unsupported generic databases ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 203 10 3 Conceptual DBMS equivalents cccccceeceeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeee ee aaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeaes 203 10 4 Microsoft SQL Server Migration 2 0 0 0 cece cece ee cece ee eee ee te ee ee ee ee ead teeeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeeeeeeaeaaea 205 ICA PPEPALAtlONS se Sica ce eee cand EE ales uch ade aah ahasd Stiga teenena twas E dnad auaes 205 10422 DIVOS ea aeaeaei e e e EE REEE EIA REA AEREE ATEA EEEE RRENEN 205 10 4 3 Connection Setup cece cece cece cece cece aaa e eee seen ee ee aa eae te eeeeeeeeaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeasaaaaneeeeeeees 207 10 4 4 Microsoft SQL Server Type Mapping ceceeeeeeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 207 10 5 PostgreSQL migration cccceccceceeeeeeeee ects cena ae ete ee ee ee ee ae aaaeaeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeasaaaaeeeeeees 208 10 5 4s Pre paratlons scttieficouseth cates cahcoensshacgegedhdaeeegdavcuy ses E EAEE TATE ONAA 208 ES 22s IDIIVGTS gosean ites AAE ONA dep dates A det
141. 2 MySQL Workbench Editions The Community Edition OSS The Community Edition is the foundation of all MySQL Workbench editions versions that are currently available or those that will become available in the future All editions of MySQL Workbench are based on the Community Edition and all future improvements to the base framework and feature set will be included in this version The Community Edition is a full feature product that puts a powerful database management tool into the hands of the MySQL community The Standard Edition The Standard Edition is a commercial extension that builds on top of the OSS Edition and adds modules and plugins enabling an optimized work flow The highlights of this edition are e MySQL Specific Schema Validation e Model Validation e General Schema Validation e DBDoc DBDoc provides the following features e Document complex database schemata e Document all SQL object types e Document output available in different file formats A comparison of edition features can be found at MySQL Workbench Developer Central Chapter 3 Installing and Launching MySQL Workbench Table of Contents 3 1 Hardware Requirement sosire ccc ceceee ce eeee erect ee ee cece PREEN ee eee ee PENEN REEE ERRANA RERNE TAE REENA E RUA 3 2 Software Requirements ss c cc2et2 oct vsaleavcaeeasedevsaesesvonsd oti aaa r aaa ae Ai ci KAE Na aeaa aiai 3 3 Starting MySQL Workbench cccceecceee eee teeter ee ee ee
142. 4 Fe NOC E OL satan eevee eee T scree are Ae arenas seine cee ede teeta ere 65 To 1 Modeling MENUS sessiossa Ea a suey cand ES 66 Koe LNO TOO ee E 76 79 3 EER Diagrams eeror anr iana ATENE NEO bees ETRE ENEKEN EED NOTSA 77 7 5 4 The Physical Schemata Panel ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeneeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeees 77 7 5 5 The Schema Privileges Panel ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeee esse aaa eeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeseaaaaaanees 78 75 6 The SQL Scripts Pane sis cdeveceeccesscotaacaneedeedsnidaacesaveccecadeigaceayedesbeedcauaeenavensecnesaaveans 79 Tod The Model Notes Panel wes ecccscicceessceyecesbeaeetens Levedeet cues eens taveveabcbiceen AAN AAT AESKA toy eaten 79 ToB The Histon Palola esan A A oe efeiebaedetces ben ceisndeestemactas 79 7 5 9 The Model Navigator Panel cece cee ee cece eee e ence ee ee ARREA A a 80 7 5 10 The Catalog Tree Palette 2 0 0 0 ceccceceeeeeee cece ae eeteeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaaceeeeeeeseaaaaaaneeeeeeeeeaaa 80 Toli The Layers Palette cc cececcssteveedsicedevitaceybbcabce evens bueedest AINET NEENA ERA AARAA ERRAR 81 T12 10e Properties Palette sercon ar a aca tebeen stele sanienSenavecsvaueerasvevestasesesittadeers 81 6 EER Diagram Emon vss sesesstsaecenecueevenenilccnend sdieeennyna seedee seven singed an eheeesbrha seeder ceteeeeneeenst ndeeens 82 LO INe Vertical Taobao S ssa aeiaioneccnaneagineiends 82 4 7 Working with Models 6 casesiciedeat ekira siaaa nE AEAN
143. 7 10 MySQL Workbench Schema Validation Plugins Commercial Version ceceeeee 146 FAO As General Validation sorea A E T ERETT 146 7 10 2 MySQL Specific Validation 0 ccceccceceeeeeeeee cece ee aaa eeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaeeeeeeeeseaaaaeeeeees 147 7 11 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version cceeeeeeeeeeeees 148 7 12 Customizing DBDoc Model Reporting Templates ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeees 151 7 12 1 Supported Template Markers ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeees 155 7 12 2 Creating a Custom Template cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeeeeaeaaeaneneeees 158 8 Generating code OVErVICW 0 ec eeeceeeeeeeee cece ne ea teen teen ee ee ae aa aad eeeeeeeeaeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaaneeeeeeeaeaaaaeneeees 163 8 1 Generating SQL QUEMIES a vlsssisetecercssnasuesedtegenetenibes eaten cree abiwuedvadyg cneeauuveee EEEa 163 8 2 Generating PAP COG segane ea E EAA A ES 163 9 Server AGMINIStrAtiON wersion aaea boas aat a e a a ia aaa KA aa AA aad aa a Ea 165 9 1 Server Administration sssreserusinioniine a a i i E aE 165 9 2 New Server INSTANCE rusenia eaaa iaia NI a aT O Aa ANa aa 166 9 3 Manage Data Import Export erase T 166 9 4 Manage SOCUMILY aciszssesxondes cadens seinieedeneeeaaea a EAEAN E AEAEE 166 9 5 Manage Server Instances c cceeceeeee cece eee nett ee ee ee ee ae aaae eee esse ee
144. 7 15 The Options Tab Options General Options Pack Keys Table Password Auto Increment Row Options Row Format Avg Row Length Min Rows Max Rows Storage Options Data Directory Index Directory Merge Table Options Union Tables Merge Method Columns Indexes Don t use X F Delay Key Updates Don t Use X J Use Checksum Don t Use Foreign Keys Triggers pron to generate smaller indices This DEFAULT telis the storage engine Use this Setting t by makes updates slower and reads faster pack long CHAR VARCHAR columns Password to encrypt the table definition file This option does not do anything in the standard MySQL version The intial AUTO_INCREMENT value for the table only for MyISAM Use this option to delay the key updates unti the table is dosed This works for MyISAM only Defines how the rows in MyISAM tables should be stored The option value can FIXED or DYNAMIC for static or variable length row format The utility myisampack can be used to se An approximation of the average row length for your table You need to set this only for large tables with varieble site records The minimum number of rows you plan to store in the table The maximum number of rows you plan to store in the table Activate this option you want MySQL to maintain a live checksum for all rows This makes the table a ikte slower to update but also makes k easier to find
145. 74 and the slave is reading the correct master log file and slave delay is not more than the seconds behind 274 threshold option At each interval if the discover slaves option was specified at startup and new slaves are discovered the health report is refreshed gtid Display the master s list of executed GTIDs contents of the GTID variables GLOBAL GTID_EXECUTED GLOBAL GTID_PURGED and GLOBAL GTID_OWNED Thus the user can toggle through four screens by pressing the c key repeatedly The display will cycle through all four screens restarting after the fourth screen UUID Display universally unique identifiers UUIDs for all servers Log This option is visible only if the 10g 273 option is specified Show the contents of the log file This can be helpful to see at a later time when failover occurred and the actions or messages recorded at the time The user interface is designed to match the size of the terminal window in which it is run A refresh option is provided to permit users to resize their terminal windows or refresh the display at any time However the interface will automatically resize to the terminal window on each interval The interface will display the name of the utility the master s status including binary log file position and filters as well as the date and time of the next interval event The interface will also permit the user to scroll up or down through a list longer
146. 9 2004 2008 Keith Packard Copyasic hie 00M SuiS by EN Copyright 2000 Keith Packard member of The XFree86 Project Inc Coy etene 2004 2005 2007 2008 2008 ZOLO isch eis Wine Copyright 2004 Nicholas Miell 335 Pixman License Copyright 2005 Lars Knoll amp Zack Rusin Trolltech Copyright 2005 Trolltech AS Copyright 2007 Luca Barbato Copyright 2008 Aaron Plattner NVIDIA Corporation Copyright 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera Copyright 2008 Andr Tupinamba Copyright 2008 Mozilla Corporation Copyright 2008 Frederic Plourde Copyright 2009 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT HALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LI
147. 9322 Sleep 2 DATA EXPORT RESTORE amp Data Export amp Data Import Restore Kill Query Kill Connection Refresh 14 Click the Stop Server button The message window will show that the server has stopped 15 Click the Start Server button to resume the server The message window will confirm that the server is running You have now seen how to create a server instance to enable you to manage a MySQL server For further information see Chapter 9 Server Administration 4 2 Creating a Model In this section you will learn how to create a new database model create a table create an EER Diagram of your model and then forward engineer your model to the live database server 1 Start MySQL Workbench On the Home window select Create new EER Model A model can contain multiple schemata Note that when you create a new model it contains the mydb schema by default You can change the name of this schema to serve your own purposes or delete it 25 Creating a Model Figure 4 13 Getting Started Tutorial Home Window Workbench Central Welcome to MySQL Workbench an What s New in This Release Workbench Read about all changes im this MySQL Workbench release Workspace SQL Development oa Data Modeling Server Administration Connect to existing databases and run P7 Create and manage models forward amp Configure your database server setup SQL Queries SQL scripts edit data and reverse engineer com
148. ABLE FOR NY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN CTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM UT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE R OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE COOL Ew ixman v0 17 4 and lower he following is the standard copyright agreed upon y most contributors and is currently the canonical cense though a modification is currently under iscussion Copyright holders of new code should use his license statement where possible and append their fame to ihe dist EE On Ee o S Copyright 1987 1988 1989 1998 The Open Group Copyright 1987 1988 1989 Digital Equipment Corporation Copyright 1999 2004 2008 Keith Packard Cop yecarciitsens 0 COR Ssh Ne Copyright 2000 Keith Packard member of The XFree86 Project Inc Copyright 2004 2005 2007 2008 Red Hat Inc Copyright 2004 Nicholas Miell Copyright 2003 Lars Kioll amp Zack Rusin Trollteen Copyright 2005 Trolltech AS Copyright 2007 Luca Barbato Copyright 2008 Aaron Plattner NVIDIA Corporation Copyright 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera Copyright 2008 AndrA TupinambAj Copyright 2008 Mozilla Corporation Copyright 2008 Frederic Plourde Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems Inc Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modif
149. AGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Cookie management The Cookie module contains the following notice Copyright 2000 by Timothy O Malley lt timo alum mit edu gt All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Timothy O Malley not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission Timothy O Malley DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL Timothy O Malley BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Profiling The profile and pstats modules contain the following notice Copyright 1994 by InfoSeek Corporation all rights reserved Written by James Roskind
150. AIL The test failed Errors are displayed following the test state line e SKIP The test was skipped due to a missing prerequisite or a skip option WARN The test encountered an unusual but not fatal error The test is not applicable to this object To specify how to display diff style output use one of the following values with the difftype 245 option e unified default Display unified format output context Display context format output e differ Display differ style format output sql Display SQL transformation statement output To specify how to display output for changed or missing rows use one of the following values with the format 246 option grid default Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor e CSV 244 mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences Display output in comma separated values format tab Display output in tab separated format vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysq1 monitor The changes for 245 option controls the direction of the difference by specifying the object to be transformed in either the difference report default or the transformation report designated with the difftype sql 245 option Consider the following command mysqldbcompare serverl root hostl server2 root host2 difftype sql db1 dbx The leftmost database d
151. ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FERRI A RK A I A e e A IA I k k k k I k k k k kk k kkk I A 26 Scintilla License The following software may be included in this product Siesimeat Male License for Scintilla and SciTE Copyright 1998 2003 by Neil Hodgson lt neilh scintilla org gt All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation NEIL HODGSON DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY 348 Scintilla License AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL NEIL HODGSON BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Scintilla includes some files copyright Adobe Systems Incorporated Copyright c 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in
152. AULT CHARSET latinl ENGINE MyISAM DEFAULT CHARSET latinl apie RS Compare failed One or more differences found The following examples show how to generate a transformation report Assume the following object definitions Host1 266 mysqldiskusage Show Database Disk Usage CREATE TABLE dbl tablel num int misc char 30 Host2 CREATE TABLE dbx table3 num int notes char 30 misc char 55 To generate a set of SQL statements that transform the definition of db1 tablel to dbx table3 use this command mysqldiff serverl root host1l server2 root host2 changes for serverl difftype sql dbl tablel dbx table3 serverl on hostl connected server2 on host2 connected Comparing dbl tablel to dbx table3 FAIL Transformation statments Sh Se Se OSE ALTER TABLE dbl tablel ADD COLUMN notes char 30 AFTER a CHANGE COLUMN misc misc char 55 Compare failed One or more differences found To generate a set of SQL statements that transform the definition of dbx table3 to dbl tablel use this command mysqldiff serverl root host1l server2 root host2 changes for server2 difftype sql dbl tablel dbx table3 serverl on hostl connected server2 on host2 connected Comparing dbl tablel to dbx table3 FAIL Transformation statments Se Se Se SE ALTER TABLE dbx table3 DROP COLUMN notes CHANGE COLUMN misc misc char 30 Compare failed One or more differences fo
153. B leg antormation The general_log is turned off on the server The slow_query_log is turned off on the server binary log information Current binary log file mysql bin 000076 log_file size data mysql bin 000076 125 data mysql bin 000077 125 data mysql bin 000078 556 data mysql bin 000079 168398223 data mysql bin index 76 Total size of binary logs 168 399 105 bytes or 160 00 MB Server is not an active slave no relay log information InnoDB tablespace information InnoDB_file size type specificaton data ib_logfile0 5242880 log file data ib_logfilel 5242880 log file data ibdatal 220200960 shared tablespace ibdatal 210M data ibdata2 10485760 shared tablespace ibdata2 10M autoextend data employees departments ibd 114688 file tablespace data employees dept_emp ibd 30408704 file tablespace data employees dept_manager ibd 131072 file tablespace data employees employees ibd 23068672 file tablespace data employees salaries ibd 146800640 file tablespace data employees titles ibd 41943040 file tablespace Total size of InnoDB files 494 125 056 bytes or 471 00 MB done 270 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring and failover 13 3 9 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring and failover This utility permits users to perform replication health monitoring and automatic failover on a replication topology consisting of a master
154. Browser Actions List The Object Browser contains an Actions list The actions are Execute SQL File Opens a file chooser dialog that enables you to select an SQL script to execute e Add Schema Enables you to add a new schema to your server e Add Table Enables you to create a new table via the new_table dialog e Add View Enables you to create a new view via the new_view dialog e Add Routine Enables you to create a new routine via the new_routine dialog Schemata List The Schemata list shows available schemata on the currently connected server These can be explored to show tables views and routines within the schema 60 Sidebar Figure 6 16 SQL Editor Schemata Explorer SCHEMAS t q b dvd_collection gt sakila bi test vE world win Tables Y City Columns 7 ID CountryCode District Population bE Indexes p Be Foreign Keys b Triggers E Country E CountryLanguage gt E test p gt GE Views bF Routines It is possible to set a schema as the default schema by right clicking the schema and selecting the Set As Default Schema menu item This executes a USE schema_name statement so that subsequent statements without schema qualifiers are executed against this schema This setting applies only to the query session To set a default schema for multiple MySQL Workbench sessions you must set the default schema for the stored connection From the Home screen click Manage Connections then
155. Built in documentation e MySQL Bug Reporter Links to the MySQL bug system where you can report bugs 36 Workspace e Workbench Team Blog Links to the Workbench team blog e Planet MySQL Links to MySQL related blogs and news e Workbench forums Links to the MySQL user and developer forums 5 2 Workspace The Workspace is designed to enable you to quickly get to the task you would like to carry out In alignment with MySQL Workbench functionality it is divided into three main areas e SQL Development For further information see Chapter 6 SQL Development e Data Modeling For further information see Chapter 7 Data Modeling e Server Administration For further information see Chapter 9 Server Administration 5 3 Workbench Application Minimum Window Size As of version 5 2 10 the MySQL Workbench application features a fixed minimum window size of 1024x768 You cannot reduce the size of the application to less than this resolution 5 4 Workbench Preferences The Preferences menu sets MySQL Workbench defaults Choosing this menu item opens the following dialog box 37 Workbench Preferences Figure 5 2 The Preferences Dialog Box Workbench Preferences 2 Administrator SQL Editor Model Model MySQL Diagram Appearance EER Modeler _ Automatically reopen previous model at start Allowed values are from 1 up Model undo history size Note using high values gt 100 will increase
156. CIMAL DECIMAL DECIMAL MONEY DECIMAL SMALLMONEY DECIMAL CHAR CHAR LONGTEXT Depending on its length MySQL Server 5 5 and above can have CHAR columns with a length up to 255 characters Anything larger is migrated as LONGTEXT NCHAR CHAR LONGTEXT Depending on its length MySQL Server 5 5 and above can have VARCHAR columns with a length up to 65535 characters Anything larger is migrated to one of the TEXT blob types In MySQL character set of strings depend on the column character set instead of the datatype VARCHAR VARCHAR Depending on its length MySQL Server 5 5 and MEDIUMTEXT above can have VARCHAR columns with a length LONGTEXT up to 65535 characters Anything larger is migrated to one of the TEXT blob types NVARCHAR VARCHAR Depending on its length MySQL Server 5 5 and MEDIUMTEXT above can have VARCHAR columns with a length LONGTEXT up to 65535 characters Anything larger is migrated to one of the TEXT blob types In MySQL character set of strings depend on the column character set instead of the datatype DATE DATE DATETIME DATETIME 207 PostgreSQL migration Source Type MySQL Type Comment DATETIME2 DATETIME Date range in MySQL is 1000 01 01 00 00 00 to 9999 12 31 23 59 59 Note fractional second values are only stored as of MySQL Server 5 6 4 SMALLDATETIME DATETIME DATETIMEOFFSET DATETIME TIME TIME TIMESTAMP TIMESTAMP ROWVERSION TIMESTAMP BINARY BINARY MEDIUMBLOB
157. COLUMN_NAME 153 Customizing DBDoc Model Reporting Templates COLUMNS This still does not produce output To see why see Table 7 1 Data Dictionaries Tree The COLUMNS data dictionary has the parent dictionary COLUMNS_LISTING COLUMNS_LISTING has the parent TABLES which has the parent SCHEMATA whose parent is the main dictionary Remember that for a dictionary to be involved in variable lookup its associated section must currently be active To achieve the desired output the template must be something like the following SCHEMATA TABLES COLUMNS_LISTING COLUMNS Column Name COLUMN_NAME COLUMNS COLUMNS_LISTING TABLES SCHEMATA The following template is the same but with explanatory comments added Main dictionary active SCHEMATA SCHEMATA dictionary active TABLES TABLES dictionary active COLUMNS_LISTING COLUMNS_LISTING dictionary active COLUMNS COLUMNS dictionary active Column Name COLUMN_NAME COLUMN_NAME variable is looked up and found in COLUMNS data dictionary COLUMNS COLUMNS_LISTING TABLES SCHEMATA Imagine now that for each column name displayed you also wanted to display its corresponding schema name the template would look like this SCHEMATA TABLES COLUMNS_LISTING COLUMNS Schema Name SCHEMA _NAMF Column Name CO
158. Classic Uses a diamond shape to indicate cardinality Connect to Columns UML Universal Modeling Language style IDEF1X The ICAM DEFinition language information modeling method To view the different styles set up a relationship between two or more tables and choose the different menu items The relationship notation style that you choose persists for the duration of your MySQL Workbench session and is saved along with your model When MySQL Workbench is restarted the relationship notation reverts to the default the Crow s Foot style first Changing notation styles after objects have been placed on a diagram can significantly change the appearance of the diagram Note R If you plan to export or print an EER diagram be sure to decide on a notation style 7 5 1 6 The Database Menu The Database menu has these items Query Database Launches the SQL Editor which enables you to create SQL code and execute it on a live server For more information see Section 6 7 SQL Editor Manage Connections Launches the Manage DB Connections dialog which enables you to create and manage multiple connections For more information see Section 6 6 Manage DB Connections Dialog Reverse Engineer Creates a model from an existing database For more information see Section 7 7 9 2 Reverse Engineering a Live Database Forward Engineer Creates a database from a model For more information see Section 7 7 10 2 Forward Engin
159. Count Check TABLE ie JL pass pass FAIL Data transformations for direction serverl Data differences found among rows UPDATE db1 tl1 SET b Test 123 WHERE a l UPDATE dbil tl SET b Test 789 WHERE a 3 gt DELETE FROM dbl tl WHERE a 4 INSERT INTO dbl tl a D VALUES 5 New wey EISA Data transformations for direction server2 Data differences found among rows UPDATE db2 tl SET b Test 789 WHERE a 1 UPDATE db2 tl1 SET b Test 123 WHERE a 3 DELETE FROM db2 t1 WHERE a 5 INSERT INTO db2 t1 a b VALUES 4 New row dbl Database consistency check failed done 13 3 4 mysqldbcopy Copy Database Objects Between Servers This utility copies a database on a source server to a database on a destination server If the source and destination servers are different the database names can be the same or different If the source and destination servers are the same the database names must be different The utility accepts one or more database pairs on the command line To name a database pair use db_name new_db_name syntax to specify the source and destination names explicitly If the source and destination database names are the same db_name can be used as shorthand for db_name db_name By default the operation copies all objects tables views triggers events procedures functions and database level grants and data to the destination server There are options to turn
160. Diet Count Check TABLE ie dL pass pass FAIL Data transformations for direction serverl Data differences found among rows UPDATE db1 tl SET b Test 123 WHERE ao 1 UPDATE dbil tl SET b Test 789 WHERE a 3 DELETE FROM db1l tl WHERE a 4 INSERT INTO dbl tl a b VALUES 5 New row dab2 Database consistency check failed done Similarly when the same command is run with changes for server2 245 and difftype sql 245 the following report is generated mysqldbcompare serverl root root localhost server2 root root localhost dbl db2 changes for server2 a difftype sql Defn Row Data Type Object Name Die Count Check TABLE jedl pass pass FAIL Data transformations for direction server2 Data differences found among rows UPDATE db2 t1l SET b Test 789 WHERE a 1 UPDATE db2 tl1 SET b Test 123 WHERE a 3 DELETE FROM db2 t1 WHERE a 5 INSERT INTO db2 t1 a b VALUES 4 New EOW Clot 2 With the difftype sql1 245 SQL generation option set show reverse 246 shows the object transformations in both directions Here is an excerpt of the results mysqldbcompare serverl root root localhost server2 root root localhost db1 db2 changes for serverl show reverse a difftype sql 248 mysqldbcopy Copy Database Objects Between Servers za Defn Row Data Type Object Name Diir
161. EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL AMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS R SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT IABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY UT Ola Malle USE COE THIS SOFTWARE EVEN TE ADVISED ONE ENS ISVS HS LIS ILI IL ING GE UCH DAMAGE Hey D A XO PERTON Sercookandgcdtoad The file Python dtoa c which supplies C functions dtoa and strtod for conversion of C doubles to and from strings is derived from the file of the same name by David M Gay currently available from http www netlib org fp The original file as retrieved on March 16 2009 contains the following copyright and licensing notice RR KKK KKK IK KR I RR AR IA IA IA I IA I I kk The author of this software is David M Gay Copyright c 1991 2000 2001 by Lucent Technologies Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose without fee is hereby granted provided that this entire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY IN PARTICULAR NEITHER THE AUTHOR NOR LUCENT MAKES
162. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT NCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE A 10 GLib License for MySQL Workbench The following software may be included in this product GLib You are receiving a copy of the GLib library in both source and object code in the following folder C Program Files x86 MySQL MySQLWorkbench 5 2 on Windows and MySQLWorkbench app Contents Frameworks on Mac OS X The terms of the Oracle license do NOT apply to the Ghib library it is licensed under the following license separately from the Oracle programs you receive If you do not wish to install this library you may go to the folder C Program Files x86 MySQL MySQL Workbench 5 2 and remove or replace the libglib 2 0 0 dll libgmodule 2 0 0 dl1l1 libgobject 2 0 0 d1ll and libgthread 2 0 0 dll files if present on Windows or go to the folder MySQLWork
163. Export MySQL Trigger Objects 0 Total Objects 0 Selected Export User Objects 0 Total Objects 0 Selected fot E To select a subset of objects to forward engineer use the Show Filter Hide Filter button then select specific objects After you have selected your objects click Next to continue On the Review Script page you may review and edit the SQL script that will be executed 129 Forward Engineering Figure 7 36 Review Script Options ee Review the SQL Script to be Executed Select Objects Review SQL Script SET OLD_UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS G FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_SQL_MODE SQL_MODE SQL_MODE TRADITIONAL CREATE SCHEMA IF NOT EXISTS mydb DEFAULT CHARACTER SET latin1 COLLATE latin1_swedish_ci CREATE SCHEMA IF NOT EXISTS mysql DEFAULT CHARACTER SET latin1 CREATE SCHEMA IF NOT EXISTS test DEFAULT CHARACTER SET latin1 CREATE SCHEMA IF NOT EXISTS world DEFAULT CHARACTER SET latin1 Table mysql columns _priv CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS mysql columns_priv Host CHAR 60 CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_bin NOT NULL DEFAULT Db CHAR 64 CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_bin NOT NULL DEFAULT User CHAR 16 CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_bin NOT NULL DEFAULT Table_name CHAR 64 CHARACTER SET utf8 COLLATE utf8_bin NOT NULL DEFAULT Column_name CHAR
164. FTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE A 31 zlib License The following software may be included in this product zlib Oracle gratefully acknowledges the contributions of Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler in creating the zlib general purpose compression library which is used in this product zlib h interface of the zlib general purpose compression library Copyright C 1995 2004 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler zlib h interface of the zlib general purpose compression library Weesiom 1 253 willy icici ZOOS Copyright C 1995 2005 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler zlib h interface of the zlib general purpose compression library version 1 2 5 April 19th 2010 Copyright C 1995 2010 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler
165. HE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT NCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE A 30 VSQLite License The following software may be included in this product VSQLite VSQLitet virtuosic bytes SQLite3 C wrapper Copyright c 2006 Vinzenz Feenstra vinzenz feenstra virtuosic bytes com All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without 351 zlib License modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of virtuosic bytes nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SO
166. HP code The generated code will look like this lt php Shost localhost Sport 3306 Ssocket Wig Suser nobody Spassword Sdbname Vegla lat Scon new mysqli host user password dbname port socket or die Could not connect to the database server mysqli_connect_error Scon gt close Squery SELECT actor_id first_name last_name last_update FROM actor WHERE last_update gt Slast_update Sstmt gt bind_param s S last_update if Sstmt S con gt prepare S query Sstmt gt execute Sstmt gt bind_result S actor_id first_name last_name last_update while Sstmt gt fetch Dy ee hee Gor see Sey Hi Sactor_id first_name last_name last_update Sstmt gt close gt Note that the PHP code uses the mysqli PHP extension This extension must be enabled in your PHP distribution for this code to work For additional details see MySQL Improved Extension Mysqli 164 Chapter 9 Server Administration Table of Contents 9 1 Server Administration psie wien tet ane len ae giana diana ee aae a ea bas eee ede 165 9 2 New Server INStanGe weirs ce urania oiea ed aata detaa eaaa aaia apaa tla cu kakaa aneia taofia aaaea ees 166 9 3 Manage Data IMmport EXport aviani taiea i inaa aa iE ANA E e EE AEEA Aa UNAKAA e a 166 9 4 Mang SSCUMILY airone ch fae eee cena ei a esa fen vation eens eae a aa ch ou he a E o niaaa
167. ICENSE ssciteria scared vag nn a a n A TAE OE E E O E AE 332 A T Te LIDXMIZ LICENSE eiserne asiaa a a a aAa Ea SANAE ENEE AR R E KEE E EENE 332 AlS DZI ECONS oorr a E T a aseced auvoons asses ssavtase waweces anveost aaocens 333 A 19 Lua bla EICONS6 seiseanan E SNEEN EERE SENSER SERRARA RRN 333 A 20 Paramiko LICENSE ofina aT aa EARE RE EAT OR E R EN 334 A21 PORE LICENSE eidir a a aka a ARORA aaa eN a ien a dAn 334 A 22 PIxman LICENSE carers E E casual EREE 335 vi MySQL Workbench A283 Py Crypto LICENSE sscan toan aia aia Ea ANE aA 337 A24 PYVODBG License gins shicccscentet odideatesneteseedetceuteseensaes E cape adioeutssaveeaeeneenee 337 A25 Python LICGNSO sseni sierra nuia cadence sab nuode whcacete essen dees NAERA EEUE AAEREN REENE AEAEE 338 A26 SCIMMUMANACCASS gnerion r a eed can R E a a R aS 348 A27 S6Nt laNET LICENSE visccecessscnecsertanecestadeneds aaan e E a A NA A aE hee 350 A28 TNAM LICONS E aire a ES 350 A 29 TreeViewAdv for NET License cccceeeeeeeeeee cece ae ee ete seen ee ee ae aaaaeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaeeeeeeeeaeaaea 351 A302 VSOLIT64 LIC MSC mpuono a e a oe nna ay E a teetitaies 351 Aol alin UCONN S 352 B MySQL Workbench FAQ 0 0 eee ieee E E ETE 353 C MySQL Workbench and Utilities Change History 0ccceeeeeee ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeneeeeeeees 355 C 1 MySQL Workbench Change History ceeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeneeeeeeseeaeaaea 355 C
168. ION 6 total 0 selected Migration Manual Editing Target Creation Options 3 total 0 selected Create Schemata Create Target Results Migrate Routine objects DATA MIGRATION Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer REPORT Migration Report Migration The migration process now converts the selected objects into MySQL compatible objects View the logs and then proceed 195 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 9 MySQL Workbench migration Migration File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Migration OVERVIEW Overview Reverse engineered objects from the source RDBMS will now be automatically converted into MySQL compatible objects Default datatype and default column value SOURCE amp TARGET mappings will be used You will be able to review and edit generated objects and column R definitions in the Manual Editing step Y Source Selection Target Selection Fetch Schemata List Migrate Selected Objects Y Schemata Selection Generate SQL CREATE Statements Y Reverse Engineer Source OBJECT MIGRATION Y Source Objects Finished performing tasks Click Next gt to continue Manual Editing Message Log Target Creation Options Starting ICRC Saeta Migrate Selected Objects Create Target Results Migrating Migrating schema HumanResources DATA MIGRATION Migrating schema contents for schema HumanResources Table HumanResour
169. K server localhost 3306 version 5 1 50 log datadir usr local mysql data basedir usr local mysql 5 1 50 osx10 6 x86_64 eliigin_ dic usr local mysaql 5 1 50 o0sx10 6 x86_64 libby plugin config_file etc my cnf binary_log my_log 000068 binary_log_pos 212383 relay_llog None relay_log_pos None 1 rows Defaults for server localhost 3306 port 3306 basedir usr local mysql datadir usr local mysql data server_id 5 log bin my_log general_log slow_query_log innodb_data_file_path ibdatal 778M ibdata2 50M autoextend done 13 3 19 mysqluc Command line client for running MySQL Utilities The mysqluc utility provides a command line environment for running MySQL Utilities and exists as of MySQL Utilities 1 1 0 The mysqluc utility hence console allows users to execute any of the currently installed MySQL Utilities command The option is used to provide a path to the MySQL Utilities if the location is different from when the utility is executed The console has a list of console or base commands These allow the user to interact with the features of the console itself The list of base commands is shown below along with a brief description Command Description help utilities Display list of all utilities supported help lt utility gt Displey help for a specific utility help help commands Show Enis List exit quit Exit the console 307 mysqluc Comm
170. L CONNECTION id END LOOP kill_loop END GIO SH RE T mmc una soir e verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug e version Display version information and exit NOTES For the format 284 option the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 284 specifies the grid format An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES For each example assume that the root user on localhost has sufficient privileges to kill queries and connections Kill all queries created by user mats that are younger than 1 minute mysqlprocgrep server root localhost match user mats age 1lm kill query Kill all connections that have been idle for more than 1 hour mysqlprocgrep server root localhost match command sleep age 1h kill connection 13 3 13 mysqlreplicate Set Up and Start Replication Between Two Servers This utility permits an administrator to start replication from one server the master to another the slave The user provides login information for the slave and connection information for connecting to the master It is also possible to specify a database to be used to test replication 286 mysqlreplicate Set Up and Sta
171. LUMN_NAME COLUMNS COLUMNS_LISTING TABLES SCHEMATA When variable lookup is performed for SCHEMA_NAME the COLUMNS dictionary is checked As the variable is not found there the parent dictionary will be checked COLUMNS_LISTING and so on until the variable is eventually found where it is held in the SCHEMATA dictionary If there are multiple schemata in the model the outer section is iterated over a matching number of times and SCHEMA_NAME accordingly has the correct value on each iteration It s important to always consider which dictionary must be active and which parents for a variable to be evaluated correctly The following section has a table that helps you identify section requirements 154 Supported Template Markers 7 12 1 Supported Template Markers The following table shows the supported markers These markers can be used in any template including custom templates Using the table The table shows which variables are defined in which sections The variable should be used in its correct section or its value will not be displayed If a variable t ype is a variable then the table describes its data dictionary and a parent dictionary if type is a section Also remember that the data dictionaries used to perform variable lookups form a hierarchical tree so it is possible to use a variable in a child section that is defined in a parent section Table 7 2 Supported Template
172. Markers Marker text Type Data Dictionary or Parent Corresponding data Dictionary TITLE Variable MAIN Title of the report GENERATED Variable MAIN Date and time when the report was generated STYLE_NAME Variable MAIN The name of the style selected in MySQL Workbench this is typically used to load the corresponding CSS file depending on the name of the style selected in MySQL Workbench SCHEMA_COUNT Variable MAIN The number of schemata in the model PROJECT_TITLE Variable MAIN Project title as set for the model in Document Properties PROJECT_NAME Variable MAIN Project name as set for the model in Document Properties PROJECT_AUTHOR Variable MAIN Project author as set for the model in Document Properties PROJECT_VERSION Variable MAIN Project version as set for the model in Document Properties PROJECT_DESCRIPTION Variable MAIN Project description as set for the model in Document Properties PROJECT_CREATED Variable MAIN Automatically set for the model project but as displayed in Document Properties PROJECT CHANGED Variable MAIN Automatically set for the model project but as displayed in Document Properties TOTAL_TABLE_COUNT Variable MAIN The number of tables in all schemata in the model 155 Supported Template Markers TOTAL_INDEX_COUNT Marker text Type Data Dictionary or Parent Corresponding data Dictionary TOTAL_COLUMN_ COUNT Variable MAIN The
173. MySQL Workbench MySQL Workbench Abstract This manual documents the MySQL Workbench SE version 5 2 and the MySQL Workbench OSS version 5 2 If you have not yet installed MySQL Workbench OSS please download your free copy from the download site MySQL Workbench OSS is available for Windows Mac OS X and Linux For release notes detailing the changes in each release see the MySQL Workbench Release Notes For legal information see the Legal Notices Document generated on 2013 01 16 revision 33964 Table of Contents Preface and Legal Notices noren a cece eee erences N E ee S ER E E O ix 1 MySQL Workbench Introduction cceceee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeee ee ae ee teeter sees ee aaaaieceeeeeeeeeaaaaaeneeeeeeeeeaaaaeneeseeeees 1 2 MySQL Workbench Editions 0 cccececeeeteee ee ee cree ee eect ener este ee eaten eres sees aa aaeeeeseeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 3 3 Installing and Launching MySQL Workbench 0 cccccccceeeeeeeeeee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeneeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeees 5 3 1 Hardware Requirement emic odse E E cece nee ee eee ee ee eeaaee eres OE EEE 5 3 2 Software Requirement 2 cccceceeeeeeeee cece eae ee eter cece ee aa ea aac eeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeeeeeeseaeaaaaeeeeeeeseeasaaaaaes 5 3 3 Starting MySQL Workbench 0 cccccece ce neeeeeee eect ee eee eae cece ee esse aeaaeaeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeees 6 3 3 1 Installing MySQL Workbench on Windows 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeee tees ae eeee
174. N A You can map a catalog into a schema and drop the use the owner as the schema name or merge the owner and object name together ownerobject Constraints Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Dictionary N A Database Yes Yes Yes Yes Database Instance Dump Yes Yes Yes Yes mysqldump Events Yes Yes Yes Yes Foreign Keys Yes Yes Yes Yes Full Text Search Yes Yes Yes Yes In InnoDB as of MySQL Server 5 6 and in all versions of MyISAM Index Yes Yes Yes Yes 203 Conceptual DBMS equivalents Concept MS SQL Sybase PostgreSQ lySQL_ Note Server ASE Information Schema Yes No Yes Yes Object Names Case Depends Depends Mixed Mixed MySQL sensitivity of database Sensitivity on on table and trigger names OS collation collation dependent other object names are case insensitive PostgreSQL as specified in the SQL 99 standard unquoted object names are treated as case insensitive while quoted object names are case sensitive Unlike the standard unquoted object names are converted to lowercase instead of uppercase Object Naming Yes Yes Yes Yes Conventions Packages N A N A N A N A Partitioning Yes Yes Yes Yes Performance Schema N A N A Yes Yes Permissions Yes Yes Yes Yes Primary Key Yes Yes Yes Yes Referential Integrity Yes Yes Yes Yes Sybase ASE referential integrity only through triggers Replication Yes Yes Yes Y
175. NET Flat TabControl License e Section A 8 DockPanel Suite License Section A 9 Dojo Toolkit v1 7 0b1 License Section A 10 GLib License for MySQL Workbench Section A 11 Glitz License Section A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 Section A 13 HtmlRenderer System Drawing Html Section A 14 iODBC License Section A 15 Libiconv License Section A 16 Libintl License Section A 17 Libxml2 License Section A 18 Libzip License Section A 19 Lua liblua License Section A 20 Paramiko License Section A 21 PCRE License Section A 22 Pixman License Section A 23 PyCrypto License Section A 24 PyODBC License Section A 25 Python License Section A 26 Scintilla License Section A 27 ScintillaNET License Section A 28 TinyXML License Section A 29 TreeViewAdv for NET License Section A 30 VSQLite License Section A 31 zlib License A 1 NET Flat TabControl License The following software may be included in this product NET Flat TabControl Use of any of this software is governed by the terms of the license below It is free Public domain Oscar Londono 316 ANTLR 3 4 License A 2 ANTLR 3 4 License The following software may be included in this product ANTLR 3 4 This product was build using ANTL
176. NT Sets AUTO_INCREMENT in its table definition SMALLSERIAL SMALLINT Sets AUTO_INCREMENT in its table definition BIGSERIAL BIGINT Sets AUTO_INCREMENT in its table definition BIT BIT BOOLEAN TINYINT 1 REAL FLOAT DOUBLE PRECISION DOUBLE NUMERIC DECIMAL DECIMAL DECIMAL MONEY DECIMAL 19 2 CHAR CHAR LONGTEXT Depending on its length MySQL Server 5 5 and above can have CHAR columns with a length up to 255 characters Anything larger is migrated as LONGTEXT NATIONAL CHAR LONGTEXT Depending on its length MySQL Server 5 5 and CHARACTER above can have VARCHAR columns with a length up to 65535 characters Anything larger is migrated to one of the TEXT blob types In MySQL character set of strings depend on the column character set instead of the datatype VARCHAR VARCHAR Depending on its length MySQL Server 5 5 and MEDIUMTEXT above can have VARCHAR columns with a length LONGTEXT up to 65535 characters Anything larger is migrated to one of the TEXT blob types NATIONAL VARCHAR Depending on its length MySQL Server 5 5 and CHARACTER VARYING MEDIUMTEXT above can have VARCHAR columns with a length LONGTEXT up to 65535 characters Anything larger is migrated to one of the TEXT blob types In MySQL character set of strings depend on the column character set instead of the datatype DATE DATE TIME TIME TIMESTAMP DATETIME 209 MySQL migration Sourc
177. OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 The following applies to all products licensed under the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 You may not use the identified files except in compliance with the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www gnu org licenses lgpl 2 1 html A copy of the license is also reproduced below Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright C 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc olera nk EO CESE ialiccila IWileee BOSE ON WN OZ O Wwisv Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version 2 hence the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for mos
178. OW SLAVE HOSTS For the format 301 option the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 301 specifies the grid format An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES To show the slaves for a master running on port 3311 on the local host use the following command mysqlrplshow master root localhost 3311 master on localhost connected Finding slaves for master localhost 3311 Replication Topology Graph localhost 3311 MASTER to localhost 3210 SLAVE localhost 2312 3LAVE As shown in the example you must provide valid login information for the master To show the full replication topology of a master running on the local host use the following command mysqlrplshow master root localhost 3311 recurse master on localhost connected Finding slaves for master localhost 3311 Replication Topology Graph localhost 3311 MASTER 302 mysqlserverclone Clone Existing Server to Create New Server leealoaosics S510 Sin 4 llocallnagsics 3312 SLAVE f MASTER T I e alinosicg a Sis BIANI To show the full replication topology of a master running on the local host prompting for the user name and password for slaves that do not have the same user name and password credentials as the master use
179. PHPQueryAndFetch gt f9 DbGenericMigration gt f9 DbGenericRE modules found gt f9 DbMssq Migration gt f9 DbMssqlRE gt f9 DbMysQL gt f9 DbMySQLFE l gt f DbMySQLMigration 9 modu gt f9 DbMySQLQuery ooki F Program Files x86 MySQL gt f DbMySQLRE cbench gt f9 DbPostgresq Migration N cannin e gt f9 DbPostgresqlRE Fi gt f9 DbSql92Migration gt f DbSql92RE ing for modules in INFO Scanning module directory t 25 mod nc i gt f9 DbSybaseMigration modules tomna OLE beer z gt f DbSybaseRE istered 36 modules fr om 34 files R l gt f9 Dbutis ing for u r plugins in C Users philip AppData gt f9 Forms 1 ning MySQ rkbench module untime Environment 4 1 0 Function A int copyAsPHPConnect db query Editor editor quent Python Shell initialized referenc gt General to editor et Language Copies PHP code to connect to the active MySQL connection to the dipboard Files Globals Classes Modules 11 5 2 The Shell Window The Workbench Scripting Shell is primarily used for running Python or Lua scripts or typing commands in these languages directly However you can also use it to access the Workbench Scripting Shell Scripting Library functions and global functions and objects To see the available commands type You can also cut and paste text to and from the shell window The Snippets tab is a scratch pad for saving code snippets This makes it
180. PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES sing init_genrand seed Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura nary forms with or without at the following conditions retain the above copyright the following disclaimer reproduce the above copyright the following disclaimer in the s provided with the ot be used to endorse or promote without specific prior written GHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS INCLUDING BUT NOT IERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR N NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO 342 Python License PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Any feedback is very welcome http www math keio ac jp matumoto emt html email matumoto math keio ac jp Sockets The socket module uses the functions getaddrinfo and getnameinfo which are coded in separate source files from the WIDE Project http www wide ad jp CGejoywiengine MO 1995 W996 WY ainel WOE Awa aee All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions AIS iii s 1 Redistributions of source code must r
181. PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR 337 Python License IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE A 25 Python License The following software may be included in this product Python Programming Language This is the official license for the Python 2 7 release A HISTORY OF THE SOFTWARE Python was created in the early 1990s by Guido van Rossum at Stichting Mathematisch Centrum CWI see http www cwi nl in the Netherlands as a successor of a language called ABC Guido remains Python s principal author although it includes many contributions from others In 1995 Guido continued his work on Python at the Corporation for National Research Initiatives CNRI see http www cnri reston va us in Reston Virginia where he released several versions of the software In May 2000 Guido and the Python core development team moved to BeOpen com to form the BeOpen PythonLabs team In October of the same year the PythonLabs team moved to Digital Creations now Zope Corporation see http www zope com In 2001 the Python Software Foundation PSF see http www python org psf
182. R which was provided to Oracle under the following terms Copyright c 2010 Terence Parr All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the author nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission HIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS ND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE IABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR ONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF UBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS NTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN ONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE RISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF
183. R PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the library s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This library is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public Lic
184. RAMFILES directory may be C Program Filesorc programme Installing from the Zip File If you have problems running the Installer package an alternative is to install from a Zip file without an installer That file is called mysql workbench version win32 zip To install using the Zip file download the Zip file to a convenient location and decompress the file using a Zip utility You can place the resulting directory anywhere on you system You need not install or configure the application before using it You may want to create a shortcut on your desktop or the quick launch bar 3 3 2 Launching MySQL Workbench on Windows To start MySQL Workbench on Windows select Start Programs MySQL then select MySQL Workbench Alternatively start MySQL Workbench from the command line To view the available command line options issue the command MySQLWorkbench help more from the MySQL Workbench installation directory You will see the following output MySQL Workbench 5 2 34 SE C 2006 2011 by Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Usage MySQLWorkbench options model file Options admin instance Open an admin tab to the named server instance at startup open filename Open the given filename at startup Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Windows query server run Script 2 Open a DB query tab to the named server connection at startup Executes the given Workbench script at startup run python scri
185. RGET Migrated Objects View E Y Source Selection Source Object Target Object Migration Message Migration Problems Target Selection v 3 HumanResources E HumanResources All Objects f w Tables Tables amp Migration warnings expand to view Column Mappings v m Employee B Employee amp Migration warnings expand to view 7 Schemata Selection v Columns Columns Migration warnings expand to view Y Reverse Engineer Source rowguid UNI rowguid VARCHAR 64 Default value newid is not supported gt Indices Indices OBJECT MIGRATION gt ForeignKeys ForeignKeys Y Source Objects gt Triggers Triggers gt B EmployeeAddress EmployeeAddress amp Migration warnings expand to view gt Views Views gt Routines Routines Fetch Schemata List Target Creation Options Create Schemata You can rename target schemas and tables and change column definitions by dicking them once selected Create Target Results S t DATA MIGRATION Lock edited SQL Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer Comment out REPORT Migration Report Apply Changes Discard Changes Figure 10 11 MySQL Workbench migration Manual Editing Column Mappings Eile Edit View Database Plugins Scneting Help Macual Editiag onto Review and edt migrates objects You can manualy ecit the generated S before aplvng then tothe target database SOURCE amp TARGET Matet Objects Y Source Selection Source Schema Source Table Source Coke Source Colton TergetTable TargetC
186. RI MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR MPLIED BY WAY OF EXAMPLE BUT NOT LIMITATION CNRI MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF PYTHON 1 6 1 WILL NOT NFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS 5 CNRI SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF PYTHON 6 1 FOR ANY INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A RESULT OF MODIFYING DISTRIBUTING OR OTHERWISE USING PYTHON 1 6 1 OR ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF 6 This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms and conditions 7 This License Agreement shall be governed by the federal intellectual property law of the United States including without limitation the federal copyright law and to the extent such U S federal law does not apply by the law of the Commonwealth of Virginva excluding Virginia s confilice of law provisions Notwithstanding the foregoing with regard to derivative works based on Python 1 6 1 that incorporate non separable material that was previously distributed under the GNU General Public License GPL the law of the Commonwealth of Virginia shall govern this License Agreement only as to issues arising under or with respect to Paragraphs 4 5 and 7 of this License Agreement Nothing in this License Agreement shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency part
187. S WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Select kqueue The select and contains the following notice for the kqueue interface Copyright c 2000 Doug White 2006 James Knight 2007 Christian Heimes All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions Ais iii s 347 Scintilla License 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution HIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND NY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE OR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL
188. TAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS AS A RESULT OF USING MODIFYING OR DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE OR ANY DERIVATIVE THEREOF EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF 5 This License Agreement will automatically terminate upon a material breach of its terms and conditions 6 This License Agreement shall be governed by and interpreted in all respects by the law of the State of California excluding conflict of law provisions Nothing in this License Agreement shall be deemed to create any relationship of agency partnership or joint venture between BeOpen and Licensee This License Agreement does not grant permission to use BeOpen trademarks or trade names in a trademark sense to endorse or promote products or services of Licensee or any third party As an exception the BeOpen Python logos available at http www pythonlabs com logos html may be used according to the permissions granted on that web page 7 By copying installing or otherwise using the software Licensee agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of this License Agreement CNRI LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 1 6 1 340 Python License 1 This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between the Corporation for National Research Initiatives having an office at 1895 Preston White Drive Reston VA 20191 CNRI and the Individual or Organization Licensee accessing and otherwise using Python 1 6 1 software in source or binary form and its associated documen
189. THER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE The license for Scintilla is as follows Copyright 1998 2006 by Neil Hodgson lt neilh scintilla org gt All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation NEIL HODGSON DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL NEIL HODGSON BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE A 28 TinyXML License The following software may be included in this product TinyXML TinyXML is released under the zlib license This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any 350 TreeViewAdv for NET License damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redi
190. Through the use of the scripting shell MySQL Workbench can support new behavior and data sources using code written in Lua and Python The shell can also be used to explore the current Workbench GRT Generic RunTime facilities The scripting shell is not only useful for expanding MySQL Workbench You can use a script file from the scripting shell command line to perform repetitive tasks programmatically The development language can be either Python or Lua The default programming language used in Workbench Scripting Shell is defined in the General tab of the MySQL Workbench Preferences dialog and defaults to Python Note E Although they serve a different purpose the MySQL Utililies are also bundled with MySQL Workbench For more information see Chapter 13 MySQL Utilities 11 5 1 Exploring the Workbench Scripting Shell To open the Workbench Scripting Shell select Scripting Scripting Shell from the main menu You can also open the Workbench Scripting Shell using the Control F3 key combination on Windows and Linux Command F3 on Mac OS X or by clicking the shell button above the EER diagram navigator The Workbench Scripting Shell will then open in a new dialog The following screenshot shows the Workbench Scripting Shell dialog 217 The Shell Window Figure 11 1 The Workbench Scripting Shell Modules List Shell XxX Snippets GRT Modules v 9 Codeutils gt f copyAsPHPConnect gt f getPlugininfo gt f copyAs
191. Trd Pany ICM Ses icri naa E E T R 315 AA NET Flat TabControl LICense assrircrissssinissri issnin etiikka Nia ANAKA RREAK KARNER RRRA KRAANE 316 A2 ANTLR 3 4 LICEnse ieec ciei foc ccctacin cosaadoncestacvncestaatedesaauis ds E EKRAR ERKKA A NERAK NAKRAN KKARAR ERKA AR A KAARET ER 317 A 3 Bitstream Vera License scsi vvneidascsevscsahactvannanacdtaganecdeahwianvanaanetevanasacddanalleivaseasceranthaddeasanen tts 317 Ad Boost Library EICONSS serion a R 318 Ne E E E E A E E E EAE E 319 A 6 CTemplate Google Template System License ssssssessresrsssesrerr tr rnerssssrrrnrnnnssesrsrnnnt 319 r CURL E Ee a A A E E E E A A 320 A 8 DockPanel Suite License cccccceseccccessscvecansscvccesseevecanssavecassscvecasdscdecessnevecansvedecastsevecarsnens 320 A9 Dojo Toolkit v1 7 001 LICENSG esnea E 321 A 10 GLib License for MySQL Workbench cccccceeccccceeeeeseeseeeeeeceeeeesesaeeeseseeeeeeseaaeaeneeeeees 321 AAV GINZ ICONS Os seee nauenean aA NERE aE EAE AN EAE EE E EARE 321 A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 aeceeeeeeeee 322 A 13 HtmlRenderer System Drawing Html sssssssesssesessssssssrsrrnrsnsssrsrnrrrnsrssssnnrnnnnrssrsnnrrnnnt 330 A14 JODBC License iiiaic daite sce vnavececsatvocce dhuwecessaiiense dauvecehaduveccadsiwecedvanvoceeYauveectaduveceavanvenensauvers 330 AVS Eibiconv LICENSe caceuaisaaseocasannsvveshsexods sesh enenaban a aa N A EEA a RE aaah Odean A EEE EEE 331 AAG EDIMIE
192. U General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to 323 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent ca
193. _AS migrated to utf8_general_c LoginID note Collation Latini_General_CS_AS migrated to utf8_general_c Pressing Finish will close the migration window The database may now be viewed within the MySQL Workbench SQL editor 5 Note If a MySQL Workbench SQL Editor tab is already opened then the schema list within the Object Browser must be refreshed in order to view the newly imported schema 10 2 2 Migrating from supported databases When a supported RDBMS product is being migrated the MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard will automatically convert as much information as it can but you may still be required to manually edit the automatically migrated schema for difficult cases or when the default mapping is not as desired Generally speaking only table information and its data are automatically converted to MySQL Code objects such as views stored procedures and triggers are not But supported RDBMS products will be retrieved and displayed in the wizard You can then manually convert them or save them for converting at a later time The following RDBMS products and versions are currently tested and supported by the MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard although other RDBMS products can also be migrated with Section 10 2 3 Migrating from unsupported generic databases e Microsoft SQL Server 2000 e Microsoft SQL Server 2005 e Microsoft SQL Server 2008 202 Migrating from unsupported generic databases e Micro
194. _binlog Com_call_procedure Number of calls to stored procedures Com_change_db Count of CHANGE DATABASE statements Com_change_master Count of CHANGE MASTER statements Com_check Count of CHECK statements Com_checksum Count of CHECKSUM statements Crunk af COMMIT nbatamantm fa WB Admin Opened 9 7 6 The Data Dump Tab The Import Export Server Data tab enables you to create a dump file or restore data from a dump file Clicking the Import Export Server Data action item launches a new Admin page at the Data Dump tab Within the Data Dump tab are three further tabbed windows e Export to Disk e Import from Disk e Advanced Options 180 The Data Dump Tab 9 7 6 1 Export to Disk The Export to Disk tab enables you to select the schema and tables to export You also have the option to export tables to their own files or all tables to a single file Exporting tables to individual files enables you to restore on a per table basis Figure 9 10 Administrator Export to Disk L MYSQL Workbench File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help Task and Object Browser Data Export and Restore MANAGEMENT 6 Server Status f startup shutdown isan occa win Options E Status and System Variables Schema Export Tables in Schema Export to Dump Project Folder A Server Logs mysql Each table will be exported into a separate file This allows a selective performance_schen P CONFIGURATION tes
195. _date 9 BEFORE INSERT ON sakila customer 10 FOR EACH ROW 11 SET NEW create_date NOW ss Columns Indexes Foreign Keys Partitioning Options 7 7 1 3 6 The Partitioning Tab To enable partitioning for your table check the Enable Partitioning check box This enables the partitioning options 93 Creating Tables Figure 7 14 The Partitioning Tab Partitioning Enable Partitioning Partition By Parameters Partition Count Subpartition By v Parameters Subpartition Count Partition Values Data Directory Index Directory Min Rows MaxRows Comment a m ets ee el eC elem Partitioning oeu The Partition By pop up menu displays the types of partitions you can create e HASH e LINEAR HASH e KEY e LINEAR KEY e RANGE e LIST Use the Parameters field to define any parameters to be supplied to the partitioning function such as an integer column value Choose the number of partitions from the Partition Count list To manually configure your partitions check the Manual check box This enables entry of values into the partition configuration table The entries in this table are e Partition Values Data Directory Index Directory Min Rows 94 Creating Tables e Max Rows Comment Subpartitioning is also available For more information about partitioning see Partitioning 7 7 1 3 7 The Options Tab The Options tab enables you to set several types of options Figure
196. a candidate is found the utility will conduct failover to the best slave The command will test each candidate slave listed for the prerequisites Once a candidate slave is elected it is made a slave of each of the other slaves thereby collecting any transactions executed on other slaves but not the candidate In this way the candidate becomes the most up to date slave elect This mode is the same as auto except if no candidates specified in the list of candidate slaves are viable it does not check the remaining slaves and generates and error and exits fail This mode produces an error and does not failover when the master is downed This mode is used to provide periodic health monitoring without the failover action taken For all options that permit specifying multiple servers the options require a comma separated list of connection parameters in the following form where the password port and socket are optional lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt 7 lt socket gt The utility permits users to discover slaves connected to the master In order to use the discover slaves feature all slaves must use the report host and report port startup variables to specify the correct hostname and ip port of the slave If these are missing or report the incorrect information the slaves health may not be reported correctly or the slave may not be listed at all The discover slaves feature ignores any slaves it cann
197. a nonidentifying relationship The split line style can be used with either an identifying relationship or a nonidentifying relationship It is used for display purposes only and does not indicate anything about the nature of a relationship To set the notation of a relationship use the Model menu Relationship Notation menu item For more information see Section 7 5 1 5 4 The Relationship Notation Submenu The Foreign Key Tab The Foreign Key tab contains several sections Referencing Table Cardinality and Referenced Table The Mandatory check boxes are used to select whether the referencing table and the referenced table are mandatory By default both of these constraints are t rue indicated by the check boxes being checked The Cardinality section has a set of radio buttons that enable you to choose whether the relationship is one to one or one to many There is also a check box that enables you to specify whether the relationship is an identifying relationship 7 7 2 3 Connection Properties Right click a connection to select it When a connection is selected it is highlighted and its properties are displayed in the properties palette Connection properties are quite different from the properties of other objects The following list describes them e caption The name of the connection By default the name is the name of the foreign key and the property is centered above the connection line e captionXOffs The X offset of t
198. aaeateeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 155 7 12 2 Creating a Custom Template 0 ccccceceeeeeee cece eee eeete eter sees ee aa aa eeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeeeeaeaaea 158 MySQL Workbench provides extensive capabilities for creating and manipulating database models including these 63 Open an Existing EER Model e Create and manipulate a model graphically Reverse engineer a live database to a model Forward engineer a model to a script or live database e Create and edit tables and insert data This is not an exhaustive list The following sections discuss these and additional data modeling capablities The Home window is the typical starting point for work with data modeling In the Data Modeling section of the Workspace you can use the action items there to create and manage models forward and reverse engineer and compare and synchronize schemata e Open an Existing EER Model e Create new EER Model e Create EER Model from Existing Database e Create EER Model from SQL Script The following sections describe these action items 7 1 Open an Existing EER Model Clicking this action item launches a file browser You can then select the model file you wish to load A new MySQL Model tab will then be created and your model displayed If you have already created one or more model files each will appear in this panel as an icon Double clicking the item of the model you wish to load creates a new MySQL Model tab and
199. aaeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeees 80 fe11 lt The Layers Palette vi sssti2 testa eet ata leah a iaa a ai 81 7 5 12 The Properties Palette ccccecccccecc cece cece cece eee teen eeee seca aaae ae eeeeeeeeaeaaaaaeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeees 81 7 6 EER Diagram Editor accra aisa die haves edhe erences eddie eden ERA EA 82 7 6 1 The Vertical Toolbar siccicccccotsatisecccsedosbienttiecectaconstenetandensad cue deubibevenae sei e aaa ia aai eaa 82 1 Working with MOdEIS snimio nianna aia lenin cn TA sds eens eee ee 86 LA Ne Creating Tables iseinean naandaa aE a a don SKa a RAEAN dactaupeeccenuesylanaeys 86 7 7 2 Creating Foreign Key Relationships c ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaea 98 Tel B Creating VieWS srera iai ea ARE E EEK REE AE RE AA 101 7 7 4 Creating Routines and Routine Groups cceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeee seen aa ee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaea 103 Te 1 9 Creating LAYCTS sarisari fos ies cannad renia i iaaa eaa aaaea a nania Ea kE e iaaa aaia 107 1 16 Creating Notes oirionn a aE E iK a a iai 108 7 7 7 Creating Text Objects 20 2 ccc cece cece cece eee e ett te ee ener ee aa etter eee e eee aae teen anes sede aaaaeeeeeeeeeaeaaed 109 418 Creating MAGGS ccc cs202leveveaes octetda les anana a aaa e TR AN ani ai 110 7 7 9 Reverse Engineering cccececccceeeececeeeeeeeee eee EeNNN ee EEEE ee CENA ANE Oek EE KEEN EARNE ENE ERRE EENE DERENAN 111 110 Forward Engineermg sernncrarni
200. abs that for example will not prompt to be saved when closed Added as of MySQL Workbench 5 2 45 5 4 2 The Administrator Tab This section provides configuration options that affec t the Administrator functionality in MySQL Workbench It enables you to set paths to the mysqldump and mysql tools If these paths are left blank the defaults are used This panel also enables you to set the directory for export dump files 5 4 3 The SQL Editor Tab This section provides configuration options that affec There are three main groups of parameters that can SQL properties e Query Editor Query Results SQL Properties SQL properties that can be set include the SQL_MoD used t the SQL Editor functionality in MySQL Workbench be set here E case sensitivity of identifiers and the SQL delimiter The document property SqlMode defines SQL_MODE for all operations affecting SQL parsing at the document scope The purpose of this option is to pre document serve the consistency of SQL statements within the 39 The SQL Editor Tab The property has the following functions e Sets the SOL_MODE DBMS session variable to the value stored in the SqlMode property of the document when performing reverse engineering forward engineering or synchronization operations e Honors the SQL_MODE values defined in SqlMode so that SQL parsing is correct Only a subset of all possible SoOL_MODE values affect the MySQL Work
201. ailable on Linux and Mac OS X versions only desktopfolder The user s desktop documentsfolder The user s Documents folders The following table shows typical values for various platforms Platform Typical Default Documents Folder Windows C Documents and Settings user_name My Documents Linux Documents Mac OS X Users user_name Documents date The date in the format YYYY MM DD time The time in the format HHMM year The year in the format YYYY month The month in the format MM January is 01 and December is 12 monthname The name of the month rather than the number day The day number in the format DD For example the 12th would be 12 Content options can also be set Render Table Columns Display all the columns Render Table Indices Display all the indexes Render Foreign Keys Display all the foreign keys List Foreign Keys that refer to that table Display the tables that foreign keys reference Include DDL code for objects Generates DDL code 149 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version Clicking the Generate button creates the directory defined in the Output directory text box If you chose to create HTML Basic Frames you will find the following files in this directory basic css The style sheet for the overview html page index html The main page overview html1 The model overview the navigation links shown in the sid
202. al uses a locally installed MySQL Server If you only have access to a remote MySQL server you must enter appropriate connection parameters as necessary This tutorial requires MySQL Workbench 5 2 16 or above It is assumed that you have a basic understanding of MySQL concepts This tutorial demonstrates the procedures on Microsoft Windows but they are the same for all supported platforms 4 1 Administering a MySQL Server In this section you will use MySQL Workbench to carry out administrative functions such as starting and stopping the server 1 Launch MySQL Workbench You will be presented with the Home window 13 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 1 Getting Started Tutorial Home Window MySQL Workbench ee File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help a PB kolke Workbench Central A a a Pre EA ribet A Workbench Read about all changes in this MySQL Workbench release MySQLDoc MySQLBug Workbench PlanetMySQL Workbench Library Reporter Team Blog Forums Workspace Connect to existing databases and run Create and manage models forward amp Configure your database server setup SQL Queries SQL scripts edit data and reverse engineer compare and user accounts browse status variables manage database objects synchronize schemas report and server logs SQL Development Data Modeling 0 Server Administration F Open Connection to Start Querying 5 Open Existing EER Model ie Server Administration
203. alhost 3334 new master root localhost 3332 demote master switchover Performing switchover from master at localhost 3331 to slave at localhost 3332 Checking candidate slave prerequisites Waiting for slaves to catch up to old master Stopping slaves Performing STOP on all slaves Demoting old master to be a slave to the new master Switching slaves to new master Starting all slaves Performing START on all slaves Checking slaves for errors Switchover complete done If the replication health report is generated on the topology following the above command it will display the old master as a slave as shown below Replication Topology Health 4 4 4 4 4 4 host port role state gtid_mode health 4 4 4 localhost 3332 MASTER UP ON OK localhost S33 SLAVE UP ON OK localhost S333 Slew UP ON xs localhost 3334 SLAVE UP ON Oke 4 4 To use the discover slaves feature you can omit the slaves 293 option if and only if all slaves report their host and port to the master A sample command to generate a replication health report with discovery is shown below he option option can be used in conjunction with the s laves 293 option to specify a list of k
204. ames as a prefix Catalog Schema Table gt Catalog Schema_table Preserves the schema name as a prefix 192 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 6 MySQL Workbench migration Schemata Selection File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Schemata Selection OVERVIEW 3 Overview Select the schemata you want to migrate SOURCE amp TARGET Indude Catalog Schema Y Source Selection E amp Purchasing Target Selection amp Sales Y Fetch Schemata List T Adventureworks dbo HumanResources Person Production OBJECT MIGRATION 8 Purchasing Source Objects 8 pap Migration E msdb gt O S abo Manual Editing Target Creation Options 1 schemata selected Create Schemata Reverse Engineer Source Schema Name Mapping Method Choose how the reverse engineered schemata and objects should be mapped a ara Keep schemata as they are Catalog Schema Table gt Schema Table Data Transfer Setup T Bulk Data Transfer 5 Only one schema Catalog Schema Table gt Catalog Table Create Target Results EE 5 Only one schema keep current schema names as a prefix Catalog Schema Table gt Catalog Schema _Table Migration Report Reverse Engineer Source The source metadata is fetched from the source RDBMS and reverse engineered This is an automated and informational step that reports related errors and or general log information View th
205. ample Databases section After downloading the file extract it to a convenient location Open MySQL Workbench and find the Reverse Engineer MySQL Create Script menu item by first choosing File and then Import Find and import the sakila schema sq file This is the script that contains the data definition statements for the sakila database The file filter for the file open dialog window defaults to sqi so you should be able to view only files with the sql extension If the file was successfully imported the application s status bar reads Import MySQL Create Script done To view the newly imported script expand the Physical Schemata section by double clicking the arrow on the left of the Physical Schemata title bar Select the tab labeled sakila You may also wish to remove the default schema tab mydb Select this tab then click the button on the upper right in the Physical Schemata panel To view all the objects in the sakila schema you may need to expand the Physical Schemata window Move the mouse pointer anywhere over the gray area that defines the lower edge of the Physical Schemata window Hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse to adjust the size of the window After you have expanded the window all the objects in the sakila database should be visible Tables appear at the top followed by views and then routines There are no routine groups in this schema but you should see the Routine Groups section and an Add G
206. and SQL_THREADS must be running it must be connected to the master there are no errors the slave delay for non gtid enabled scenarios is not more than the threshold provided by the max position 292 and the slave is reading the correct master log file and slave delay is not more than the seconds behind 293 threshold option reset Execute the STOP SLAVE and RESET SLAVE commands on all slaves start Execute the START SLAVE command on all slaves stop Execute the STOP SLAVE command on all slaves switchover Perform slave promotion to a specified candidate slave as designated by the new master 292 option This command is available for both gtid enabled servers and non gtid enabled scenarios 290 mysqlrpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication Detection of a downed master is performed as follows If the connection to the master is lost wait timeout 293 seconds and check again If the master connection is lost and the master cannot be pinged or reconnected the failover event occurs For all commands that require specifying multiple servers the options require a comma separated list of connection parameters in the following form where the password port and socket are optional suser e passw e lt hosti ke pore S s lt SOCKS S The utility permits users to discover slaves connected to the master In order to use the discover slaves feature all slaves must use the report host and rep
207. and line client for running MySQL Utilities set lt variable gt lt value gt Store a variable for recall in commands show options Display list of options specified by the user on launch show variables Display list of variables lt ENTER gt Press ENTER to execute command lt ESCAPE gt Press ESCAPE to clear the command entry lt DOWN gt Press DOWN to retrieve the previous command lt UP gt Press UP to retrieve the next command in history lt TAB gt Press TAB for type completion of utility option or variable names lt TAB gt lt TAB gt Press TAB twice for list of matching type completion context sensitive One of the most helpful base commands is the ability to see the options for a given utility by typing help lt utility gt When the user types this command and presses ENTER the console will display a list of all of the options for the utility The console provides tab completion for all commands options for utilities and user defined variables Tab completion for commands allows users to specify the starting N characters of a command and press TAB to complete the command If there are more than one command that matches the prefix and the user presses TAB twice a list of all possible matches is displayed Tab completion for options is similar The user must first type a valid MySQL Utility command then types the first N characters of a command and presses TAB for example verb lt TABs In this case
208. andeeei eon ae 35 5 1 Workbench Central is a eae ial eed aera eel al adem Lael 36 9 2 WOrkKSPaCO E EN ene EEE EE E N vance A DE E S E T T EA 37 5 3 Workbench Application Minimum Window Size 0 ccceceeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeteeeeeeeeeaeaaeaees 37 5 4 Workbench Preferences vodca e S teen cee EN ENA EE EAE EEE EEES E 37 5 471 The General Tab niet a i ee a ana Ao 39 54 2 The Administrator Tab icc ena NEA Pee th decane shan AKINA eee cabelas 39 5473 The S E Editor Tab jetta ia ne ne aed 39 5 454 Th Model Tab tarairi a etn ese ea eek ae a hay ag pend a a aaa 41 5 45 The MySQL Tab ariaa aap a a ena ae 42 S46 The Diagram Tap oes e reana watehaeteaystde Se NANCE AN EANNA ete tc sup veetebwadseed EEN ENAA 42 5 4 7 The Appearance Tab oaser aiie an Eana eE AEE EEE ENAERE ENNE NARA NAA 43 6c SQL Development se ih er ingen A Aa a a a E TA ite avons ae a 45 6 1 Open Connection to Start Querying ssesessssssssssssrtrrrisrssssrtrrritrssssttrtrrttttstttnrrnnanssrernrrenent 45 6 2 New o aE eO E S E E TA E A E 46 6 3 Edit Table Datan nnr ie i aa a T a a a a Ei daa e aeania aaaea aa aa 46 6 4 Edit SQL Serti een iaaa a a cern eth aa aa a glee a a a TE 46 6 5 Manage Connections iiiar iino niia aa dite tne as aa at aaa a ae ia 46 6 6 Manage DB Connections Dialog ccccecceeceeeeeeeee eset ee aa ee teeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 46 6 6 1 The Password Storage Vault
209. ange this if you are using a commercial version of MySQL Workbench For more information see Section 7 5 1 5 4 The Relationship Notation Submenu You can select multiple connections by holding down the Control key as you click a connection This can be useful for highlighting specific relationships on an EER diagram 7 7 2 2 The Relationship Editor Double clicking a relationship on the EER diagram canvas opens the relationship editor This has two tabs Relationship and Foreign Key 99 Creating Foreign Key Relationships The Relationship Tab In the Relationship tab you can set the caption of a relationship using the Caption field This name displays on the canvas and is also the name used for the constraint itself The default value for this name is k_source_table_destination_table Use the Model menu Menu Options menu item to set a project specific default name for foreign keys To change the global default see Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab You can also add a secondary caption and a caption to a relationship The Visibility Settings section is used to determine how the relationship is displayed on the EER Diagram canvas Fully Visible is the default but you can also choose to hide relationship lines or to use split lines The split line style is pictured in the following figure Figure 7 17 The Split Connector tbipublishers i fk_pub Z tblbooks gt Note R A broken line connector indicates
210. ansaction identifiers GTIDs perform best slave election and report best slave to use in the event a switchover or failover is required Best slave election is simply the first slave to meet the prerequisites GTIDs are supported in version 5 6 5 and higher failover This command is available to only those servers supporting GTIDs Conduct failover to the best slave The command will test each candidate slave listed for the prerequisites Once a candidate slave is elected it is made a slave of each of the other slaves thereby collecting any transactions executed on other slaves but not the candidate In this way the candidate becomes the most up to date slave gtid This command is available to only those servers supporting GTIDs It displays the contents of the GTID variables GLOBAL GTID_ EXECUTED GLOBAL GTID_PURGED and GLOBAL GTID_OWNED The command also displays universally unique identifiers UUIDs for all servers health Display the replication health of the topology By default this includes the host name port role MASTER or SLAVE of the server state of the server UP is connected WARN not connected but can ping DOWN not connected and cannot ping the GTID_ MODE and health state The master health state is based on the following if GTID_MODE ON the server must have binary log enabled and there must exist a user with the REPLICATE SLAVE privilege The slave health state is based on the following the IO_ THREAD
211. ansformation for server2 Note The reverse changes are annotated and marked as comments verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit width lt number gt Change the display width of the test report The default is 75 characters You must provide connection parameters user host password and so forth for an account that has the appropriate privileges to access all objects to be compared 265 mysqldiff Identify Differences Among Database Objects The SQL transformation feature has these known limitations When tables with partition differences are encountered the utility generates the ALTER TABLE statement for all other changes but prints a warning and omits the partition differences If the transformation detects table options in the source table specified with the changes for 265 option that are not changed or do not exist in the target table the utility generates the ALTER TABLE statement for all other changes but prints a warning and omits the table option differences Rename for events is not supported This is because mysqldiff compares objects by name In this case depending on the direction of the diff the event is identified as needing to be added or a DROP EVENT statement is generated Changes in the definer
212. applicable only to an EER diagram They can be used for documentation purposes for example to explain a grouping of schema objects They are also useful for creating titles for an EER diagram should you decide to export a diagram as a PDF or PNG file 7 7 7 1 Adding Text Objects to an EER Diagram To add text objects to an EER Diagram use the Text Object tool on the vertical toolbar Make sure that the EER Diagram tab is selected then right click the text object icon on the vertical toolbar The text object icon is the rectangular icon found below the label icon Clicking the mouse on this icon changes the mouse pointer to a text object pointer You can also change the mouse pointer to a text object pointer by pressing the N key Choosing the Text Object tool changes the contents of the toolbar that appears immediately below the menu bar When the Text Object pointer is active this toolbar contains a color chart list Use this list to select the color accent for the new text object The color of your text object can be changed later using the Properties palette Create a text object by clicking anywhere on the EER Diagram canvas This creates a new text object with the default name text1 To revert to the default mouse pointer click the arrow icon at the top of the vertical toolbar Right clicking a text object opens a pop up menu These menu options are identical to the options for other objects However since a text object is not a databa
213. applies only if show list 302 is given e master lt source gt Connection information for the master server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format e max depth lt N gt The maximum recursion depth This option is valid only if recurse 302 is given num retries lt num_retries gt n lt num_retries gt The number of retries permitted for failed slave login attempts This option is valid only if prompt 802 is given 301 mysqlrplshow Show Slaves for Master Server NOTES prompt p Prompt for the slave user and password if different from the master user and password If you give this option the utility sets num ret ries 301 to 1 if that option is not set explicitly This ensures at least one attempt to retry and prompt for the user name and password should a connection fail quiet q Turn off all messages for quiet execution This option does not suppress errors or warnings feCurse r Traverse the list of slaves to find additional master slave connections User this option to map a replication topology show list l Display a column list of the topology version Display version information and exit The login user must have the REPLICATE SLAVE and REPLICATE CLIENT privileges to successfully execute this utility Specifically the login user must have appropriate permissions to execute SHOW SLAVE STATUS SHOW MASTER STATUS and SH
214. ard command for this action is Control Delete You can also right click an object and choose the delete option from the pop up menu The Delete ob ject_name menu item behaves differently depending upon circumstances For example if an EER Diagram is active and a table on the canvas is the currently selected object a dialog box may open asking whether you want to remove the table from the canvas only or from the database as well For 67 Modeling Menus 7 5 1 2 1 information about setting the default behavior when deleting from an EER Diagram see Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab Warning gt If the MySQL Model page is active the selected object is deleted from the catalog and there will be no confirmation dialog box Choose Edit Selected to edit the currently selected object You can also perform edits in a new window by selecting Edit Selected in New Window The keyboard shortcuts for Edit Selected and Edit Selected in New Window are Control E and Control Shift E respectively The Select item has the following submenus Select All Keyboard shortcut Control A Selects all the objects on the active EER diagram e Similar Figures Objects of the same type Finds objects similar to the currently selected object e Connected Figures Finds all the objects connected to the currently selected object These menu items are active only when an EER Diagram tab is selected The Similar Figures and the Connected Figures menu i
215. artmentHistory DATA MIGRATION Data Transfer Setup REPORT Migration Report Migration Wizard was started Migration Report And finally the migration report is available and summarizes the entire migration process 201 Migrating from supported databases Figure 10 17 MySQL Workbench migration Migration Report Workl SQL Editor Local instance MyS File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Im OVERVIEW Overview SOURCE amp TARGET Y Source Selection Y Target Selection 7 Fetch Schemata List Y Schemata Selection Y Reverse Engineer Source OBJECT MIGRATION Y Source Objects Y Migration Manual Editing Target Creation Options 7 Create Schemata Y Create Target Results DATA MIGRATION Y Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer Migration Report Migration Wizard was started MigrationReport MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard Report Date Thu Oct 11 11 23 31 2012 Source Microsoft SQL Server 9 0 5000 Target MySQL 5 5 28 I Migration 1 Summary Number of migrated schemata 1 1 HumanResources Source Schema HumanResources Tables 2 Migration Issues Name note Collation Latin1_General_CS_AS migrated to utf8_general_ci lame note Collation Latin1_General_CS_AS migrated to utf8_general_ci ifiedDate note Default value is getdateQ so type was changed from DATETIME to TIMESTAMP NationalIDNumber note Collation Latin1_General_CS
216. ata In each of these cases load times would be greatly increased as the tables and schemata are enumerated and drawn Show Schema Contents in Schema Tree Enumerating populating and drawing large numbers of items can significantly increase loading times For this reason this facility can be switched off for models containing large numbers of schemata and tables Show Metadata Schemata By default metadata schemata are not displayed To display them for example to troubleshoot or check metadata information select this option Continue on SQL Script Error Should an error occur while executing a script this option causes execution to continue for the remainder of the script Forbid UPDATE and DELETE statements without a WHERE clause This option enables the SQL_SAFE_UPDATES option for the session preventing UPDATE and DELETE statements from being executed if a WHERE clause is not present This can avoid potentially dangerous situations where a statement could accidentally update or delete all rows in a table e Max syntax error count Large complex scripts can contain many errors Further a syntax error early on can lead to many subsequent syntax errors For these reasons it is possible to limit the number of errors displayed using this option The default is 100 error messages Progress status update interval When executing long running queries over a slow connection you may need to increase this value to prevent excess load on t
217. ate a batch file to copy the data at another time C Wsers philip Desktop copy_migrated_tables cmd OBJECT MIGRATION Options Y Source Objects Migration Truncate target tables ie delete contents before copying data Y Manual Editing Number of tasks to use for data transfer Each task will open a Worker tasks 2 connection to both source and target RDBMSs to copy table rows Target Creation Options Default value 2 Y Create Schemata Y Create Target Results Enable debug output for table copy DATA MIGRATION Bulk Data Transfer REPORT Migration Report Migration Wizard was started Bulk Data Transfer And now the data is transferred to the target RDBMS Optionally view the logs to confirm 200 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 16 MySQL Workbench migration Bulk Data Transfer Migration Task List Bulk Data Transfer OVERVIEW 3 Overview The following tasks will now be performed Please monitor the execution SOURCE amp TARGET Source Selection Y Prepare information for data copy Target Selection Create shell script for data copy Fetch Schemata List Determine number of rows to copy Y Schemata Selection Y Reverse Engineer Source Copy data to target RDBMS OBJECT MIGRATION Y Source Objects Y Migration a Y Manual Editing Target Creation Options Y Create Schemata Y Create Target Results Copying HumanResources EmployeeDep
218. ation on how to use these options Storage Options Section The Storage Options section is available only for My 1SA tables Use it to configure a custom path to the table storage and data files This can help improve server performance by locating different tables on different hard drives Merge Table Options Section Use the Merge Table Options section to configure MERGE tables To create a MERGE table select MERGE as your storage engine and then specify the My 1SA tables you wish to merge in the Union Tables dialog You may specify the action the server should take when users attempt to perform INSERT statements on the merge table You may also select the Merge Method by selecting from the list For more information about MERGE tables see The MERGE Storage Engine The Inserts Tab Use the Inserts tab to insert rows into the table To edit a row click the field you wish to change and enter the new data Right clicking a row displays a menu with the following items Set Field s to NULL Set the column value to NULL Delete Row s Delete the selected row or rows Copy Row Content Copies the row to the clipboard Strings are copied quoted and NULL values are preserved Copy Row Content unquoted Copies the row to the clipboard Strings are not quoted and NULL are copied as a space 96 Creating Tables e Copy Field Content Copies the value of the selected field to the clipboard Strings ar
219. ation specific to the source RDBMS This step will also perform the renaming of objects schemas depending on the type of object name mapping method that is chosen 187 A visual guide to performing a database migration 3 Automatically migrates the source RDBMS objects into MySQL specific objects a Target schema objects are created b Target table objects are created i Columns for each table are copied A Datatypes are mapped to MySQL datatypes B Default values are mapped to a MySQL supported default value if possible ii Indexes are converted iii Primary Keys are converted iv Triggers are copied and commented out if the source is not MySQL c Foreign Keys for all tables of all schemas are converted d View objects are copied and commented out if the source is not MySQL e Stored Procedure and Function objects are copied and commented out if the source is not MySQL 4 Provides an opportunity to review the changes for editing and correcting errors in the migrated objects 5 Creates the migrated objects in the target MySQL server If there are errors you can return to the previous step and correct them and retry the target creation 6 Copy data of the migrated tables from the source RDBMS to MySQL MySQL Workbench provides support for migrating from some specific RDBMS products The Migration Wizard will provide the best results when migrating from such products However in some cases other unsupported databa
220. ault schema double click the schema tab This opens a schema editor window docked at the bottom of the application To undock or redock this window double click anywhere in the editor title bar To rename the schema use the field labeled Name After you have renamed the schema a lightning bolt icon appears right aligned in the Name field indicating that other changes are pending Click the Comments field and a dialog box opens asking if you wish to rename all schema occurrences Clicking Yes ensures that your changes are propagated throughout the application Add comments to the database and change the collation if you wish Close the schema editor by clicking the x button 7 8 2 1 Creating a New Table Create a new table by double clicking the Add Table icon in the Physical Schemata panel This opens the table editor docked at the bottom of the application If you wish you can undock or dock this editor in exactly the same way as the schema editor window Use the first tab of the table editor to change the name collation and engine You may also add a comment Add columns to the new table by selecting the Columns tab Use the default column name or enter a new name of your choosing Use the Tab key to move to the next column and set the column s data type 142 Basic Modeling Altering the table by adding indexes or other features is also easily done using the table editor 7 8 2 2 Creating Other Schema Objects Additional ob
221. aunches a wizard to step you through applying your changes This gives you a chance to review the SQL that will be applied to the live server to make the requested changes If this option is deselected the changes will be applied to the server without the wizard being displayed and without giving you a chance to review the changes that will be made 5 4 4 The Model Tab This section provides configuration options that affect the Modeling functionality in MySQL Workbench Use the When Deleting Physical Model Figures in Diagram section to determine the behavior when deleting objects from the EER diagram canvas Choose Ask and whenever you delete an object you will be asked whether you wish to remove the object from an EER diagram only or also from the catalog The Keep Database Object in Catalog is the safest option You also have the option of deleting the object from both the EER diagram and the catalog deleting an object from an EER Diagram When deleting in the MySQL Model view there is no confirmation dialog window and the delete action always removes the Note R If you choose the Ask option a confirmation dialog box opens only when you are object from the catalog There are a variety of ways to delete an object from an EER canvas using the eraser tool choosing a pop up menu item using the delete key and by choosing the delete option from the Edit menu In each case the action performed by the delete key is determined by the option ch
222. authorization from the X Consortium FSF changes to this file are in the public domain Copyright 1996 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc Taken from GNU libtool 2001 Originally by Gordon Matzigkeit lt gord gnu ai mit edu gt 1996 This file is free software the Free Software Foundation gives unlimited permission to copy and or distribute it with or without modifications as long as this notice is preserved You are receiving a copy of the libintl library The terms of the Oracle license do NOT apply to the libintl library it is licensed under the following license separately from the Oracle programs you receive If you do not wish to install this program you may delete the intl dll or libintl files This component is licensed under Section A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 A 17 Libxml2 License The following software may be included in this product Libxm12 Except where otherwise noted in the source code e g the Eiles bhash c Hist and the trio Erles vvhich are covered by a similar licence but with different Copyright notices all the files are Copyright C 1998 2003 Daniel Veillard All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation 332 Libzip License the rights to use co
223. ave file system access to read those directories Disk space usage shown includes the sum of all storage engine specific files such as the MYI and MYD files for MyISAM and the tablespace files for InnoDB If the file system read fails or if the server is not local the utility cannot determine exact file sizes It is limited to information that can be obtained from the system tables which therefore should be considered an estimate For information read from the server the account used to connect to the server must have the appropriate permissions to read any objects accessed during the operation If information requested requires file system access but is not available that way the utility prints a message that the information is not accessible This occurs for example if you request log usage but the server is not local and the log files cannot be examined directly To specify how to display output use one of the following values with the format 269 option e grid default Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor e cSV Display output in comma separated values format tab Display output in tab separated format e vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysql monitor To turn off the headers for csv or tab display format specify the no headers 269 option OPTIONS mysqldiskusage accepts the following command line options e help Display a help messa
224. avigate to the folder where the templates are stored Assuming that MySQL Workbench has been installed into the default location on Windows this would be c Program Files MySQL MySOL Workbench 5 0 SE modules data wb_model_reporting Copy the Text_Basic tpl folder The copy can be given any suitable name for example Custom Basic tpl Edit the info xm1 file to reflect your custom template The unedited file in this case is shown here lt xml version 1 0 gt lt data gt lt value type object struct name workbench model reporting TemplateInfo id BD6879ED 814C 4CA3 A8 69 98 64F83B88DF struct checksum 0xb46b524d gt lt value type string key description gt A basic TEXT report listing schemata and objects lt value gt lt value type string key name gt HIML Basic Frame Report lt value gt lt value type list content type object content struct name workbench model reporting TemplateStyleInfo key styles gt lt value type object struct name workbench model reporting TemplateStyleInfo id 7550655C CD4B 4EB1 8FAB AAEE4 9B2261E struct checksum 0xab08451b gt lt value type string key description gt Designed to be viewed with a fixed sized font lt value gt lt value type string key name gt Fixed Size Font lt value gt lt value type String key previewImageFileName gt preview_basic png lt value gt lt value type String key styleTagValue gt fixed lt value gt lt value
225. ay contain only alphanumeric characters dots and underscores caption A caption to use for the plugin in menus input An optional list of input arguments groups Optional list of groups the plugin belongs to Recognized values are Overview Utility The Context menu in the Model Overview Model Utility The menu for diagram objects Menu lt category gt The Plugins menu in the main menu pluginMenu Optional name of a submenu in the Plugins menu where the plugin should appear For example Catalog Objects Utilities This is equivalent to adding a Menu lt category gt in the groups list 11 4 Adding a GUI to a Plugin Using MForms MySQL Workbench is implemented with a C core back end and a native front end for each supported platform Currently the front end is implemented with Windows Forms on Microsoft Windows GTK on Linux and Cocoa on Mac OS X This approach permits the application to have a native look and feel while reducing the amount of work required to maintain the project However the GUI functionality required by MySQL Workbench can be met by a subset of graphical operations These are implemented in a cross platform GUI library MForms This further reduces the development effort because plugin developers can use MForms rather than writing front end specific code for each supported platform This also helps consistency of operation across all platforms MForms is coded in C but provides a Python interface
226. b1 exists on the server designated by the server1 246 option host1 The rightmost database dbx exists on the server designated by the server2 246 option host 2 changes for server1 245 Produce output that shows how to make the definitions of objects on server like the definitions of the corresponding objects on server2 changes for server2 245 Produce output that shows how to make the definitions of objects on server2 like the definitions of the corresponding objects on serverl The default direction is server1 You must provide connection parameters user host password and so forth for an account that has the appropriate privileges to access all objects in the operation If the utility is to be run on a server that has binary logging enabled and you do not want the comparison steps logged use the disable binary logging 245 option OPTIONS mysqldbcompare accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit changes for lt direction gt Specify the server to show transformations to match the other server For example to see the transformation for transforming object definitions on server1 to match the corresponding definitions on server2 use changes for server1 245 Permitted values are server1 and server2 The default is server difftype lt difftype gt d lt difftype gt Specify the difference display format Permitted format values
227. become the new master Preparing candidate for failover Creating replication user if it does not exist Se Sh SE SE 295 mysql rpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication Stopping slaves Performing STOP on all slaves Switching slaves to new master Starting slaves Performing START on all slaves Checking slaves for errors Failover complete done After this command the log file will contain entries like the following 2012 03 19 14 44 17 PM INFO Executing failover command 2012 03 19 14 44 17 PM INFO Performing failover 2012 03 19 14 44 17 PM INFO Candidate slave localhost 3333 will become the new master 2012 03 19 14 44 17 PM INFO Preparing candidate for failover 2012 03 19 14 44 19 PM INFO Creating replication user if it does not exist 2012 03 19 14 44 19 PM INFO Stopping slaves 2012 03 19 14 44 19 PM INFO Performing STOP on all slaves 2012 03 19 14 44 19 PM INFO Switching slaves to new master 2012 03 19 14 44 20 PM INFO Starting slaves 2012 03 19 14 44 20 PM INFO Performing START on all slaves 2012 03 19 14 44 20 PM INFO Checking slaves for errors 2012 03 19 14 44 21 PM INFO Failover complete ZAQUASOS 1e deville il IPM TINONC raone To perform switchover and demote the current master to a slave use the following command mysqlrpladmin master root localhost 3331 slaves root localhost 3332 root localhost 3333 root loc
228. bench SQL parser These values are ANST_QUOTES HIGH_NOT_PRECEDENCE IGNORE_SPACE NO_BACKSLASH_ESCAPES PIPES_AS_CONCAT Other values do not affect the MySQL Workbench SQL parser and are ignored If the value of SqlMode is not set the default value of the SOL_MODE session variable defined by the server stays unchanged during operations with the server However the MySQL Workbench SQL parser behaves as if SOQL_MODE is also not set This may potentially lead to inconsistencies in parsing of SQL statements stored in the document If you choose to not set the SqiMode property ensure that the default SOL_MODE variable defined by the server does not contain any values from the following list ANSI_QUOTES HIGH_NOT_PRECEDENCE IGNORE_SPACE NO_BACKSLASH_ESCAPES PIPES_AS_CONCAT The SqiMode property is defined in two locations globally and at document scope MySQL Workbench uses the global property to initialize the document property for each new document created For each document the property value defined at document scope always has higher priority over the one defined globally Query Editor The query editor properties that can be set include the following Show Live Schema Overview This option enables a simplification of the user interface by removing the Overview tab from the SQL Editor This is extremely useful if schemata have a large number of tables or a model has a large number of schem
229. bench app Contents Frameworks and remove or replace the files libglib 2 dylib libgmodule 2 dylib and libgthread 2 dylib on Mac OS X but the Oracle program might not operate properly or at all without the library This component is licensed under Section A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 A 11 Glitz License The following software may be included in this product 321 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 Gulaview Copyright 2004 David Reveman Peter Nilsson Permission to use copy modify distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the names of David Reveman and Peter Nilsson not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission David Reveman and Peter Nilsson makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty DAVID REVEMAN AND PETER NILSSON DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL DAVID REVEMAN AND PETER NILSSON BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
230. bility to run a query and process the results Fortunately there is a simple SQL statement that can retrieve all of the users on a server For our purposes we get all of the users except the root and anonymous users then add each to a list for processing later users serverl exec_query SELECT user host PROM mysql user WHERE user root and user for user in users user_list append user 0 user 1 Now we must clone the original server and create a viable running instance When you examine the mysqlserverclone utility code you see that it calls another module located in the mysql utilities command sub folder These modules are where all of the work done by the utilities take place This enables you to create new combinations of the utilities by calling the actual operations directly Let s do that now to clone the server The first thing you notice in examining the serverclone module is that it takes a number of parameters for the new server instance We supply those in a similar way as options parser add_option new data action store dest new_data type string help the full path to the location 233 Introduction to extending the MySQL Utilities of the data directory for the new instance parser add_option new port action store dest new_port type string default 3307 help the new port for the new instance default default parser add_option new id act
231. ble click arrows in the list to choose whether to ignore changes update the model with database changes or Fetch Object Info Select Changes to Apply m Update Source S tabiel T tablez T tables table3 T tables I N A Tma 1 tables In the preceding example the live database consists of tablel table2 and table3 In MySQL Workbench an additional table tab1e4 has been created along with a relationship between it and table3 Further table5 exists in the live database but not in the model The actions that are configured to occur would result in table3 being altered to include the relationship with table4 table4 being created and table5 being dropped in the live database It is possible to reconfigure this though The next example shows how the direction of synchronization can be changed 133 Forward Engineering Figure 7 40 Controlling Synchronization Direction Synchronize Model with Database Connection Options Paa Model and Database Differences Connect to DBMS Select Schemata P Double click arrows in the list to choose whether to ignore changes update the model with database changes or Fetch Object Info Model Update Source Select Changes to Appl z ioy 4 mydb mydb T tablet tablet T tablez table2 T table3 table3 T tables table4 TU In this case the synchronization direction has been changed so that rather than the default action of table5 being dropped from the live da
232. cccceccecceeeeeeeeeee tees eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeeees 47 6 6 2 Standard TCP IP Connection ccccccece ce eeeeeeeeeeee tees ae eaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaceeeeeeeeeaeaaaaaeeees 48 6 6 3 Local Socket Pipe Connection 0 cc cceeeeeeeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeneeeeeeeeeaaa 49 6 6 4 Standard TCP IP over SSH Connection cece cecceeeeeeeeeeeeee ee aeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeees 50 6 7 SOL Edito nin aun a a eee ee a ee 50 6 7 tei Mam Meni sac tncsieets chines cowivtecpe E a tts edeaphadev ER E OE RE 51 BAA TOOIDAL iieo Un een ete a denies DN eee ae er a DR eee ee ee 53 6 7 3 SQL Query Panel Paii erann Soave pies wa eae a pads So vain Opa feted wasn apa dds Saas hee 53 6 7 4 Main TabSh ets rocada Seeded deeb keene aed eee eet cane evel eed eee 54 6 7 5 SIC Dal aii tiered Jane eccc aati tin ecco te dd ain im eden ante Ate 57 T Data MOd6IING aoran ae ee ed ee Re ee 63 7 1 Open an Existing EER Model c cccccceeeeeeeee cece ee ae teense ee sees aaeaceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeees 64 MySQL Workbench 7 2 Create New EER Model sieciesceececsinssenestoeneessinuasaceetag ccadaaabecseanudecie ria veebd AEEA A EEE AEEA 64 7 3 Create EER Model from Existing Database ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeees 64 7 4 Create EER Model from SQL Script 0 22 00 ceee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeee ee aeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeseeeeeeaeaaeeees 6
233. ces Department migrated Data Transfer Setup Table HumanResources EmployeePayHistory migrated Bulk Data Transfer Table HumanResources JobCandidate migrated Finalizing ean key migration Migration finished REPORT Migrate Selected Objects finished Migration Report Generate SQL CREATE Statements Generating SQL Generate SQL CREATE Statements finished Finished performing tasks Migration Wizard was started Manual Editing There are three sections to edit here which are selected via the View select box on the top right The Show Code and Messages button is available with every view and it will show the generated MySQL code that corresponds to the selected object e Migration Problems This will either report problems or display No mapping problems found It is an informational screen All Objects An object view that allows you to view and edit the object definitions Double click on a row to modify a target objects name e Column Mappings Shows all of the table column mappings and allows you to individually review and fix the mapping for all column types default values and other attributes 196 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 10 MySQL Workbench migration Manual Editing All Objects Migration Task List OVERVIEW 3 Overview Review and edit migrated objects You can manually edit the generated SQL before applying them to the target database SOURCE amp TA
234. ch Read about all changes in this MySQL Workbench release MySQLDoc MySQLBug Workbench Planet MySQL Workbench Library Reporter Team Blog Forums Workspace Connect to existing databases and run Create and manage models forward amp Configure your database server setup SQL Queries SQL scripts edit data and reverse engineer compare and user accounts browse status variables manage database objects synchronize schemas report and server logs SQL Development Data Modeling Q Server Administration G Open Connection to Start Querying fal Open Existing EER Model ie Server Administration gt te localhost sakila mysqid2 localhost a j User root Host localhost 3306 Local Type Windows 4 Sample was Last modified Mon Sep 20 13 52 51 2010 New Connection New Server Instance ig amp ci Edit Table Data ae Create New EER Model a Manage Import Export cl Edit SQL Script 53 Create EER Model From Existing Database Manage Security E 3 Manage Connections E gt Create EER Model From SQL Script ig Manage Server Instances gt ihe 5 1 Workbench Central Workbench Central enables you to keep up to date with MySQL Workbench news events and resources You can read the developer blogs find out what s new in the release access the forums check for updates and file a bug report Workbench Central includes the following facilities e What s new A list of bug fixes and changes e MySQL Doc Library
235. ch return a value might be combined with some predefined filters See Filters Help vor more details MySQL Management Server Stats Start MySQL sc start mysql Stop MySQL sc stop mysql Acquire administrator rights to execute start stop commands and write configuration data lt Check MySQL Status sc query mysql findstr RUNNING Acquire administrator rights to execute status commands Sudo command v After an instance has been created it can be launched by double clicking its icon in the Server Administration panel of the Home page This creates an Admin page which has two main panels Server Status and Configuration The Configuration panel features multiple tabs Startup Configuration Accounts Connections Variables Data Dump and Logs 9 7 Server Administration and Configuration The Administrator functionality in MySQL Workbench is grouped into several tabs Startup Enables you to start and stop the MySQL server and view the startup message log 171 Server Administration and Configuration e Configuration Enables you to view and edit the MySQL Configuration file my ini or my cnf using GUI controls e Accounts Enables you to create user accounts and assign roles and privileges Connections Displays connections to MySQL Server Variables Displays system and status variables Data Dump Import and export of data e Logs Displays server
236. cify a condition based on process time use age 284 Processes that can be seen and killed are subject to whether the account used to connect to the server has the PROCESS and SUPER privileges Without PROCESS the account cannot see processes belonging to other accounts Without SUPER the account cannot kill processes belonging to other accounts To specify how to display output use one of the following values with the format 284 option grid default Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor csv Display output in comma separated values format tab Display output in tab separated format vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysql monitor mysqlprocgrep accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit age lt time gt Select only processes that have been in the current state more than a given time The time value can be specified in two formats either using the hh mm ss format with hours and minutes optional or as a sequence of numbers with a suffix giving the period size The permitted suffixes are s second m minute h hour d day and w week For example 4h15m mean 4 hours and 15 minutes For both formats the specification can optionally be preceded by or where means older than the given time and means younger than the given time format lt format gt f lt format gt
237. class to import for a collection of tests based on a common code base EXAMPLES The following example demonstrates how to invoke mut to execute a subset of the tests using an existing server which is cloned The example displays the test name status and relative time python mut server root localhost do tests clone_user width 70 MySQL Utilities Testing MUT Parameters used Display Width 70 Sorted True Force False Test directory fe UPIEtes directory lmn scripts Starting port 3310 Test wildcard clone_users Servers Connecting to localhost as user root on port 3306 CONNECTED main clone_user pass 54 main clone_user_errors pass 27 main clone_user_parameters pass Aq mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences Testing completed Friday 03 December 2010 09 50 06 All 3 tests passed 13 3 3 mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences This utility compares the objects and data from two databases to find differences It identifies objects having different definitions in the two databases and presents them in a diff style format of choice Differences in the data are shown using a similar diff style format Changed or missing rows are shown ina standard format of GRID CSV TAB or VERTICAL Use the notation db1 db2 to name two databases to compare or alternatively just db1 to compare two databases with the same name The latter case is a c
238. command grep Search Databases for Objects cccccees 235 13 2 2 mysql utilities command proc Search Processes on Servers 0ccceeeeeeeee 236 Mantlal Pages sarc ciiedsavee cade ncuivoncca nas taqecnwswessteevecaeiacsiwasstaaeeasnasviidl sata tsacva desley chdabcenaseeivectieateasd 238 13 3 1 MySQL Utilities Overview Brief overview of command line utilities eee 238 13 3 2 mut MySQL Utilities Testing 2 0 0 0 cece cece cece cece cee ee eter ee ee ae aa ee teeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 240 13 3 3 mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences 0 6 243 13 3 4 mysqldbcopy Copy Database Objects Between Servers cccccseeeceeeaneseeeeaaeeeees 249 13 3 5 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database ce 253 13 3 6 mysqldbimport Import Object Definitions or Data into a Database 0c0 260 13 3 7 mysqldiff Identify Differences Among Database Objects ceseeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 263 13 3 8 mysqldiskusage Show Database Disk Usage cccceccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaees 267 13 3 9 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring and failover 08 271 13 3 10 mysqlindexcheck Identify Potentially Redundant Table Indexes 00ccceeeees 277 13 3 11 mysqimetagrep Search Database Object Definitions ccccccceccee
239. cs rendering may appear slow there are several other reasons why performance may be less than expected The following tips may offer improved performance Upgrade to the latest version MySQL Workbench 5 0 is still being continually maintained and some performance related issues may have been resolved e Limit the number of steps to save in the Undo History facility Depending on the operations performed having an infinite undo history can use a lot of memory after a few hours of work In Tools Options General enter a number in the range 10 to 20 into the Undo History Size spinbox 353 e Disable relationship line crossing rendering In large diagrams there may be a significant overhead when drawing these line crossings In Tools Options Diagram uncheck the option named Draw Line Crossings e Check your graphics card driver The GDI rendering used in MySQL Workbench 5 0 is not inherently slow as most video drivers support hardware acceleration for GDI functions It can help if you have the latest native video drivers for your graphics card Upgrade to MySQL Workbench 5 1 MySQL Workbench 5 1 has had many operations optimized For example opening an object editor such as the table editor is much faster even with a large model loaded However these core optimizations will not be back ported to 5 0 B 3 I get errors when creating or placing objects on an EER Diagram am using OpenGL rendering AMD processor and ATI
240. cted and changed as desired This wizard can also be used to create new connections To read more about managing connections see Section 6 6 Manage DB Connections Dialog 6 6 Manage DB Connections Dialog MySQL Workbench provides a Manage DB Connections dialog for creating and managing connections to servers The connections created can then be used from the wizards that must connect to a server such as the wizard used to reverse engineer a live database However it is still possible to set connection parameters from these wizards if required without invoking the Manage DB Connections dialog directly The Manage DB Connections dialog is invoked by selecting Database Manage Connections from the main menu It can also be invoked from any of the wizards requiring access to a live database This is achieved by using the Manage Stored Connections item found in the wizard s Stored Connection list After the Manage DB Connections dialog is launched you are presented with the following dialog which enables you to create or delete connections 46 The Password Storage Vault Figure 6 1 Manage DB Connections Dialog f E O D Manage DB Connections Ea mil Stored Connections Connection Name Big Iron Server Type a name for the connection Local instance MySQLS5 Connection Method Standard TCP IP v Method to use to connect to the RDBMS jarana localhost Parameters Advanced Hostname
241. ction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions 4 he above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be ncluded in all copies or substantial portions of the Software lie HE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND XPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES F MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND ONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT OLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY HETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING ROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE ea SS 8S 2S eal ei A 20 Paramiko License The following software may be included in this product Paramiko You are receiving a copy of Paramiko in both source and object code The terms of the Oracle license do NOT apply to the Paramiko program it is licensed under the following license separately from the Oracle programs you receive If you do not wish to install this program you may delete the Paramiko folder and all its contents This component is licensed under Section A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 A 21 PCRE License The following software may be incl
242. ction and configuration details for a specific server that you wish to manage When you click this item a wizard is launched that enables you to specify the connection and various other configuration parameters After completion of the wizard a new Admin tab is launched which displays Server Status and Configuration For further details see Section 9 6 1 New Server Instance Wizard 9 3 Manage Data Import Export This action item enables you to create a dump file from a database or restore data from a file to a live database Clicking this item launches the Import Export MySQL Data wizard This enables you to select a server instance to connect to For further details see Section 9 7 6 The Data Dump Tab 9 4 Manage Security This action item takes you quickly to the page that enables you to manage user accounts It launches an Admin page and locates you on the Accounts tab For further details see Section 9 7 3 The Accounts Tab 9 5 Manage Server Instances Clicking this action item launches the Manage Server Instances dialog Within this dialog you can change the configuration of existing server instances or create a new server instance For further details see Section 9 6 Creating and Managing Server Instances 9 6 Creating and Managing Server Instances Server instances can be created and managed from the Home page To create new server instances use one of these methods Click the New Server Ins
243. d in options exist Parse connection values Establish replication connection between a master and a slave 230 Introduction to extending the MySQL Utilities get_replication_tests Return list of replication test function pointers server get_connection_dictionary Get connection dictionary find_running_servers Check whether any servers are running on the local host CONDS Cems ora icra Connect to source and destination server Server Connect to running MySQL server and perform server level operations table Index Encapsulate index for a given table as defined by SHOW INDEXES Table Encapsulate table for given database to perform table level operations tools get_tool_path Search for MySQL tool and return its E AL jeyevie lal delete_directory Remove directory folder and contents user parse_user_host Parse user passwd host port from user passwd host User Clone user and its grants to another user and perform user level operations General Interface Specifications and Code Practices The MySQL Utilities are designed and coded using mainstream coding practices and techniques common to the Python community Effort has been made to adhere to the most widely accepted specifications and techniques This includes limiting the choice of libraries used to the default libraries found in the Python distributions This ensures easier installation enhanced portability and fewer problems with missing libraries Similarly external librar
244. d the destination server does not support the specified storage engine a warning is issued and the server s default storage engine setting is used instead You must provide connection parameters user host password and so forth for an account that has the appropriate privileges to access all objects in the operation For details see NOTES OPTIONS mysqldbimport accepts the following command line options e help Display a help message and exit e bulk insert b Use bulk insert statements for data e default storage engine lt def_engine gt The engine to use for tables if the destination server does not support the original storage engine on the source server e drop first d Drop each database to be imported if exists before importing anything into it e dryrun Import the files and generate the statements but do not execute them This is useful for testing input file validity format lt format gt f lt format gt Specify the input format Permitted format values are sql grid tab csv and vertical The default is sql 261 mysqldbimport Import Object Definitions or Data into a Database NOTES import lt import_type gt i lt import_type gt Specify the import format Permitted format values are definitions import only the definitions metadata for the objects in the database list data import only the table data for the tables in the database list and both import the definition
245. d and commented to enable the user to choose which to include when imported To include the replication user in the CHANGE MASTER statement use the rpl user 256 option to specify the user and password If this option is omitted the utility attempts to identify the replication user In the event that there are multiple candidates or the user requires a password these statements are placed inside comments for the CHANGE MASTER statement You can also use the comment rp1 255 option to place the replication statements inside comments for later examination If you specify the rp1 file 256 option the utility writes the replication statements to the file specified instead of including them in the export stream OPTIONS mysqldbexport accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit bulk insert b Use bulk insert statements for data comment rpl Place the replication statements in comment statements Valid only with the rp1 256 option display lt display gt d lt display gt Control the number of columns shown Permitted display values are brief minimal columns for object creation full all columns and names only object names not valid for format sq1 256 The default is brief exclude lt exclude gt x lt exclude gt Exclude one or more objects from the operation using either a specific name such as db1 t1 ora search pattern Use this option multiple tim
246. d of MySQL Workbench Custom Report This simplified report just lists the schemata and the tables in a model The date and time the report was generated is also displayed as a result of the use of the GENERATED variable The custom template can then be tested Start MySQL Workbench load the model to generate the report for select the Model DBDOC Model Reporting menu item Then select the new custom template from the list of available templates select an output directory and click Finish to generate the report Finally navigate to the output directory to view the finished report 161 162 Chapter 8 Generating code overview Table of Contents 8 17 Generating SQL QUeLIOS sess2eccseeecedsategevebaateedeseduedvebadncneese e aa Eea EENET aA aa EA 163 8 2 Generating PHP COC scmraneanaane n E E E Ei 163 This document provides a quick hands on introduction to using MySQL Workbench to generate code for later use for either in or outside of MySQL Workbench 8 1 Generating SQL queries MySQL Workbench can be used to generate SQL most typically as either INSERT or SELECT queries Below are the most common methods to generated SQL statements in MySQL Workbench e Right clicking on a table or column name within the schema view will offer many different SQL generating options For example right clicking on a table name will allow creating SELECT A11 INSERT UPDATE DELETE and CREATE
247. dapter info Adapter type VirtualBox Graphics Adapter Chip Type VBOX BIOS String Version 0xBOC2 or later Video Memory 12288 KB 7 5 2 The Toolbar The MySQL Workbench toolbar is located immediately below the menu bar Click the tools in the toolbar to perform the following actions The new document icon Creates a new document e The folder icon Opens a MySQL Workbench file mwb extension e The save icon Saves the current MySQL Workbench project 76 EER Diagrams The right and left arrows The left arrow performs an Undo operation The right arrow performs a Redo operation Other tools appear on the toolbar depending upon the context 7 5 2 1 Tool Specific Toolbar Items When an EER diagram canvas is selected the following icons appear to the right of the arrow icons e The toggle grid icon Turns the grid on and off e The grid icon Aligns objects on the canvas with the grid e The new EER diagram icon Creates a new EER diagram tab The toolbar also changes depending upon which tool from the vertical toolbar is active For discussion of these tools see Section 7 6 1 The Vertical Toolbar If the Table tool is active schemata lists engine types and collations appear on the toolbar The table properties can be modified using the Properties Editor When an object is selected the object s properties such as color can be changed in the Properties Editor 7 5 3 EER Diagrams Use th
248. diskusage Show Database Disk Usage cccccecssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 267 13 3 9 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring and failover 271 13 3 10 mysqlindexcheck Identify Potentially Redundant Table Indexes 6 277 13 3 11 mysqlimetagrep Search Database Object Definitions cccceeeeeeenneeees 280 13 3 12 mysqlprocgrep Search Server Process Lists cccseceeeececeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaes 283 13 3 13 mysqlreplicate Set Up and Start Replication Between Two Servers 286 13 3 14 mysqlrpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication ceeee 290 13 3 15 mysqlrplcheck Check Replication Prerequisites 0 cccccccceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 13 3 16 mysqlrplshow Show Slaves for Master Server ccseeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeeeeeeees 300 13 3 17 mysqlserverclone Clone Existing Server to Create New Server 6 303 13 3 18 mysqlserverinfo Display Common Diagnostic Information from a Server 305 13 3 19 mysqluc Command line client for running MySQL Utilities 0 eee 307 13 3 20 mysqluserclone Clone Existing User to Create New User cesseeeeeees 310 13 4 PARSONS ccris ld aedasaua wenadnsucus E E A E E E E E danse ds geadaasdesndandeueedan 312 13 4 1 mysql utilities parser Parse MySQL Log Files 0 eccceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeneenees 312 Ae
249. displayed because its body does This is the same as the previous example but using the REGEXP operator Note that in the pattern it is not necessary to add wildcards before or after t2 mysqlmetagrep Gb pattern t2 server mats localhost 4 4 4 4 Connection Object Type Object Name Database 4 4 4 4 Foot localhost 3306 TRIGGER ee oG test root localhost 3306 TABLE e2 test 4 4 4 4 13 3 12 mysqlprocgrep Search Server Process Lists This utility scans the process lists for the servers specified using instances of the server 285 option and selects those that match the conditions specified using the age 284 and mat ch xxx options For a process to match all conditions given must match The utility then either prints the selected processes the default or executes certain actions on them If no age 284 or mat ch xxx options are given the utility selects all processes 283 mysqlprocgrep Search Server Process Lists Options The match xxx options correspond to the columns in the INFORMATION_SCHEMA PROCESSLIST table For example mat ch command 285 specifies a matching condition for PROCESSLIST COMMAND column values There is no mat ch t ime option To spe
250. e Copying TABLE util_test t4 Copying table data Copying VIEW util_test vl Copying TRIGGER util_test trg Copying PROCEDURE util_test pl Copying FUNCTION util_test fl Copying EVENT util_test el Copying GRANTS from util_test T doner To copy one or more databases from a master to a slave you can use the following command to copy the databases Use the master as the source and the slave as the destination mysqldbcopy source root localhost 3310 destination root localhost 3311 test123 rpl master rpl user rpl Source on localhost connected Destination on localhost connected Source on localhost connected Stopping slave Copying database test123 Copying TABLE test123 t1l Copying data for TABLE test123 t1l Connecting to the current server as master Starting slave COner To copy a database from one slave to another attached to the same master you can use the following command using the slave with the database to be copied as the source and the slave where the database needs to copied to as the destination mysqldbcopy source root localhost 3311 destination root localhost 3312 test123 rpl slave rpl user rpl Source on localhost connected Destination on localhost connected Source on localhost connected Stopping slave Copying database test123 Copying TABLE test123 t1l Copying data for TABLE test123 t1l Connecting to the current server s mast
251. e Add new Diagram icon in the MySQL Model area to create EER diagrams When you add an EER diagram a new tab appears below the toolbar Use this tab to navigate to the newly created EER diagram For further discussion of EER Diagrams see Section 7 6 EER Diagram Editor 7 5 4 The Physical Schemata Panel The Physical Schemata panel of the MySQL Model page shows the active schemata and the objects that they contain Expand and contract the Physical Schemata section by double clicking the arrow on the left of the Physical Schemata title bar When the Physical Schemata section is expanded it displays all currently loaded schemata Each schema shows as a tab To select a specific schema click its tab When MySQL Workbench is first opened a default schema mydb is selected You can start working with this schema or you can load a new MySQL Workbench Models file mwb extensiona There are a variety of ways to add schema to the Physical Schemata panel You can open an MWB file reverse engineer a MySQL create script or if you are using a commercial version of MySQL Workbench you can reverse engineer a database by connecting to a MySQL server You can also add a new schema by clicking the button on the top right of the Physical Schemata panel To remove a schema click its tab and use the button found to the immediate left of the button To the left of these buttons are three buttons that control how database object icons are display
252. e Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help Task and Object Browser Status and System Variables MANAGEMENT 6 Server Status f Startup Shutdown Name Description Aborted_clients The number of connections aborted because Aborted_conneds The number of failed attempts to connect to Binlog_cache_disk_use The number of transactions that used a temp Search Results Binlog_cache_use The number of transactions that used the te Binlog Binlog_stmt_cache_disk_use Replication Binlog_stmt_cache_use Ndb Bytes_received 139129 The number of bytes received from all clients Server Bytes_sent 16256153 The number of bytes sent to all clients Merge Com_admin_commands 30 Count of admin commands Innodb Com_assign_to_keycache 0 Com_assign_to_keycache Other Com_alter_db 0 Count of ALTER DATABASE statements Data Export and Restore Com_alter_db_upgrade 0 Com_alter_db_upgrade Com_alter_event 0 Count for ALTER EVENT statements Com_alter_function 0 Count of ALTER FUNCTION statements Com_alter_procedure 0 Com_alter_procedure Com_alter_server 0 Com_alter_server Com_alter_table 0 Count of ALTER TABLE statements Com_alter_tablespace 0 Com_alter_tablespace 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n Status Variables System Variables Status and System Variables A Server Logs CONFIGURATION Options File SECURITY Users and Privileges DATA EXPORT RESTORE Com_analyze Count of ANALYZE statements Com_begin Count of BEGIN statements Com_binlog Com
253. e Layer Tool The layer tool is the rectangular icon with a capital L in the lower left corner Use the layer tool to organize the objects on an EER Diagram canvas It is useful for grouping similar objects For example you may use it to group all your views Click the layer tool and use it to draw a rectangle on the canvas Change to the standard mouse pointer tool and pick up any objects you would like to place on the newly created layer To change the size of a layer first select it by clicking it When a layer is selected small rectangles appear at each corner and in the middle of each side Adjust the size by dragging any of these rectangles You can also make changes to a layer by selecting the layer and changing properties in the Properties panel Using the Properties panel is the only way to change the name of a layer To activate the layer tool from the keyboard use the L key For more information about layers see Section 7 7 5 Creating Layers 7 6 1 5 The Text Tool The text tool is the square icon with a capital N in the top left corner Use this tool to place text objects on the EER diagram canvas Click the tool then click the desired location on the canvas After a text object has been dropped on the canvas the mouse pointer reverts to its default To add text to a text object right click the text object and choose Edit Note or Edit in New Window from the pop up menu You can manipulate the properties of a
254. e Type MySQL Type Comment INTERVAL TIME BYTEA LONGBLOB TEXT LONGTEXT CIDR VARCHAR 43 INET VARCHAR 43 MACADDR VARCHAR 17 UUID VARCHAR 36 XML LONGTEXT JSON LONGTEXT TSVECTOR LONGTEXT TSQUERY LONGTEXT ARRAY LONGTEXT POINT VARCHAR LINE VARCHAR LSEG VARCHAR BOX VARCHAR PATH VARCHAR POLYGON VARCHAR CIRCLE VARCHAR TXID_SNAPSHOT VARCHAR 10 6 MySQL migration Introduction Notes about copying MySQL and what you can do with it 10 7 Using the MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard Introduction and general usage notes 10 7 1 Connecting to the databases A connection is made to the source and target database servers Source Connection Setup The Source Connection offers the MySQL Microsoft SQL Server and Generic RDBMS database system options This selection determins the available Parameters and Advanced configuration options This connection definition may be saved using the Store connection for future use as option and there is also the Test Connection option Target Connection Setup The MySQL Server that will be home to the newly migrated database 210 Schemata Retrieval and Selection 10 7 2 Schemata Retrieval and Selection General thoughts Fetch Schemata List The names of available schemas will be retrieved from the source RDBMS The account used for the connection will need to have appropriate privileges for listing and reading the schemas you want to migrate Target RDBMS connection settings will a
255. e default pointer from the keyboard use the Esc key 7 6 1 2 The Hand Tool The hand tool is used to move the entire EER diagram Left click on this tool and then left click anywhere on the EER diagram canvas Moving the mouse while holding down the mouse button changes the view port of the canvas 83 The Vertical Toolbar To determine your position on the canvas look at the Model Navigator panel on the upper right If the Model Navigator panel is not open use View Windows Model Navigator to open it To activate the hand tool from the keyboard use the H key You can also change the view port of an EER diagram using the Model Navigator panel See Section 7 5 9 The Model Navigator Panel 7 6 1 3 The Eraser Tool Use the eraser tool to delete objects from the EER Diagram canvas Change the mouse pointer to the eraser tool then click the object you wish to delete Depending upon your settings the delete dialog box should open asking you to confirm the type of deletion deletion Before using the eraser tool be sure that you understand the available Note R The delete action of the eraser tool is controlled by the general option setting for options described in Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab To activate the eraser tool from the keyboard use the D key You can also delete an object by selecting it and pressing Control Delete or by right clicking it and choosing Delete from the pop up menu 7 6 1 4 Th
256. e e ee eee eae tetra eee ee ead eeee sees ee aaaaneneeeeeeeeeaea 3 3 1 Installing MySQL Workbench on Windows c cceeeeeeee eect eee eeeeeeeeeee esse aa eaneeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeenees 3 3 2 Launching MySQL Workbench on Windows ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee ee aa eee eeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeeeeaeaae 3 3 3 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Windows 00 ececeee ee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeees 3 3 4 Installing MySQL Workbench on Linux 00cecceeee cece eeeeee eect ee ee ee ae aa eeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeneeeeeeeeeaeaae 3 3 5 Launching MySQL Workbench on Linux cceeeeeceee cece ee ceeneeeeeeee tees aa aa eeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeees 3 3 6 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Linux 0 ceceeeee ee eeeeee eect ee ee ee ae aa eeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeeeeaeaaea 3 3 7 Installing MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X cceeceeeee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeees 10 3 3 8 Launching MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X o oo eeeee eee eceeeeeeee cece ee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 10 3 3 9 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X ccceceeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeenees 11 MySQL Workbench is available for the following platforms e Windows e Linux e Mac OS X Binary distributions of MySQL Workbench are available for the preceding platforms Source code distributions are also available as a tar gz package or an RPM package The following sections explain the instal
257. e is a schema so this difference in design must be planned for The Migration Wizard must know how to handle the migration of schemata for the source Microsoft SQL Server database It can either keep all of the schemata as they are the Migration Wizard will create one database per schema or merge them into a single MySQL database Additional configure options include either remove the schema names the Migration Wizard will handle the possible name collisions that may appear along the way and an option to add the schema name to the database object names as a prefix 10 4 Microsoft SQL Server migration Introduction The MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard is tested against the following Microsoft SQL Server versions 2000 2005 2008 and 2012 10 4 1 Preparations To be able to migrate from Microsoft SQL Server ensure the following e The source SQL Server instance is running and accepts TCP connections e You know the IP and port of the source SQL server instance If you will be migrating using a Microsoft ODBC driver for SQL Server the default in Windows you will need to know the host and the name of the SQL Server i nstance e Make sure that the SQL Server is reachable from where you will be running MySQL Workbench More specifically check the firewall settings e Make sure that the account you will use has proper privileges to the database that will be migrated 10 4 2 Drivers General thoughts on the topic
258. e logs and then press Next to continue 193 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 7 MySQL Workbench migration Reverse Engineer Source Migration Task List OVERVIEW overview SOURCE amp TARGET Source Selection Target Selection Fetch Schemata List Y Schemata Selection OBJECT MIGRATION Source Objects Migration Manual Editing Target Creation Options Create Schemata Create Target Results DATA MIGRATION Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer REPORT Migration Report Migration Wizard was started Reverse Engineer Source Selected schema metadata will now be fetched from the source RDBMS and reverse engineered so that its structure can be determined Connect to source DBMS Y Reverse engineer selected schemata Post processing of reverse engineered schemata Finished performing tasks Click Next gt to continue Message Log Reverse engineering 2 routines from HumanResources Reverse engineering procedure HumanResources uspUpdateEmployeePersonalinfo Reverse engineering procedure HumanResources uspUpdateEmployeeHireInfo Finished reverse engineering of procedures for the HumanResources schema Finished reverse engineering of functions for the HumanResources schema Reverse engineering of routines for schema HumanResources completed Reverse engineering 0 triggers from HumanResources Finished reverse engineering of triggers for the HumanResources schema Reve
259. e operations that can be time consuming to type and re type For these reasons and more the MySQL Utilities were created to help both beginners and experienced database administrators perform common tasks What are the internals of the MySQL Utilities MySQL Utilities are designed as a collection of easy to use Python scripts that can be combined to provide more powerful features Internally the scripts use the mysal utilities module library to perform its various tasks Since a library of common functions is available it is easy for a database administrator to create scripts for common tasks These utilities are located in the scripts folder of the installation or source tree If you have a task that is not met by these utilities or one that can be met by combining one or more of the utilities or even parts of the utilities you can easily form your own custom solution The following sections present an example of a custom utility discussing first the anatomy of a utility and then what the mysql utilities module library has available Anatomy of a MySQL Utility MySQL Utilities use a three tier module organization At the top is the command script which resides in the scripts folder of the installation or source tree Included in the script is a command module designed to encapsulate and isolate the bulk of the work performed by the utility The command module resides in the mysql utilities commanda folder of the source tree Command modules
260. e presented with the first page showing the available options 124 Forward Engineering Figure 7 31 Options Forward Engineer an ALTER Script F Options Forward Engineer ALTER Script Options Pick the SOL script file to be compared with the current model Input File Enter the path for the ALTER script to be created Dutput File Leave blank to view generated script but not save to a file This first page enables you to select an SQL script and compare it with the model currently in MySQL Workbench The difference between the two models will be used to create an alter script that can be used to modify the target schema to match the model held in MySQL Workbench To view the script generated rather than saving it to a file leave the Output File field empty schema_name table_name Otherwise MySQL Workbench cannot generate a Note E The script selected as the Input File must use full schema qualifiers such as useable alter script Clicking Next brings you to the Review SQL Script page 125 Forward Engineering Figure 7 32 Script Forward Engineer an ALTER Script pae Review Generated Script Review SQL Script SET OLD_UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_SQL_MODE SQL_MODE SQL_MODE TRADITIONAL CREATE TABLE IF NOT iii mydb table idtable3 INT 11 NOT NULI
261. e quoted e Copy Field Content unquoted Copies the value of the selected field to the clipboard Strings are not quoted Note that the insert editor features a toolbar This has the same functionality as explained in Section 6 7 4 2 Results Tabsheets and Section 6 7 4 3 Live Editing Tabsheets You can also hover the cursor over the toolbar to display tooltips Any rows you add will be inserted when you forward engineer the database if you choose the Generate INSERT statements for tables option Note R When entering string values that there is slightly different behavior between the 5 0 5 1 and 5 2 versions of MySQL Workbench For 5 0 and 5 1 if a string is entered without leading and trailing quotation marks the Inserts Editor adds quoting and escapes characters that require it However if quoted text is entered the Inserts Editor performs no further checks and assumes that a correctly escaped and quoted sequence has been entered 5 2 features a new Inserts Editor In this case the user enters the string without quoting or escaping and the Inserts Editor takes care of all quoting and escaping as required Note R It is possible to enter a function or other expression into a field Use the prefix func to prevent MySQL Workbench from escaping quotation marks For example for the expression md5 fred MySQL Workbench normally would generate the code md5 fred To prevent this enter the expression as
262. e start and end of a FOREIGN_KEYS section the FOREIGN_KEYS data dictionary becomes active in this section FK_ DELETE RULE Variable FOREIGN_KEYS The foreign key delete rule FK_UPDATE_RULE Variable FOREIGN_KEYS The foreign key update rule FK_MANDATORY Variable FOREIGN_KEYS Whether the foreign key is mandatory TABLE_COMMENT LISTING Section TABLES Marks the start and end of a TABLE_COMMENT_LISTING section the TABLE_COMMENT_LISTING data dictionary becomes active in this section TABLE_COMMENT Variable TABLE_COMMENT_LISTING The table comment DDL_LISTING Section TABLES Marks the start and end of a DDL_LISTING section the DDL_LISTING data dictionary becomes active in this section DDL_SCRIPT Variable DDL_LISTING Display the DDL script of the currently active entity for example SCHEMATA TABLES 7 12 2 Creating a Custom Template In the simplest case a template consists of two files a template file which has a tp1 extension and a special file info xml The info xml file has important metadata about the template A third file is optional which is the preview image file This preview file provides a thumbnail image illustrating the appearance of the generated report One of the easiest ways to create a custom template is to make a copy of any existing template 158 Creating a Custom Template For example the following procedure describes how to make a custom template based on the Text Basic template 1 N
263. e that will contain the newly migrated database The current Workbench MySQL connections will be available here or you can choose Manage DB Connections to create a new connection 190 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 4 MySQL Workbench migration Target selection Migration Task List Target Selection OVERVIEW Overview Target RDBMS Connection Parameters SOURCE amp TARGET Stored Connection MAMSEN Select from saved connection settings Y Source Selection Connection Method Standard TCP IP y Method to use to connect to the RDBMS Parameters Advanced Fetch Schemata List Schemata Selection localhost Name or IP address of the server host TCP IP port Reverse Engineer Source 2 root Name of the user to connect with OBJECT MIGRATION Source Objects Store in Vault Clear The user s password Will be requested later if it s not set Migration Manual Editing Target Creation Options Create Schemata Create Target Results The schema to use as default schema Leave blank to select it later DATA MIGRATION Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer REPORT Store connection for future usage as Migration Report Fetch Schemata List The Schemata list is retrieved from both the source and target RDBMS This is an automated and informational step that reports connection related errors and or general log information Press Next to continue
264. e with the default name tablel To revert to the default mouse pointer click the arrow icon at the top of the vertical toolbar Figure 7 8 A Table on an EER Diagram address v address _id SMALLINT S address VARCHAR SO address2 VARCHAR S0 district VARCHAR 20 city_id SMALLINT S postal_code VARCHAR 10 phone VARCHAR 20 last_update TIMESTAMP v PRIMARY idx_Fk_city_id As shown in the preceding diagram the primary key is indicated by a key icon and indexed fields are indicated by a different colored diamond icon Click the arrow to the right of the table name to toggle the display of the fields Toggle the display of indexes and triggers in the same way Right clicking a table opens a pop up menu with the following items e Cut table_name e Copy table_name e Edit Table e Edit in New Window e Copy SQL to Clipboard Copy Insert to Clipboard e Delete table_name With the exception of the deletion item these menu items function as described in Section 7 7 1 1 Adding Tables to the Physical Schemata The behavior of the delete option is determined by your MySQL Workbench options settings For more information see Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab 7 7 1 3 The MySQL Table Editor The MySQL Table Editor is a component that enables the creation and modification of tables You can add or modify a table s columns or indexes change the engine add foreign k
265. eaaeteeeeeees 188 10 2 2 Migrating from supported databases s ssssissiiseiisniieiinn inniinn keiina a ai 202 10 2 3 Migrating from unsupported generic databases ccceceeeeeee cece ae eeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeeeneeeeas 203 10 3 Conceptual DBMS equivalent sison inkon ee cece na aeaea aa aAA Ka EAA AEA aa 203 10 4 Microsoft SQL Server migration 0 cccceeeceeeeeee cece eee eeee ener ee ee ae aa ee eeeeeeeeeaeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeees 205 10 44 Preparations sonses keisinan kE ENEE ARAOR 205 104 2 DIVOS oera E E E AT 205 104 3 Connection Setup eruan eei en anaia a A EEKE EEE EAEE EKAA AG 207 10 4 4 Microsoft SQL Server Type Mapping cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeneeeeeeeeeaaa 207 10 5 PostgreSQL MIQKatin suis i noaaraa niia aan iaa a aa a a a aaa 208 1020 she PNG DALAUIONS kaa E 208 10 92 DVIS sposi dees aE seaies in ieek EE EAEE ina eey E ta rial ee nae ial AR 208 10 5 3 CONMECHION SOtup 2 cactee ieee siesvensetieestasenctceasneee tae a ler taneehebees eater E R ETRE 209 10 5 4 PostgreSQL Type Mapping 0 cccceeeceeeeneeeeeeee cece ae eaeaeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaceeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeaaa 209 10 6 MySQL migration issccakeh astiecdesexadencacetectasxicbanensiacecsauvarsienceccetsaieessbesiioecerdauvelabvasoendbvatvedaaraceeneres 210 10 7 Using the MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard 0 cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ae ea eeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaa 210 10 7 1 Connecting to the databases
266. easy to reuse code and does away with the need to retype it at the command line If you have opened script files each will have its own tab to the right of the Snippets tab These tabs will be labeled with the names of the script files or Unnamed for snippets without a name As with the Snippets tab you can cut and paste to or from any of the tabs This gives you the opportunity to test code from the command line Right clicking on a snippet opens a dialog with options to Execute Snippet Send to Script Editor or Copy To Clipboard While individual commands can be entered into the shell it is also possible to run a longer script stored in an external file using the main menu item Scripting Run Workbench Script File When scripts are run outside of the shell to see the output use the main menu item View Output It is also possible to run script files directly from the shell For details on running script files type run at the Workbench Scripting Shell prompt The following message is displayed 218 The Files Globals Classes and Modules Tabs Help Topics grt General information about the Workbench runtime scripting Practical information when working on scripts and modules for Workbench wbhdata Summary about Workbench model data organization modules Information about Workbench module usage plugins Information about writing Plugins and Modules for Workbench Type topic to get help on the topic Custom Pytho
267. ebar restrained css The CSS file used if the Restrained Colors style option was chosen table_details htm1 The main frame of the model report Choosing the HTML Basic Single Page option creates a style sheet and an index htmi file Choosing the HTML Detailed Frames option creates the following files basic css The style sheet for the overview html1 page This is used if the vibrant style is chosen coated css The CSS file used if the Coated style option was chosen index html The main page overview htm1 Overview information for the report such as report title project name and author overview_list html A summary of schema in the model along with a list of tables contained in each schema routine _details html List of all routines for the schema table_details html The main report details table_details_list html A Schema overview along with details of columns indexes and foreign keys for each schema table_element_details html The details for every element of the table top html1 The top frame of the report view_details html List of all columns and indexes for the schema Choosing the Text Basic option creates a directory containing one text file You can click index html to view a report The following screenshot shows the HTML Detailed Frames report being displayed 150 Customizing DBDoc Model Reporting Templates Figure 7 52 The DBDoc Model Report Model Report Mozilla Firefox File
268. ect ModuleInfo export grt INT grt STRING def checkString s For the export statement the return type is listed first followed by the input parameter types specified as GRT typenames The following typenames can be used e grt INT An integer value Also used for boolean values e grt DOUBLE A floating point numeric value e grt STRING UTF 8 or ASCII string data e grt DICcT A key value dictionary item Keys must be strings e grt LIST A list of other values It is possible to specify the type of the contents as a tuple inthe form grt LIST lt type or class gt For example grt LIST grt STRING for a list of strings For a list of table objects the following would be specified grt LIST grt classes db_table e grt OBJECT An instance of a GRT object or a GRT class object from grt classes Note that these types are defined in the grt module which must be imported before they can be used The following code snippet illustrates declaring a module that exports a single function from wb import TORE GE ModuleInfo DefineModule name MyModule author your name version 1 0 ModuleInfo export grt DOUBLE grt STRING grt LIST grt DOUBLE def printListSum message doubleList sum 0 for d in doublelList sum sum d print message sum return sum 11 3 Plugins Plugins are special Modules that are exposed to the user through the Workbench GUI This is typically done using the mai
269. ects on a diagram For the Import MySQL Table Objects section if you click the Show Filter button the following page is displayed 116 Reverse Engineering Figure 7 24 Show Filter Connection Options p Select Objects to Reverse Engineer Connect to DBMS Select Schemata Fetch Object Info Select Objects Import MySQL Table Objects Use the button to exclude objects matching wildcards such as and _ V Place imported objects on a diagram This page enables you to select specific tables for import Having selected the desired tables you can optionally hide the filter by clicking the Hide Filter button The other sections such as MySQL Routine Objects have similar filters available Click Execute to continue to the next page The wizard then imports objects displaying the tasks that have been carried out and whether the operation was successful If errors were generated you can click the Show Logs button to see the nature of the errors 117 Reverse Engineering Figure 7 25 Progress Connection Options y Ba Reverse Engineering Progress Connect to DBMS Select Schemata The following tasks will now be executed Please monitor the execution Press Show Logs to see the execution logs Fetch Object Info Reverse Engineer Selected Objects amp Place Objects on Diagram Select Objects Reverse Engineer Operation Completed Successfully Finished parsing MySQL SQL script Click
270. ed e The left button displays database objects as large icons e The middle button displays small icons in multiple rows e The right button displays small icons in a single list 77 The Schema Privileges Panel 7 5 4 1 The Schema Objects Panel The Physical Schemata panel has the following sections e Tables e Views e Routines e Routine Groups Each section contains the specified database objects and an icon used for creating additional objects Any database objects added to an EER diagram canvas also show up in the Physical Schemata section For information about adding objects to an EER diagram canvas see Section 7 6 EER Diagram Editor 7 5 5 The Schema Privileges Panel The Schema Privileges panel has the following sections used to create users for your schemata and to define roles Users e Roles The following image displays the Schema Privileges section of the MySQL Model tab Figure 7 4 Roles and Privileges Y Schema Privileges Users 2 items a Add User paul stefan Roles 2 ite Add Role admin docs 7 5 5 1 Adding Roles To add a role double click the Add Role icon This creates a role with the default name role Right clicking a role opens a pop up menu with the following items e Cut role_name Cuts the role Copy role_name Copies the role e Edit Role Opens the role editor e Edit in New Window Opens the role editor in a new editor window e Delete ro
271. ed This might take a few moments depending on your network connection Connect to host machine Check location of start stop commands amp Check MySQL configuration file ws Management Test Settings Testing host machine settings is done Check that everything is in order then click Next 10 You now have a chance to review the configuration settings so far The information displayed varies slightly depending on platform connection method and installation type 21 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 9 Getting Started Tutorial Review Settings Create New Server Instance Profile st Machine E Review Server Instance Settings Test DB Connection Below is a list of all settings collected so far This includes also values taken From templates or default values Check if they match your actual settings and toggle Change Parameters if you need to make any changes to default values For any other change go back to the appropriate wizard page Pay special attention if you run more than one instance of MySQL on the same machine Windows Management Native Windows Adminstration enabled Windows host localhost settings MySQL service name MySQL55 Review Settings MySQL Configuration MySQL Version 5 5 16 Settings Template Path to Configuration File C Documents and Settings All Users Application Data MySQL MySQL Server 5 5 my ini Instance Name in Configuration File mysqld C Change Paramete
272. ed manually 6 6 2 Standard TCP IP Connection This connection method enables MySQL Workbench to connect to MySQL Server using TCP IP Parameters tab Hostname The host name or IP address of the MySQL server Username User name to use for the connection Password Optional password for the account used If you enter no password here you will be prompted to enter the password when MySQL Workbench attempts to establish the connection MySQL Workbench can store the password in a vault see Section 6 6 1 The Password Storage Vault Port The TCP IP port on which the MySQL server is listening the default is 3306 Default Schema When the connection to the server is established this is the schema that will be used by default It becomes the default schema for use in other parts of MySQL Workbench Advanced tab More parameters can be set for the connection by using the Advanced tab Figure 6 2 Manage DB Connections Advanced Tab Im Manage DB Connections E EE IE Ea E O o Stored Connections Connection Name Big Iron Server Type a name for the connection kaci instance MSNS Connection Method Standard TCP IP v Method to use to connect to the RDBMS Big Iron Server z localhost Parameters Advanced Z Use compression protocol Select this option for WAN connections _ Use ANSI quotes to quote identifiers If enabled this option overwrites the serverside sett
273. editor functions in exactly the same way as the Privileges tab of the table editor For more information see Section 7 7 1 3 9 The Privileges Tab Note E Privileges are available only in the Standard Edition of MySQL Workbench 7 7 4 2 Routine Groups 7 7 4 2 1 Adding Routine Groups to the Physical Schemata Double clicking the Add Routine Group icon in the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page adds a routine group with the default name of rout ines1 If a routine group with this name already exists the new routine group is named routines2 Adding a new routine group automatically opens the routine groups editor docked at the bottom of the application For information about using the routine groups editor see Section 7 7 4 2 3 The Routine Group Editor Right clicking a routine group opens a pop up menu with the following items e Rename e Cut routine_group_name e Copy routine_group_name e Edit Routine e Edit in New Window Copy SQL to Clipboard e Delete rout ine_group_name The Edit Routine Group item opens the routine group editor which is described in Section 7 7 4 2 3 The Routine Group Editor The cut and paste items are useful for copying routine groups between different schemata Deleting a routine group from the MySQL Model page removes the group but does not remove any routines contained in that group 105 Creating Routines and Routine Groups 7 7 4 2 2
274. eeeeeeeeeaeaaeateeeeeeeeeaeaaeaees 37 5 4 Workbench Preferences ccccceceee cece ce eee cece ee ee ee cece eee ee sae eeaeeeeaaeeeaaeeesaaeeaeeeesaaeesaeeesaeeeeseeeeaas 37 SAT fhe General TaD iania ie EA Waaa eae N eeeten Waaad tae eee eed Maca ees 39 5 4 2 The Administrator Tab cccccccceceee cece aa anaa aa e a ee saa essa EaR A daar Nadaan aa eaP tR 39 5 4 3 The SQL Edit r TaD nerie RE E A eee ee 39 54 4 The Model Tab eaei aan aiden ita aeiia dea it aerial ES 41 54 5 The MySQL Tabni nice oaee a aA a Reins a A a TAE ed en eet a a 42 SAG Fhe Diagram Tab re yeaa kae eile Ne us aAa REAA said hc saab cnet ETA EnaA Daraa ka a 42 54 7 The Appearance Tab soriire eater diN EIEE AARRE EEEE ANEREN YAE AEE 43 When MySQL Workbench first starts it presents the Home window which has two main sections e Workbench Central e Workspace displays the MySQL Model workspace rather than the Home window Note that 5 1 Note E MySQL Workbench 5 2 introduced the Home window MySQL Workbench 5 1 does not support the SQL Editor and Server Administration functionality of 5 2 The two sections can be seen in the following screenshot For more information see the following sections 35 Workbench Central Figure 5 1 The Home Window K C MySQL Workbench Da rere rarer or File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help Workbench Central cree DO NOO ia What s New in This Release ii Ww Workben
275. eeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeneeeeeeees 7 3 3 2 Launching MySQL Workbench on Windows cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeteeeeeeeeeaeaaea 7 3 3 3 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Windows ccceeeeeeeeeeeeee ee aeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeateneeees 8 3 3 4 Installing MySQL Workbench on LinuX 0 0 02 ccceceeeee cece cece teeter teen ee aaeateeeeeeeeeaeaaeaenees 9 3 3 5 Launching MySQL Workbench on LINUX ccceceeeee cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeeeeeeaeaaea 9 3 3 6 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Linux ssssssssssssssssrrsrssssssrsrrirrresssrtrrrrnrsrssssrrrrnnns 9 3 3 7 Installing MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X assesessessrrirsrerssssrrirrrsrssssrrrrrrersssennns 10 3 3 8 Launching MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X ccceceeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaea 10 3 3 9 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X 0 eeeeecceceeceeeeeeeeeee ee ce aaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeees 11 4 Getting Started Tutorial c cece cece eee e ee ee ce ae eee e ee ee ea AREE A T a A ERA ATEREA 13 4 1 Administering a MySQL Server cececcccceeeeeeeeeeeee ee ae ee eeeeeeee ee ee aa eadeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeees 13 4 2 Creating a MOdel icc fcs dame Vel aa es ee ae ad ene ati adie 25 4 3 Adding Data to Your Database 0 ieee cece een eter cena terete ante eres aaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaeeeesaaeeeeeeaaieeees 31 De ME THOME WING OW miros eens sda ETE vie ee sue cutis Pateena E gt sask cnt eden Debate oe
276. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 280 13 3 12 mysqlprocgrep Search Server Process Lists cccccecccseeceseeeeeesceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 283 13 3 13 mysqlreplicate Set Up and Start Replication Between Two Servers 0066 286 13 3 14 mysqlrpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication eceeeeeeeeeee 290 13 3 15 mysqirplcheck Check Replication Prerequisites ccccseececeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeees 297 13 3 16 mysqlrplshow Show Slaves for Master Server cccccccceeeceeseceeeeceseeceeseeeseeeeeaes 300 13 3 17 mysqlserverclone Clone Existing Server to Create New Server 00ceeeeeees 303 13 3 18 mysqlserverinfo Display Common Diagnostic Information from a Server 305 13 3 19 mysqluc Command line client for running MySQL Utilities 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeees 307 13 3 20 mysqluserclone Clone Existing User to Create New USE ccccesseeeeeeaeeeees 310 Parsers aoon n euweedtessnased ecm aeavendcasicaancas E 312 13 4 1 mysql utilities parser Parse MySQL Log Files cccccseccececeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaenees 312 This chapter describes the MySQL Utilities for MySQL Workbench a set of Python tools for working with MySQL Server 13 1 Introduction 13 1 1 Introduction to MySQL Utilities What are the MySQL Utilities It is a package of utilities that are used for maintenance and administration of MySQL servers These utilities e
277. eering to a Live Server Synchronize with Any Source Allows you to compare a target database or script with the open model external script or a second database and apply these changes back to the target Synchronize Model Synchronizes your database model with an existing database For more information see Section 7 7 10 3 Database Synchronization 74 Modeling Menus Generate Catalog Diff Report Compares your schema model with a live database or a script file Section 7 7 10 4 Creating a Catalog Diff Report 7 5 1 7 The Plugins Menu The Plugins menu lists any plugins that you may have installed For more information about this menu see Section 11 3 Plugins 7 5 1 8 The Scripting Menu The Scripting menu has these items Scripting Shell Launches the MySQL Workbench Scripting Shell New Script Opens a New Script File dialogue with options to create a Python Script Lua Script Python Plugin or Python Module Open Script Opens a Open GRT Script dialogue which defaults to the Workbench scripts directory Files are opened into the Workbench Scripting Shell window Run Workbench Script File Executes the specified script Install Plugin Module File Loads and installs a plugin or module file Plugin Manager Displays information about the plugins that are are installed and allows disabling and uninstalling the plugins 7 5 1 9 The Community Menu The Community menu has the following ite
278. eld Drop the count ry table onto the canvas and immediately you should see the relationship between the count ry table and the city table To view all the relationships in the sakila database see Figure 7 50 The sakila Database EER Diagram Click the Properties tab of the panel on the lower right then click one of the tables on the canvas This displays the properties of the table in the Properties window While a table is selected you can use the Properties window to change a table s properties For example entering FF0000 for the color value will change the color accent to red Changing the color of a table is a good way to identify a table quickly something that becomes more important as the number of tables increases Changing the color of a table is also an easy way to identify a table in the Model Navigator panel This panel the uppermost panel on the left side of the page gives a bird s eye view of the entire EER canvas Save your changes to a MySQL Workbench Models file mwb extension by choosing Save from the Eile menu or by using the keyboard command Control S 7 8 2 Using the Default Schema When you first open MySQL Workbench a default schema mydb appears as the leftmost tab of the Physical Schemata section of MySQL Workbench You can begin designing a database by using this default schema Figure 7 48 The Default Schema Y Physical Schemata C mydb Tables a Add Table To change the name of the def
279. emove a table from the database There will be no confirmation dialog box Any tables added to the Physical Schemata section also show up in the Catalog palette on the right side of the application They may be added to an EER Diagram by dragging and dropping them from this palette 7 7 1 2 Adding Tables to an EER Diagram Tables can also be added to an EER Diagram using the table tool on the vertical toolbar Make sure that the EER Diagram tab is selected then right click the table icon on the vertical toolbar The table icon is the rectangular tabular icon Clicking the mouse on this icon changes the mouse pointer to a table pointer You can also change the mouse pointer to a table pointer by pressing the T key 86 Creating Tables Choosing the table tool changes the contents of the toolbar that appears immediately below the menu bar When the Tables pointer is active this toolbar contains a schemata list an engines list a collations list and a color chart list Use these lists to select the appropriate schema engine collation and color accent for the new table Make sure that you associate the new table with a database The engine and collation of a table can be changed using the table editor The color of your table can be changed using the Properties palette The Default Engine and Default Collation values refer to the database defaults Create a table by clicking anywhere on the EER Diagram canvas This creates a new tabl
280. ense as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin Street Fifth Floor Boston MA CZEK ESO USA 329 HtmlRenderer System Drawing Html Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your SCHOO Eeanivz uuOmslGnmans G Opyiclgqhtaicis clas mers O e Doene amet necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker signature of Ty Cooney lL April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice Able er Eula eloaSinsy alfey eOr akie A 13 HtmlRenderer System Drawing Html The following software may be included in this product HtmlRenderer System Drawing Htm1 Copyright c 2009 Jos Manuel Men ndez Poo All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that t
281. ent is not altered or edited in any way You shall not publish or distribute this documentation in any form or on any media except if you distribute the documentation in a manner similar to how Oracle disseminates it that is electronically for download on a Web site with the software or on a CD ROM or similar medium provided however that the documentation is disseminated together with the software on the same medium Any other use such as any dissemination of printed copies or use of this documentation in whole or in part in another publication requires the prior written consent from an authorized representative of Oracle Oracle and or its affiliates reserve any and all rights to this documentation not expressly granted above For more information on the terms of this license or for details on how the MySQL documentation is built and produced please visit MySQL Contact amp Questions For help with using MySQL please visit either the MySQL Forums or MySQL Mailing Lists where you can discuss your issues with other MySQL users For additional documentation on MySQL products including translations of the documentation into other languages and downloadable versions in variety of formats including HTML and PDF formats see the MySQL Documentation Library Chapter 1 MySQL Workbench Introduction MySQL Workbench provides a graphical tool for working with MySQL Servers and databases MySQL Workbench fully supports MySQL Server versio
282. enter a name optional and click OK The snippet can be inserted into the SQL Query panel at any time by double clicking the snippet in the SQL Snippets panel 53 Main Tabsheets Figure 6 7 SQL Editor SQL Query Panel J movies G ulivracs ogM sam 1 e SELECT name code FROM Country 100 32 1 Filter Q a Export Sg name code Aruba ABW Afghanistan AFG Angola AGO Anguilla AIA Albania ALB Andorra AND Netherlands A ANT United Arab E ARE Argentina ARG Armenia ARM Country 4 Read Only Executing a SELECT query will display the associated result set in the SQL View panel directly below the SQL Query panel These cells are editable if MySQL Workbench is able to determine how as for example they are editable if a Primary or Unique key exists within the result set If not MySQL Workbench will display a read only icon at the bottom right corner of the SQL View panel and hovering the mouse cursor over this icon will provide a hint as to why it s not editable Note R To quickly enter the name of a table view or column double click the item in the Schemata Palette The item name will be inserted into the SQL Query panel 6 7 4 Main Tabsheets The main tabsheets area contains several tabs Output and History Tabsheet e Results Tabsheets e Live Editing Tabsheet Figure 6 8 SQL Editor Main Tabsheets Overview Output History Snippets Result 1 54 Main Tabsheets The following
283. eport should be written to If the report uses multiple files e g HTML the path will be created as a folder otherwise as a file The following variables will be substituted Linux Mac desktopfolder documentsfolder Zdate Ztime Zyear month monthname day Content Output Table Columns Output Table Indices Output Foreign Keys Output References from Foreign Keys Cancel Generate 148 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version You can choose from four available templates HTML Basic Frames Model documentation in HTML format that makes use of frames HTML Basic Single Page Single Page HTML documentation not using frames HTML Detailed Frames Detailed HTML documentation using frames Text Basic Text file documentation When you click a template a preview image displays on the right side of the page For the HTML Basic Frames template you can select either the Colorful orthe Restrained Colors option from the Style list The HTML Basic Single Page template offers only the Colorful style The HTML Detailed Frames template offers the Vibrant style and also the more subdued Coated style The Text Basic template offers only the Fixed Size Font style From the Base Options frame choose the report title and the output directory for the report files As of MySQL Workbench 5 1 17 it is possible to specify variables in the output path The user s home directory Av
284. er Starting slave done 13 3 5 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database This utility exports metadata object definitions or data or both from one or more databases By default the export includes only definitions mysqldbexport differs from mysqldump in that it can produce output in a variety of formats to make your data extraction transport much easier It permits you to export your data in the format most suitable to an external tool another MySQL server or other use without the need to reformat the data To exclude specific objects by name use the exclude 255 option with a name in db obj format or you can supply a search pattern For example exclude db1 trig1 255 excludes the single trigger and exclude t rig_ 255 excludes all objects from all databases having a name that begins with trig and has a following character To skip objects by type use the skip 257 option with a list of the objects to skip This enables you to extract a particular set of objects say for exporting only events by excluding all other types Similarly to skip creation of UPDATE statements for BLOB data specify the skip blobs 257 option 253 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database To specify how to display output use one of the following values with the format 256 option sql default Display output using SQL statements For definitions this consi
285. es Role Yes Yes Yes N A Roles are not available in MySQL at the database level Schema Yes Yes Yes Yes Equivalent to database in MySQL Sybase ASE Schemata corresponds to user names Sequences Yes Yes Yes Yes Standalone sequence objects are not supported in MySQL Similar functionality can be obtained with IDENTITY columns in MSSQL and AUTO_INCREMENT columns in MySQL SQL Modes Yes Yes Yes SET_ANSIL in MSSQL Storage Engines N A N A Yes Yes PostgreSQL itself supports and uses only one storage engine Postgresql Other companies have added extra storage engines to PostgreSQL Stored Procedures Yes Yes Yes Yes Synonyms N A N A N A N A Table Yes Yes Yes Yes Tablespace Yes Yes Yes N A MSSQL groups tables in schemata unless referring to CREATE 204 Microsoft SQL Server migration Concept MS SQL Sybase PostgreSQ lySQL_ Note Server ASE TABLESPACE Sybase ASE tables are grouped in schemata which are more like user names Temporary Tables Yes Yes Yes Yes Transactions Yes Yes Yes Yes Triggers Yes Yes Yes Yes UDFs Yes Yes Yes Yes Unicode Yes Yes Yes Yes Unique Key Yes Yes Yes Yes User Yes Yes Yes Yes Views Yes Yes Yes Yes E Handling Microsoft SQL Server and MySQL structural differences A Microsoft SQL Server database is made up of one catalog and one or more schemata MySQL only supports one schema for each database or rather a MySQL databas
286. es and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Secret Labs AB or the author not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission SECRET LABS AB AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL SECRET LABS AB OR THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE test_epoll The test_epoll contains the following notice Copyright c 2001 2006 Twisted Matrix Laboratories Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS I
287. es are kept The default is seven 7 days Older entries are automatically deleted from the log file but only if the log 273 option is specified The format of the log file includes the date and time of the event the level of the event informational INFO warning WARN error ERROR critical failure CRITICAL and the message reported by the utility The interface provides the user with a number of options for displaying additional information The user can choose to see the replication health report default or choose to see the list of GTIDs in use the UUIDs in use and if logging is enabled the contents of the log file Each of these reports is described below health Display the replication health of the topology This report is the default view for the interface By default this includes the host name port role MASTER or SLAVE of the server state of the server UP is connected WARN not connected but can ping DOWN not connected and cannot ping the GTID_MODE and health state The master health state is based on the following if GTID_MODE ON the server must have binary log enabled and there must exist a user with the REPLICATE SLAVE privilege The slave health state is based on the following the IO_THREAD and SQL_THREADS must be running it must be connected to the master there are no errors the slave delay for non gtid enabled scenarios is not more than the threshold provided by the max position 2
288. es to specify multiple exclusions By default patterns use LIKE matching With the regexp 256 option patterns use REGEXP matching 255 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database This option does not apply to grants export lt export gt e lt export gt Specify the export format Permitted format values are definitions export only the definitions metadata for the objects in the database list data export only the table data for the tables in the database list and both export the definitions and the data The default is definitions file per table Write table data to separate files This is Valid only if the export output includes data that is if export data 256 or export both 256 are given This option produces files named db_name tb _name format For example a csv export of two tables named t 1 and t2 in database di results in files named db1 t1 csv and db1 t2 csv If table definitions are included in the export they are written to stdout as usual format lt format gt f lt format gt Specify the output display format Permitted format values are sql grid tab csv and vertical The default is sql locking lt locking gt Choose the lock type for the operation Permitted lock values are no locks do not use any table locks lock all use table locks but no transaction and no consistent read and snapshot consistent read using a single transaction T
289. ess Show Logs to see the execution logs Fetch Object Info ia Pees Reverse Engineer Selected Objects Select Objects Place Objects on Diagram Reverse Engineer Operation Completed Successfully Finished parsing MySQL SQL script Message Log Started parsing MySQL SOL script Created MySQL Schema world Created MySQL Table world city Created MySQL Table world country Created MySQL Table world countrylanguage Created MySQL View world cityview Created MySQL Routine world FinGreeting Created MySQL Routine world country_hos Created MySQL Routine world world_tecord_count Finished parsing MySQL SOL script Totally processed statements successful 8 errors 0 warnings 0 If you wish to import an object with the same name as an existing object rename the existing object before reverse engineering If you import objects from more than one schema there will be a tab in the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page for each schema imported You cannot reverse engineer a live database that has the same name as an existing schema If you wish to do this first rename the existing schema 7 7 10 Forward Engineering It is possible to forward engineer a database using an SQL script or by connecting to a live database 120 Forward Engineering 7 7 10 1 Forward Engineering Using an SQL Script To create a script of your database model choose the Export item from the File menu You may export
290. et Results Output Mes DATA MIGRATION Data Transfer Setup Bulk Data Transfer Migration Report Migration Wizard was started Data Transfer Setup The next steps involve transferring data from the source RDBMS to the target MySQL database The setup screen includes the following options Data Copy e Online copy of table data to target RDBMS This default will copy the data to the target RDBMS e Create a batch file to copy the data at another time The data may also be dumped to a file that can be executed at a later time or be used as a backup Options 199 A visual guide to performing a database migration e Truncate target tables before copying data In case the target database already exists this will delete said data e Worker tasks The default value is 2 This is the number of tasks database connections used while copying the data Enable debug output for table copy Shows debugging information Figure 10 15 MySQL Workbench migration Data Transfer Setup a File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Data Transfer Setup OVERVIEW Overview Select options for the copy of the migrated schema tables in the target MySQL server and dick Next gt to execute SOURCE amp TARGET Source Selection V Target Selection T Online copy of table data to target RDBMS Data Copy Fetch Schemata List Y Schemata Selection Y Reverse Engineer Source Cre
291. etain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Floating point exception control 4 Copyright c 1996 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose w
292. eys or alter the table s name The MySQL Table Editor can be accessed in several ways and most commonly by right clicking on a table name within the Object Viewer and choosing ALTER TABLE This will open a new tab within the 87 Creating Tables main SQL Editor window You can also access the MySQL Table Editor from an EER Diagram by double clicking a table object 7 7 1 3 1 The Main Editor Window Any number of tables may be edited in the MySQL Table Editor at any one time Adding another table creates a new tab at the top of the editor By default the MySQL Table Editor appears docked at the top of the table editor tab within the SQL editor The MySQL Table Editor is shown on top of the following figure Figure 7 9 The Table Editor SR 5 3 S 4 gt g SECRE gasaz SMALUNTTS TINYINT 3 VAROMAR 45 VARCHAR 45 VARCHAR SO lt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt a Action Output Tere Acton Ovation Fetch 1 15 61 54 SELECT FROM saiia actor LUMIT 0 1000 0 000 sec 0 000 sec 2 154521 SELECT FROM sakda customer LIMIT 0 1000 0 000 sec 0 000 sec The MySQL Table Editor provides a work space that has tabs used to perform these actions e Columns Add or modify columns Indexes Add or modify indexes e Foreign Keys Add or modify foreign keys Triggers Add or modify triggers e Partitioning Manage partitioning Options Add or modify
293. file gt Options force sw render Force Xlib rendering force opengl render Force OpenGL rendering ne I Show command line options and exit 3 3 6 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Linux The procedure for uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Linux depends on the package you are using Uninstalling DEB packages Installing MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X To uninstall a Debian package use this command shell gt sudo dpkg r mysql workbench oss This command does not remove the configuration files If you wish to also remove the configuration files use this command shell gt sudo dpkg purge mysql workbench oss Uninstalling RPM packages To uninstall an RPM package use this command shell gt sudo rpm e mysql workbench oss This command does not remove the configuration files 3 3 7 Installing MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X MySQL Workbench for Mac OS X is distributed as a DMG file The file is named mysql workbench oss version osx10 5 i1686 dmg where version is the MySQL Workbench version To install MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X download the file Double click the downloaded file You will be presented with the installation window Figure 3 1 MySQL Workbench Mac OS X Installation Window AAA MySQL Workbench 0 x 2 items 5 6 MB available N mysa Workbench Visual Database Design For Professionals ia EE A A MySQLWorkbench Applications To install the applications drag the MySQL Workbench
294. func md5 fred to ensure that the quoting is not escaped 7 7 1 3 9 The Privileges Tab Use the Privileges tab to assign specific roles and privileges to a table You may also assign privileges to a role using the role editor For a discussion of this topic see Section 7 5 5 1 Adding Roles When this tab is first opened all roles that have been created are displayed in the list on the right Move the roles you wish to associate with this table to the Roles list on the left Do this by selecting a role and then clicking the lt button Use the Shift key to select multiple contiguous roles and the Control key to select noncontiguous roles To assign privileges to a role click the role in the Roles list This displays all available privileges in the Assigned Privileges list The privileges that display are ALL CREATE DROP GRANT OPTION REFERENCES ALTER 97 Creating Foreign Key Relationships DELETE INDEX INSERT e SELECT e UPDATE TRIGGER You can choose to assign all privileges to a specific user or any other privilege as listed previously Privileges irrelevant to a specific table such as the FILE privilege are not shown If a role has already been granted privileges on a specific table those privileges show as already checked in the Assigned Privileges list 7 7 2 Creating Foreign Key Relationships Foreign key constraints are supported for the InnoDB stora
295. g Progress Select Objects Review SQL Script The following tasks will now be executed Please monitor the execution Press Show Logs to see the execution logs Connection Options Connect to DBMS Execute Forward Engineered Script Commit Progress Forward Engineer Finished Successfully You can confirm that the script created the schema by connecting to the target MySQL server and issuing a SHOW DATABASES statement 7 7 10 3 Database Synchronization It is possible to synchronize a model in MySQL Workbench with a live database By default the synchronization process will change the live database to be the same as the model but this is configurable during the synchronization process MySQL Workbench enables control over the direction of synchronization and which objects to synchronize in a completely flexible way You can choose to synchronize only certain tables enable synchronization to the live database only enable synchronization from the live database to the model only or a combination of directions In effect you have complete control as to whether the synchronization is unidirectional or bidirectional and which objects exactly are subject to synchronization This is all controlled in the Select Changes to Apply page of the synchronization wizard 132 Forward Engineering Figure 7 39 Model and Database Differences Synchronize Model with Database Connection Opti een Model and Database Differences Dou
296. g on the same machine as this application select localhost Otherwise please specify the TCP IP address or the network name of the remote machine You may also pick an existing database connection localhost Remote Host Address Either IP Address or Hostname Take Parameters from Existing Database Connection Local instance MySQL55 User root Host localhost 3306 4 Next you will set up a connection or select an existing connection to use to connect to the server Assuming that you have not already created a connection you can use the default values here although if your MySQL Server has a password set for the root account you can enter it here by clicking Store in Vault This enables you to connect to the server without needing to enter a password each time It is also possible to use a different account to connect to the server by setting the user name and password here if required 15 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 3 Getting Started Tutorial Database Connection Create New Server Instance Profile Set the Database Connection values Database Connection Connection Name localhost Type a name for the connection Connection Method Standard TCP IP Method to use to connect to the RDBMS Parameters Advanced Hostname localhost Port 3306 Name or IP address of the server host TCP I Username root Name of the user to connect with Password S
297. ge and exit e all a Display all disk usage This includes usage for databases logs and InnoDB tablespaces e binlog b 268 mysqldiskusage Show Database Disk Usage NOTES Display binary log usage empty m Include empty databases format lt format gt f lt format gt Specify the output display format Permitted format values are grid csv tab and vertical The default is grid innodb i Display InnoDB tablespace usage This includes information about the shared InnoDB tablespace as well as idb files for InnoDB tables with their own tablespace logs l Display general query log error log and slow query log usage no headers h Do not display column headers This option applies only for csv and tab output quiet q Suppress informational messages relaylog r Display relay log usage server lt server gt Connection information for the server in lt users lt passwa gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit For the format 269 option the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 269 specifies the grid fo
298. ge engine only For other storage engines the foreign key syntax is correctly parsed but not implemented For more information see Foreign Key Differences Using MySQL Workbench you may add a foreign key from within the table editor or by using the relationship tools on the vertical toolbar of an EER Diagram This section deals with adding a foreign key using the foreign key tools To add a foreign key using the table editor see Section 7 7 1 3 4 The Foreign Keys Tab The graphical tools for adding foreign keys are most effective when you are building tables from the ground up If you have imported a database using an SQL script and need not add columns to your tables you may find it more effective to define foreign keys using the table editor 7 7 2 1 Adding Foreign Key Relationships Using an EER Diagram The vertical toolbar on the left side of an EER Diagram has six foreign key tools one to one non identifying relationship one to many non identifying relationship one to one identifying relationship one to many identifying relationship many to many identifying relationship Place a Relationship Using Existing Columns An identifying relationship is one where the child table cannot be uniquely identified without its parent Typically this occurs where an intermediary table is created to resolve a many to many relationship In such cases the primary key is usually a composite key made up of the primary keys
299. gins for printing purposes The printing options are enabled only if the EER Diagrams tab is selected You have the choice of printing your model directly to your printer printing it as a PDF file or creating a PostScript file For more information see Section 7 9 Printing Note E The printing options are available only in commercial versions of MySQL Workbench Use the Document Properties menu item to set the following properties of your project Name The model name default is MySQL Model Version The project version number e Author The project author Project The project name Created Not editable determined by the MWB file attributes Last Changed Not editable determined by the MWB file attributes Description A description of your project 7 5 1 2 The Edit Menu Use the Edit menu to make changes to objects The text description for several of the menu items changes to reflect the name of the currently selected object This menu has items for cutting copying and pasting These actions can also be performed using the Control X Control C and Control V key combinations Undo a deletion using the Undo Delete object_name item The Control Z key combination can also be used to undo an operation It is also possible to carry out a Redo operation using either the menu item or the key combination Control Y Also find a Delete ob ject_name menu item for removing the currently selected object The keybo
300. gt lt value gt lt value type string key mainFileName gt report txt lt value gt lt value gt lt data gt The file defines wwo objects the TemplateInfo object and the TemplateStyleInfo object These objects contain information about the template that will be displayed in the DBDoc Model Reporting wizard main page Change the object GUIDs that are used in the file In this example there are two that need replacing id BD6879ED 814C 4CA3 A8 69 98 64F83B88DF id 7550655C CD4B 4EB1 8FAB AAEE4 9B2261E Generate two new GUIDS This can be done using any suitable command line tool There are also free online tools that can be used to generate GUIDs Another way to generate GUIDs is by using the MySQL uuID function mysql gt SELECT UUID 255 5555555555555 55 55 5555 UUID 5555 55 5 648 4240 7d7a 1le0 870b 89c43de3bd0a 5 55 55 Once you have the new GUID values edit the info xm1 file accordingly 159 Creating a Custom Template 5 6 Edit the textual information for the TemplateInfo and TemplateStyleInfo objects to reflect the purpose of the custom template The modified file will now look something like the following lt xml version 1 0 gt lt data gt lt value type object struct name workbench model reporting TemplateInfo id cac9ba3f ee2Za 49f0 b5f6 32580fab1640 struct checksum 0xb46b524d
301. gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format e master info file lt file gt The name of the master information file on the slave The default is master info read from the data directory Note This option requires that you run the utility on the slave and that you have appropriate read access for the file e quiet q Turn off all messages for quiet execution Note Errors and warnings are not suppressed e show slave status s Display the values from SHOW SLAVE STATUS on the master e slave lt source gt Connection information for the slave server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format e suppress Suppress warning messages e verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit e width lt number gt Change the display width of the test report The default is 75 characters The login user must have the appropriate permissions to execute SHOW SLAVE STATUS SHOW MASTER STATUS and SHOW VARIABLES on the appropriate servers EXAMPLES To check the prerequisites of a master and slave that currently are actively performing replication use the following command mysqlrplcheck master root host1 3310 slave root host2 3311 master on hostl connected
302. gt lt value type string key description gt Custom basic TEXT report listing schemata and objects lt value gt lt value type String key name gt Custom Basic text report lt value gt lt value type list content type object content struct name workbench model reporting TemplateStyleInfo key styles gt lt value type object struct name workbench model reporting TemplateStyleInfo id 39e3b767 a832 4016 8753 b4cb93aa2dd6 struct checksum 0xab08451b gt lt value type string key description gt Designed to be viewed with a fixed sized font lt value gt lt value type string key name gt Fixed Size Font lt value gt lt value type string key previewImageFileName gt preview_basic png lt value gt lt value type String key styleTagValue gt fixed lt value gt lt value gt lt value gt lt value type String key mainFileName gt custom_report txt lt value gt lt value gt lt data gt Create the new template file This too may best be achieved depending on your requirements by editing an existing template In this example the template file report t xt tp1 is shown here Total number of Schemata SCHEMA_COUNT SCHEMATA SCHEMA_NR Schema SCHEMA_NAME Tables TABLE_COUNT TABLES TABLE_NR_FMT Table TABLE_NAME COLUMNS_LISTING Columns Key Column Name Datatype Not Null Default Comment COLUMNS COLUMN_KEY
303. h any string containing the word kindahl Match any string consisting of one or more characters POSIX Regular Expressions POSIX regular expressions are more powerful than the simple patterns defined in the SQL standard A regular expression is a string of characters optionally containing characters with special meaning Match any character e A Match the beginning of a string Match the end of a string axy Match a x or y a f Match any character in the range a to f that is a b c d e or f axy Match any character excepta x or y a Match a sequence of zero or more a a Match a sequence of one or more a a Match zero or one a ab cd Match ab or cd a 5 Match five instances of a 281 mysqimetagrep Search Database Object Definitions a 2 5 Match from two to five instances of a abc Match one or more repetitions of abc This is but a brief set of examples of regular expressions The full syntax is described in the MySQL manual but can often be found in regex 7 OPTIONS mysqimetagrep accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit body b Search the body of stored programs procedures functions triggers and events The default is to match only the name database lt pattern gt Look only in databases matching this pattern format lt format gt f lt format gt Specify the output displa
304. hat uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library 324 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to e
305. he MySQL Utilities library These modules contain classes that abstract MySQL objects devices and mechanisms For example there is a server class that contains operations to be performed on servers such as connecting logging in and running queries The MySQL Utilities Library While the library is growing the following lists the current common modules and the major classes and methods as of the 1 0 1 release database dbcompare format options rpl Class Method Database get_create_object diff_objects check_consistency format_tabular_list format_vertical_list print iee setup_common_options add_skip_options check_skip_options check_format_option add_verbosity check_verbosity add_difftype add_engines check_engine_options parse_connection Replication Description Perform database level operations Retrieve object create statement Diff definitions of two objects Check data consistency of two tables Format list in either GRID or delimited format to a file Format list in a vertical format to a file Print list based on format CSV GRID TAB or VERTICAL Set up option parser and options common to all MySQL Utilities Add common skip options Check skip options for validity Check format option for validity Add verbosity and quiet options Check whether both verbosity and quiet options are being used Add difftype option Add engine default storage engine options Check whether storage engines liste
306. he caption 100 Creating Views captionyOffs The Y offset of the caption comment The comment associated with the relationship drawSplit Whether to show the relationship as a continuous line endCapt ionXxOffs The X termination point of the caption offset endCaptionyOf fs The Y termination point of the caption offset extraCaption A secondary caption By default this extra caption is centered beneath the connection line extraCaptionXxOffs The X offset of the secondary caption extraCaptionyOffs The Y offset of the secondary caption mandatory Whether the entities are mandatory For more information see Section 7 7 2 2 The Relationship Editor many False if the relationship is a one to one relationship middleSegmentOffset The offset of the middle section of the connector modelOnly Set when the connection will not be propagated to the DDL It is just a logical connection drawn on a diagram This is used for example when drawing My I sAm tables with a visual relationship but with no foreign keys name The name used to identify the connection on the EER Diagram canvas Note that this is not the name of the foreign key referredMandatory Whether the referred entity is mandatory startCaptionxOffs The start of the X offset of the caption startCaptionyOffs The start of the Y offset of the caption In most cases you can change the properties of a relationship using the relationship editor ra
307. he connection DBMS connection keep alive interval When executing long running queries over a slow connection you may need to increase this value to prevent the connection being lost 40 The Model Tab Query Results The query results properties that can be set include the following Limit Rows Queries can sometimes return an excessive number of rows which can heavily load the connection and take time to display in MySQL Workbench To prevent this you can set a more moderate value here Limit Rows Count Specify the maximum number of result rows to return Max Field Value Length to Display To avoid display problems due to excessive field length it is possible to set the maximum field length to display in bytes Treat BINARY VARBINARY as non binary character string Binary byte string values are not displayed by default in the results grid but are instead marked as BLOB values These can then be viewed or edited with the BLOB editor Nonbinary character string values are displayed in the results grid and can be edited in the grid cell or using the BLOB editor If this option is turned on data truncation may result Binary byte string values may contain null bytes as part of their valid data whereas for nonbinary character strings a null byte terminates the string Enable Data Changes Commit Wizard In the SQL Editor if you edit table data and then click the Applying changes to data button MySQL Workbench l
308. he default is snapshot no headers h Do not display column headers This option applies only for csv and tab output quiet q Turn off all messages for quiet execution regexp basic regexp G Perform pattern matches using the REGEXP operator The default is to use LIKE for matching rpl lt dump_option gt replication lt dump_option gt Include replication information Permitted values are master include the CHANGE MASTER statement using the source server as the master slave include the CHANGE MASTER statement using the destination server s master information and both include the master and slave options where applicable rpl file RPL_FILE replication file RPL_FILE The path and file name where the generated replication information should be written Valid only with the rp1 256 option rpl user lt user password gt The user and password for the replication user requirement for example rp1 passwa The default is rplirpl Server lt server gt 256 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database NOTES Connection information for the server in lt users lt passwa gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format e skip lt skip objects gt Specify objects to skip in the operation as a comma separated list no spaces Permitted values are CREATE_DB DATA EVENTS FUNCTIONS GRANTS PROCEDURES TABLES TRIGGERS and VIEWS e skip blobs D
309. he expression as func md5 fred to ensure that the quoting is not escaped Insert new row Inserts a new row and enables you to enter data Your changes will not be reflected on the live server until you click Apply changes to data Delete selected rows Removes the selected rows Your changes will not be reflected on the live server until you click Apply changes to data e Export recordset to an external file Exports the result set as a file to a defined location The same as choosing Query Export Results from the main menu Data may be exported as several formats including CSV CSV separated HTML JSON SQL and XML Import records from an external file Imports data from a csv file Data is separated by a comma and not the alternative CSV separated MySQL Workbench export option This feature was added in MySQL Workbench 5 2 45 See also Section 7 7 1 3 8 The Inserts Tab 6 7 5 Sidebar The Sidebar contains these panels e Session connection Information e Snippets e Schemas The following sections describe each panel in more detail 6 7 5 1 Snippets panel The Snippets sidebar offers both built in and custom snippets The sidebar contains a select box with My Snippets for custom snippets and built in options titled DB Mgmt Database Management SQL DDL SQL Data Definition Language and SQL DML SQL Data Manipulation Language Snippets may be given names and these snippets can be vie
310. he following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of menendezpoo com nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER al N ae N CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING EGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF HE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE A 14 iODBC License The following software may be included in this product iODBC 330 Lib
311. he following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The names of the authors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR GERVICES7 GOSS Ol WISI DATA OR IINOIILINS 2 Ole BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN TE ADVISED OP EHR WSS SIMS WIL Ole SUC DAMAGE A 19 Lua liblua License The following software may be included in this product Lua liblua 333 Paramiko License Copyright 1994 2008 lua org PUC Rio Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restri
312. his command n mysqldbexport server root pass localhost skip GRANTS export DEFINITIONS util_test Source on localhost connected Exporting metadata from util_test DROP DATABASE IF EXISTS util_test CREATE DATABASE util_test USE wes Eest TABLE util_test t1 CREATE TABLE tl a char 30 DEFAULT NULL ENGINE MEMORY DEFAULT CHARSET latinl TABLE util_test t2 CREATE TABLE E2 a char 30 DEFAULT NULL ENGINE MyISAM DEFAULT CHARSET latinl 257 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database TABL ae oh PRIMARY KEY a ENGINE InnoDB AUTO_ Es util peste 44 CREATE TABLE t4 suite LiL NOT NUDI slime CY NOT NUDGE Faea rel ls CONSTRAINT ref_t3 FOREIGN KEY ENGINE InnoDB DEFAULT CHARSET latinl TABL a KEY VIEW do Me Wiealll ESSERE CREATE TABLE t3 awe ally char 30 DEFAULT NULL UENS SERVI ne Gre NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT NCREMENT 4 DEFAULT CHARSET latinl REFERENCES t3 gt a gt Similarly to export the data of the database ut i1_test producing bulk insert statements use this command mysqldbexport server root pass localhost export DATA bulk insert util_test Source on localhost USE ut Data INSERT 02 3 NSERT co ole il ast Exporting data from util_test INTO Test est est est est est est est
313. his point you can click Close 29 Creating a Model Figure 4 17 Getting Started Tutorial Manage Connections E Manage DB Connections l _ n o 8 x Stored Connections Connection Name Big Iron Server Type a name for the connection Local instance MySQLS5 Big Iron Server Connection Method Standard TCP IP v Method to use to connect to the RDBMS Parameters Advanced Hostname 127 0 0 1 Name or IP address of the server host TCP IP port Username root Name of the user to connect with Password Store in Vault Clear The user s password Default Schema The schema that will be used as default schema 16 You are now ready to forward engineer your model to the live server From the main menu select Database Forward Engineer The Forward Engineer to Database wizard will be displayed 17 The Options page of the wizard shows various advanced options For this tutorial you can ignore these and simply click Next 18 On the next page you can select the object you want to export to the live server In this case you only have a table so no other objects need be selected Click Next 19 The next page Review SQL Script displays the script that will be run on the live server to create your schema Review the script to make sure that you understand the operations that will be carried out Click Next 30 Adding Data to Your Database Figure 4 18 Getting Started
314. his tool clicking the canvas creates a new view To edit this view right click it and choose Edit View or Edit in New Window from the pop up menu To activate the view tool from the keyboard use the V key For more information about creating and editing views see Section 7 7 3 Creating Views 7 6 1 9 The Routine Group Tool 7 6 1 10 Use this tool to create a routine group on the EER Diagram canvas When this tool is activated a schema list appears on the toolbar below the main menu enabling you to associate the routine group with a specific schema You can also select a color for the routine group by choosing from the color list to the right of the schema list After selecting this tool clicking the canvas creates a new group To edit this view right click it and choose Edit Routine Group or Edit in New Window from the pop up menu To activate the routine group tool from the keyboard use the G key For more information about creating and editing routine groups see Section 7 7 4 2 Routine Groups The Relationship Tools The five relationship tools are used to represent the following relationships e One to many nonidentifying relationships e One to one nonidentifying relationships e One to many identifying relationships e One to one identifying relationships e Many to many identifying relationships 85 Working with Models These tools appear at the bottom of the vertical tool bar Hover
315. ia Polynesia 199 00 Antarctica Antarctica Antarctica 13120000 00 French Southe Antarctica Antarctica 7780 00 ma Antigua and B North America Caribbean 442 00 1981 AUS Australia Oceania Australia and 7741220 00 1901 AUT Austria Europe Western Europe 83859 00 1918 Country 1 Apply Action Output Time Action Response Duration Fetch Time 12 40 35 drop schema example_source Changes applied 12 40 40 drop schema f Changes applied 12 40 45 drop schema new_schema3 Changes applied 12 41 48 Apply changes to phpbugsdb No changes detected 12 44 08 drop schema phpbugsdb Changes applied The SQL Editor user interface has these main elements e Main Menu e Toolbar e SQL Query Panel e Main Tabsheets Overview Output History Snippets Results e Sidebar e Auto completion in the Main Menu The following sections describe each of these elements 6 7 1 Main Menu When an SQL Editor tab is selected the most important items on the main menu bar are the Query and Edit menus 51 Main Menu Query Menu The Query menu features the following items Execute All or Selection Executes all statements in the SQL Query area or only the selected statements Execute Current Statement Executes the current SQL statement Explain All or Selection Describes all statements or the selected statement Explain Current Statement Describes the current statement Stop Stops executing the currently r
316. iagram tab is selected The tools on this toolbar assist in creating EER diagrams 82 The Vertical Toolbar Figure 7 7 The Vertical Toolbar Diagram Geraljpanls siF i lt lin A SA laK sh l m ID INT 11 Name CHAR 35 CountryCode CHAR 3 District CHAR 20 Population INT 11 gt _ Code CHAR 3 Name CHAR 52 Continent ENUM Region CHAR 26 SurfaceArea FLOAT gt IndepY ear SMALLINT 6 Population INT 11 gt LifeExpectancy FLOAT GNP FLOAT 2 GNPOld FLOAT LocaName CHAR 45 GovernmentForm CHAR 45 gt HeadOf tate CHAR 60 Y Capitd INT 11 Code2 CHAR 2 gt T CountryCode CHAR 3 Language CHAR 30 Q IsOffiial ENUM T F Percentage FLOAT gt SaaS aay gt m Clicking a tool changes the mouse pointer to a pointer that resembles the tool icon indicating which tool is active These tools can also be activated from the keyboard by pressing the key associated with the tool Hover the mouse pointer over a toolbar icon to display a description of the tool and its shortcut key A more detailed description of each of these tools follows 7 6 1 1 The Standard Mouse Pointer The standard mouse pointer located at the top of the vertical toolbar is the default mouse pointer for your operating system Use this tool to revert to the standard mouse pointer after using other tools To revert to th
317. icon to your Applications folder You may then Eject and throw away this disk image c MySQL Workbench hn Drag the MySQL Workbench icon onto the Applications icon as instructed MySQL Workbench is now installed You can now launch MySQL Workbench from the Applications folder 3 3 8 Launching MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X To launch MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X open the Applications folder in the Finder then double click MySQL Workbench 10 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X It is also possible to start MySQL Workbench from the command line shell gt open MySQLWorkbench app model_file A model file must be specified 3 3 9 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Mac OS X To uninstall MySQL Workbench for Mac OS X locate MySQL Workbench in the Applications folder right click and select Move to Trash 11 12 Chapter 4 Getting Started Tutorial Table of Contents 4 1 Administering a MySQL Server ceccccccee cece cece cece ae eee teeter esse ae aa eae eeeeeeeeaeaaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeneeeeeeees 13 4 2 Creating a Modele iee ea ck poe lens veg ie eile sa ead ach pasted ac ada dies pide ac evade pat na das ape disc 25 4 3 Adding Data to Your Database ssi nieas i eee anne reed nesses aaineeeeaaeeeeeeaaneeeeea 31 This tutorial provides a quick hands on introduction to using MySQL Workbench for beginners If you have used MySQL Workbench before you can safely skip this tutorial This tutori
318. iconv License In accordance with the terms of the iODBC licensing scheme set forth below Oracle is hereby making the election to license iODBC under the BSD license iODBC Driver Manager Copyright C 1995 by Ke Jin lt kejin empress com gt Copyright C 1996 2009 by OpenLink Software lt iodbc openlinksw com gt All Rights Reserved This software is released under either the GNU Library General Public License see LICENSE LGPL or the BSD License see LICENSE BSD Note that the only valid version of the LGPL license as far as this project is concerned is the original GNU Library General Public License Version 2 dated June 1991 While not mandated by the BSD license any patches you make to the iODBC may be contributed back into the iODBC project at your discretion Contributions will benefit the Open Source and Data Access community as a whole Submissions may be made at http www iodbc org LICENSE BSD Copyright C 1995 2009 OpenLink Software Inc and Ke Jin All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials
319. ield Changes here affect the name of the tab in the table editor and the name of the table on the canvas Pressing Tab or Enter while the cursor is in the table name field selects the Columns tab of the table editor and creates a default column named idinvoice Pressing Tab or Enter again sets the focus on the Datatype list with INT selected Notice that a field has been added to the table on the EER canvas Pressing Tab yet again and the focus shifts to adding a second column Add a Descriptionanda Customer_idcolumn When you are finished close the table editor by clicking the x button on the top left of the table editor 143 Documenting the sakila Database 7 8 3 2 Creating a Foreign Key Select the table tool again and place another table on the canvas Name this table invoice_item Next click the 1 n Non Identifying Relationship tool First click the invoice_item table notice that a red border indicates that this table is selected Next click the invoice table This creates a foreign key in the invoice_item table the table on the many side of the relationship This relationship between the two tables is shown graphically in crow s foot notation Revert to the default mouse pointer by clicking the arrow at the top of the vertical toolbar Click on the invoice_item table and select the Foreign keys tab Click the Foreign key Name field The referenced table should show in the Referenced Table column and the appro
320. ier O All Open SQL Script Modifier Shift O SQL Editor Close Tab Modifier W All Save Model Modifier S Model Save Script Modifier S SQL Editor Save Model As Modifier Shift S Model Save Script As Modifier Shift S SQL Editor Forward Engineer SQL Modifier Shift G Model CREATE Script Forward Engineer SQL ALTER Modifier Alt Y Model Script Synchronize With SQL Modifier Shift Y Model CREATE Script Print Modifier P EER Diagram mode only Exit Modifier Q All Edit Menu Table 12 2 Edit menu keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Undo Modifier Z Model EER Diagram Redo Modifier Y Modifier Shift Z Mac OS X Model EER Diagram Cut Modifier X All Copy Modifier C All Paste Modifier V All Delete Modifier Delete Command BackSpace All Mac OS X Edit Selected Modifier E Model EER Diagram Edit Selected in New Window Modifier Shift E Model EER Diagram Select All Modifier A EER Diagram 223 Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Find Modifier F All Find Advanced Modifier Alt F Find Next F3 Find Previous Shift F3 Search and Replace Modifier Shift F View Menu Table 12 3 View menu keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut Context Output Window Modifier F2 Modifier Option 2 Mac OS All X Set Marker n Modifier Shift n n is integer 1 9 EER Diagram Go to Marker n Modifier n n is integer 1 9 EER Diagram Arrange Menu
321. ies that resort to platform specific native code are also not used The class method and function signatures are designed to make use of a small number of required parameters and all optional parameters as a single dictionary Consider the following method def do_something_wonderful position objl obj2 options Does something wonderful A fictional method that does something to object 2 based on the location of something in object 1 Poste ion in Posibicon im obj objl1 in First object to manipulate obj2 in Second object to manipulate options in Option dictionary width width of printout default 75 iter max iterations default 2 ok_to_fail if True do not throw exception default True Returns bool True success Fail failed This example is typical of the methods and classes in the library Notice that this method has three required parameters and a dictionary of options that may exist Each method and function that uses this mechanism defines its own default values for the items in the dictionary A quick look at the method documentation shows the key names for the dictionary This can be seen in the preceding example where the dictionary contains three keys and the documentation lists their defaults To call this method and pass different values for one or more of the options the code may look like this opt_dictionary width 5 LOO iter BLO Tok tOo talr 4 Ealse 231 Introduction
322. iff Report This facility enables you to create a report detailing the differences between your MySQL Workbench model and a live database or script Choose Database Generate Catalog Diff Report from the main menu to run the Compare and Report Differences in Catalogs wizard The first step in the wizard is to specify which catalogs to compare For example you may wish to compare your live database against your current MySQL Workbench model 138 Forward Engineering Figure 7 45 Catalog Sources Compare and Report Differences in Catalogs Select Sources Select Sources to Compare Source for Left Catalog Model Schemata Live Database Server O Script File Browse Source for Right Catalog Model Schemata Live Database Server TE You then proceed through the wizard providing connection information if accessing a live database The wizard then produces a catalog diff report showing the differences between the compared catalogs 139 Modeling Tutorials Figure 7 46 Catalog Diff Report Compare and Report Differences in Catalogs Select Sources Differences Found in Catalog Comparison Connection Options Connect to DBMS spesvncenneonneneenennsnnennnensentntp Catalog Diff Report Select Schemata aaa aa AES Table mydb table5 was dropped Fetch Object Info Table mydb table was dropped Table mdb table3 was modified foreign keys added foreig
323. ified The format of the log file includes the date and time of the event the level of the event informational INFO warning WARN error ERROR critical failure CRITICAL and the message reported by the utility The utility has a number of options each explained in more detail below Some of the options are specific to certain commands Warning messages are issued whenever an option is used that does not apply to the command requested A brief overview of each command and its options is presented in the following paragraphs The elect failover start stop and reset commands require either the slaves 293 option to list all of the slaves in the topology or the discover slaves login 292 option to provide the user name and password to discover any slaves in the topology that are registered to the master but are not listed in the slaves 293 option The options required for the health and gtid commands include the master 292 option to specify the existing master and either the slaves 293 option to list all of the slaves in the topology or the discover slaves login 292 option to provide the user name and password to discover any slaves in the topology that are registered to the master but are not listed in the s laves 293 option Use the verbose 293 option to see additional information in the health report and additional messages during switchover or failover The options required for switchover inc
324. ila Database EER Diagram category_id TINYINT 3 gt actor id SMALLINT S film id SMALLINT S F film Jd SMALLINT S category id TINYINT 3 Ty fk_filrn_actor_actor fk_film_category_film fk_flirn_actor_film fk_film_language_original tk_film_language Pe y 7 language _id TINVINT 3 ey actor Id SMALLINT 5 filmid SMALUNT 5S PTT fk_inventory_film language _id TINYINT 3 r H original Janguage_id TINYINT 3 F film_id SMALLINT 6 ee ea rental film_id SMALLINT S i ee oe rr 1 fk_rental_inventory F rental_id INT 11 L store _id TINYINT 3 tS inventory_id MEDIUMINT 8 pe cers is mm es lS sn i inventory _i customer Id SMALLINT S staff jd TINYINT 3 a ar ed fk_rental_customer fk_inventory_store Cais country_id SMALLINT 5 store_id TINYINT 3 es 7 manager _staff_id TINYINT 3 t a fk_city_country address _id SMALLINT 5 fk_customer_store 4 customer_id SMALLINT S store_id TINYINT 3 I l l address _id SMALLINT S city _id SMALLINT S Y F _rental_staff country_id SMALLINT S 1 i pma Wo i fk_staff_store l l i yy l fk_payrient_rental u eea Io 1 Uu Cod Me store_dtat en i tk ent_customer address leity Lpayment_ fk_customer address I i payme
325. ileges DATA EXPORT RESTORE 3 Data Export and Restore WB Admin Opened Note E In the current version of MySQL Workbench it is not possible to manage privileges below the schema level For example it is not possible to view or manage grants at the table column or procedure level 9 7 3 1 Administrative Roles To aid in assigning privileges to MySQL Server users MySQL Workbench introduces the concept of Administrative Roles Roles are a quick way of granting a set of privileges to a user based on the work the user must carry out on the server It is also possible to assign multiple roles to a user To assign roles click the User Account you wish to modify then click the Administrative Roles tab Then click the check boxes 177 The Connections Tab according to the roles you wish to allocate to the user After you select a role to a user you will see the accumulated privileges in the Global Privileges Assigned to User panel For example if you select the role BackupAdmin the privileges granted include EVENT LOCK TABLES SELECT SHOW DATABASES If you also select the role of Replicatio CLI ENT R EPLICATION SLAV nAdmin the list of privileges expands to include RI E and SUP These roles are available DBA Grants all privileges ER E e MaintenanceAdmin Grants privileges to maintain the server e ProcessAdmin Grants privileges to monitor and k
326. ill processes that match query mysqlreplicate e Setup replication e Start from beginning current specific binlog pos mysqlrpladmin e Administers the replication topology Allows recovery of the master e Commands include elect failover gtid health start stop and switchover mysqlrplcheck e Check replication configuration e Tests binary logging on master 239 mut MySQL Utilities Testing e mysqlrplshow e Show slaves attached to master e Can search recursively e Show the replication topology as a graph or list mysqlserverclone e Start a new instance of a running server mysqlserverinfo e Show server information e Can search for running servers on a host e Access online or offline servers mysqluserclone e Clone a user account to the same or different server e Show user grants mysqluc e Command line client for running MySQL Utilities e Allows a persistent connection to a MySQL Server e Tab completion for utility names and options e Allows calling the commands with shorter names such as using serverinfo instead of mysqlserverinfo e mut e Tests for all utilities e Similar to MTR e Comparative and value result support e Tests written as Python classes 13 3 2 mut MySQL Utilities Testing This utility executes predefined tests to test the MySQL Utilities The tests are located under the mysql test directory and divided into suites stored as folders By default all tests located in the
327. ill user processes e UserAdmin Grants privileges to create users and reset passwords e MonitorAdmin Grants privileges to monitor the server e DBManager Grants privileges to manage databases e DBDesigner Grants privileges to create and reverse engineer any database schema e ReplicationAdmin Grants privileges to set up and manage replication e BackupAdmin Grants privileges required to back up databases 9 7 4 The Connections Tab The Connections tab lists all current connections to the monitored server REPLICATION SecurityAdmin Grants privileges to manage logins and grant and revoke server privileges 178 The Variables Tab Figure 9 8 Administrator Connections Tab i MYSQL Workbench Task and Object Browser MANAGEMENT SERVER HEALTH gt Server Status Name mysqld 127 0 0 1 J Startup Shutdown Host i Server E Status and System Variables aia Status CPU 12 Mem 69 Connection Usage 5 Traffic 8 42 KB s A Server Logs CONFIGURATION Host amp Options File localhost 49171 localhost 53528 SECURITY localhost 53529 Users and Privileges localhost 55277 0 SHOW PROCESSLIST localhost 55278 DATA EXPORT RESTORE Data Export and Restore WB Admin Opened 9 7 5 The Variables Tab The Variables tab displays a list of all server and status variables 179 The Data Dump Tab Figure 9 9 Administrator Variables Tab i Admin mysqld 127 0 0 1 X Fil
328. in the Manage DB Connection dialog set the desired default schema on the Parameters tab A useful feature that was introduced in MySQL Workbench 5 2 9 is the ability to rapidly enter table view or column names into the SQL Statement area Double clicking a table view or column name in the schemata explorer inserts the name into the SQL Query area This reduces typing significantly when entering SQL statements containing references to several tables views or columns The Object Browser also features a context menu which can be displayed by right clicking an object For example right clicking a table displays the following menu items 61 Sidebar Select Rows Limit 1000 Pulls up to 1000 rows of table data from the live server into a Results tabsheet Edit Table Data Pulls table data from the live server into a named tabsheet and enables editing Data can be saved directly to the live server Copy to Clipboard There are various submenus each of which copies information to the clipboard e Name short Copies the table name e Name long Copies the qualified table name in the form schema table e Column Names Copies qualified column names the form table column1 table eolumn2 gt Select All Statement Copies a statement to select all columns in this form SELECT cable ee column y table columna FROM schema table e Insert Statement Copies an INSERT statement to insert all columns
329. include several VALUES lists Options File insertignore Write INSERT IGNORE statements rather than INSERT statements SECURITY E replace Write REPLACE statements rather than INSERT statements Users and Privileges delayed nsert Write INSERT DELAYED statements rather than INSERT statements DATA EXPORT RESTORE Data Export and Restore Other E events Dump events from the dumped databases lock tables Lock tables for read Disable if user has no LOCK TABLES privilege V dump date Indude dump date as Dump completed on comment if comments is given flush logs Flush the MySQL server log files before starting the dump delete master ogs On a master replication server delete the binary logs after performing the dump operation E no data Do not dump table contents hex blob Dump binary columns using hexadecimal notation for example abc becomes 0x6 16263 compress Use compression in server client protocol flush privileges Emit a FLUSH PRIVILEGES statement after dumping the mysql database disable keys For each table surround the INSERT statements with statements to disable and enable keys F force Continue even if we get an sql error order by primary Dump each table s rows sorted by its primary key or by its first unique index WB Admin Opened 9 7 7 The Logs Tab The Log
330. information used in managing the server instance The following Profile Templates are available e Fedora Linux MySQL Package Fedora Linux Vendor Package FreeBSD MySQL Package Generic Linux MySQL tar package Mac OS X MySQL Package OpenSolaris MySQL Package RHEL MySQL Package SLES MySQL Package Ubuntu Linux MySQL Package Ubuntu Linux Vendor Package Windows MySQL 5 0 Installer Package Windows MySQL 5 1 Installer Package Windows MySQL zip package Custom After you select a profile a number of default parameters will be set including commands used to start and stop MySQL commands to check server status and the location of the my ini or my cnf configuration file 170 Server Administration and Configuration Figure 9 2 Manage Server Instances Dialog ren e Server Instances 7 World Instance Name Wor Connection System Profile Information about the server and MySQL configuration such as path to the configuration file command to start or stop it etc You may pick a preset configuration profile or customize one for your needs System Type Windows v Installation Type Custom v Configuration File C Program Files MySQL MySQL Server 5 1 my ini Instance Name mysqld The following options specify how Workbench should perform certain administration actions Commands given here are the same as if they would be run in a system shell Commands whi
331. ing the available modules and their supported functions It is also a way to check whether custom modules have been correctly installed 11 6 Tutorial Writing Plugins This tutorial shows you how to extend MySQL Workbench by creating a plugin The Sample Plugin EER Diagrams are useful for visualizing complex database schemata They are often created for existing databases to clarify their purpose or document them MySQL Workbench provides facilities for reverse engineering existing databases and then creating an EER Diagram automatically In this case relationship lines between foreign keys in the table will automatically be drawn This graphical representation makes the relationships between the tables much easier to understand However one of the most popular storage engines for MySQL MyISAM does not include support for foreign keys This means that MyISAM tables that are reverse engineered will not automatically have the relationship lines drawn between tables making the database harder to understand The plugin that will be created in this tutorial gets around this problem by using the fact that a naming convention is very often used for foreign keys tablename_primarykeyname Using this convention foreign keys can automatically be created after a database is reverse engineered which will result in relationship lines being drawn in the EER diagram Algorithm The basic algorithm for this task would be as follows for each table in the
332. ing type value Use a value of no locks to turn off locking altogether or lock all to use only table locks The default value is snapshot Additionally the utility uses WRITE locks to lock the destination tables during the copy You can include replication statements for exporting data among a master and slave or between slaves The rp1 256 option permits you to select from the following replication statements to include in the export 254 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database master Include the CHANGE MASTER statement to start a new slave with the current server acting as the master This places the appropriate STOP and START slave statements in the export whereby the STOP SLAVE statement is placed at the start of the export and the CHANGE MASTER followed by the START SLAVE statements are placed after the export stream slave Include the CHANGE MASTER statement to start a new slave using the current server s master information This places the appropriate STOP and START slave statements in the export whereby the STOP SLAVE statment is placed at the start of the export and the CHANGE MASTER followed by the START SLAVE statements are placed after the export stream both Include both the master and slave information for CHANGE MASTER statements for either spawning a new slave with the current server s master or using the current server as the master All statements generated are labele
333. ings Use SSL if available This option turns on SSL encryption if the client library supports it SSL CA File Path to Certificate Authority file for SSL SSL CERT File Path to Certificate file for SSL SSL Key File Path to Key file for SSL SSL Cipher Optional list of permissible ciphers to use for SSL encryption News Gee inka Moree ann 48 Local Socket Pipe Connection The Advanced tab includes these check boxes e Use compression protocol If checked the communication between the application and the MySQL server will be compressed which may increase transfer rates This corresponds to starting a MySQL command line client with the compress option e Use SSL if available This option turns on SSL encryption The client library must support this option Note This feature is currently not supported oon e Use ANSI quotes to quote identifiers Treat as an identifier quote character like the quote character and not as a string quote character You can still use to quote identifiers with this mode enabled With this option enabled you cannot use double quotation marks to quote literal strings because it is interpreted as an identifier Note If this option is selected it overrides the server setting 6 6 3 Local Socket Pipe Connection This connection method enables MySQL Workbench to connect to MySQL Server using a socket file on Unix or a named pipe on Windows Parameters
334. ings If there are any errors you can manually fix the scripts and click Recreate Objects to retry SOURCE amp TARGET Source Selection Target Selection Fetch Schemata List Y Schemata Selection Y Reverse Engineer Source OBJECT MIGRATION Y Source Objects Y Migration Y Manual Editing Target Creation Options Y Create Schemata the schema creation or return to the Manual Editing page to correct them there and retry the target creation Object Result SQL CREATE Script for Selected Object m ee r ra CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS HumanResources Departm Preamiie Script executed successfully DepartmentID SMALLINT NOT NULL AUTO_INCREMENT COI AdventureWorks HumanResour J Script executed successfully wl Name VARCHAR 100 NOT NULL COMMENT Name of the de I EE GroupName VARCHAR 100 NOT NULL COMMENT Name of thamenftescorces enple Script executed successfully ModifiedDate TIMESTAMP NOT NULL DEFAULT CURRENT_TI HumanResources EmployeaAdd Script executed successfully PRIMARY KEY DepartmentID gt COMMENT Lookup table containing the departments within tt HumanResources EmployeeDe Script executed successfully iw HumanResources EmployeePay Script executed successfully m HumanResources JobCandidate Script executed successfully C HumanResources Shift Script executed successfully al Postamble Script executed successfully E Comment out lt Create Targ
335. inistrator menu item be present under the Plugins menu as a convenience shortcut to start it Linux There are a few GUI utilities some of which are included with unixODBC Refer to the documentation for your distribution ODBC provides iodbcadm gtk Official binaries of MySQL Workbench include it and it can be accessed through the Plugins Start ODBC Administrator menu item Mac OS xX You can use the ODBC Administrator tool which is provided as a separate download from Apple If the tool is installed in the Applications Utilities folder you can start it through the Plugins Start ODBC Administrator menu item Microsoft Windows You can use the Data Sources ODBC tool under Administrative Tools And it can be started through the Plugins Start ODBC Administrator menu item ODBC Driver architecture R Since the ODBC driver needs to be installed in the client side you will need an ODBC driver that supports your clients operating system and architecture For example if you are running MySQL Workbench from Linux x64 then you need a Linux x64 ODBC driver for your RDBMS In Mac OS X MySQL Workbench is built as a 32 bit application so you need the 32 bit drivers 10 2 Migration Overview The Migration Wizard performs the following steps when migrating a database to MySQL 1 Connects to the source RDBMS and retrieves a list of available databases schemas 2 Reverse engineers selected database schemas into a internal represent
336. ion store dest new_id type string default 2 help the server_id for the new instance default default from mysql utilities command import serverclone EEN res serverclone clone_server conn opt new_data opt new_port opt new_id root None False True except exception UtilError e print ERROR e errmsg exit 1 As you can see the operation is very simple We just added a few options we needed like new data new port and new id much like mysqlserverclone and supplied some default values for the other parameters Next we need to copy the databases Once again we use the command module for mysqidbcopy to do all of the work for us First we need the connection parameters for the new instance This is provided in the form of a dictionary We know the instance is a clone so some of the values are going to be the same and we use a default root password so that is also known Likewise we specified the data directory and since we are running on a Linux machine we know what the socket path is For Windows machines you can leave the socket value None We pass this dictionary to the copy method dest_values user conn get user Woasciwel gp Wie HOSES 5 Comm get Vsiosis 5 TporE opt new_port unix_socket os path join opt new_data mysql sock In this case a number of options are needed to control how the copy works for example if any objects are skipped For our p
337. ippets Information Duration Fetch Object Info Find options The Find dialogue options are described below e String Matching default or Regular Expression Search by matching a string or a PCRE regular expression Ignore Case A case insensitive search Works with both the String Matching and Regular Expression search methods Enabled by default e Match Whole Words If enabled only whole strings are matched For example a search for home would not match home_id Disabled by default e Wrap Around The search will wrap around to the beginning of the document as otherwise it will only search from the cursor position to the end of the document Enabled by default e And the arrows jump to the discovered search terms and behave according to the Wrap Around option The Standard Edition of MySQL Workbench includes a more advanced Find facility 69 Modeling Menus Figure 7 3 The Find Window Find Text In Location Current View C Match Case C Whole Word C Use Regular Expressions C Search in Comments C Search in SOL for Views SPs ete You can search the following locations e Entire Model Searches the entire model e Current View Searches the current view only This may be the MySQL Model page e All Views Searches the MySQL Model Page and all EER diagrams e Database Objects Searches database objects only Selected Figures Searches the currently selected
338. irectory path name e Configuration file location and name e Current binary log coordinates file name and position e Current relay log coordinates file name and position This utility can be used to see the diagnostic information for servers that are running or offline If you want to see information about an offline server the utility starts the server in read only mode In this case you must specify the basedir 306 datadir 306 and start 306 options to prevent the utility from starting an offline server accidentally Note Be sure to consider the ramifications of starting an offline server on the error and similar logs It is best to save this information prior to running this utility To specify how to display output use one of the following values with the format 306 option e grid default Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor e cSV Display output in comma separated values format e tab Display output in tab separated format e vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysql monitor To turn off the headers for csv or tab display format specify the no headers 306 option To see the common default settings for the local server s configuration file use the show defaults 806 option This option reads the configuration file on the machine where the utility is run not the machine for the host that the server 306 option
339. ished performing tasks p Click Next gt to continue Y Target Creation Options Message Log Create Target Results Starting Connect to Target Database DATA MIGRATION Connect to Target Database done Perform Checks in Target Dan Tanerau Validating for cousins schemas on target MySQL Server Bulk Data Transfer Perform Checks in Target done Create Schemata and Objects REPORT Migration Report 198 A visual guide to performing a database migration Create Target Results The generated objects are listed here along with the error messages if any exist The migration code may also be viewed and edited here To make changes select an object edit the query code and press Apply Repeat this process for each object that will be edited And then press Recreate Objects to save the results execute the previous migration step Create Schemata with the modified code and then continue the migration process This also means that the previously saved Note E The Recreate Objects operation is required to save any changes here It will then schema will be dropped Figure 10 14 MySQL Workbench migration Create Target Results 5 be SQLE oca nce MyS Migration X File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Create Target Results 3 Overview Scripts to create the target schema were executed No data has been migrated yet Review the creation report below for errors or warn
340. isplay version information and exit You must provide connection parameters user host password and so forth for an account that has the appropriate privileges to access all objects in the operation The account used to connect to the source server must have privileges to read the mysql database The account used to connect to the destination server must have privileges to execute CREATE USER and DROP USER if the force 311 option is given and privileges to execute GRANT for all privileges to be granted to the new accounts For the format 311 option the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 311 specifies the grid format An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES To clone joe aS sam and sally with passwords and logging in as root on the local machine use this command mysqluserclone source root localhost destination root localhost joe localhost sam secretl localhost sally secret2 localhost Source on localhost connected Destination on localhost connected Cloning 2 users Cloning joe localhost to user sam secretl localhost Cloning joe localhost to user sally secret2 localhost done The following command shows all users on the local server in the most verbose output in CSV format mysqluserclone source root localhost list fo
341. ithout fee is hereby granted provided that this en tire notice is included in all copies of any software which is or includes a copy or modification of this software and in all copies of the supporting documentation for such software This work was produced at the University of California Lawrence Livermore National Laboratory under contract no W 7405 ENG 48 between the U S Department of Energy and The Regents of the University of California for the operation of UC LLNL DISCLAIMER This software was prepared as an account of work sponsored by an agency of the United States Government Neither the United States Government nor the University of California nor any of their em 343 Python License ployees makes any warranty express or implied or assumes any liability or responsibility for the accuracy completeness or usefulness of any information apparatus product or process disclosed or represents that its use would not infringe privately owned rights Reference herein to any specific commer cial products process or service by trade name trademark manufacturer or otherwise does not necessarily constitute or imply its endorsement recommendation or favoring by the United States Government or the University of California The views and opinions of authors expressed herein do not necessarily state or reflect those of the United States Government or the University of California and shall not be used for advertisi
342. itten prior S ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO RRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND IN NO EVENT SHALL STICHTING MATHEMATISCH CENTRUM BE LIABLE IAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT FORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE porated Software ing list of licenses and acknowledgements for third party software incorporated in the Python distribution Mersenne Twister The _random module includes code based on a download from http www math keio ac jp matumoto MT2002 emt19937ar html The following are the verbatim comments A G program for MTL9S37 from the original code with initialization improved 2002 1 26 Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto Before using initialize the state by u or init_by_array init_key key_length Copyright Wey Joys 2002 All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and bi modification are permitted provided th are m t 1 Redistributions of source code must NOtICe ENIS ITSE ON COndrtIrona ana 2 Redistributions in binary form must notice this list of conditions and documentation and or other material distribution 3 The names of its contributors may n products derived from this software permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRI Tas ra LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF M A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED I CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN AND ANY EX
343. ity to attempt to compare all objects listed as arguments 264 mysqldiff Identify Differences Among Database Objects OPTIONS NOTES mysqldiff accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit changes for lt direction gt Specify the server to show transformations to match the other server For example to see the transformation for transforming object definitions on server1 to match the corresponding definitions on server2 use changes for serverl 265 Permitted values are server1 and server2 The default is server difftype lt difftype gt d lt difftype gt Specify the difference display format Permitted format values are unified context differ and sql The default is unified force Do not halt at the first difference found Process all objects to find all differences quiet q Do not print anything Return only an exit code of success or failure server1 lt source gt Connection information for the first server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port lt socket gt format server2 lt source gt Connection information for the second server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port lt socket gt format show reverse Produce a transformation report containing the SQL statements to conform the object definitions specified in reverse For example if changes for 265 is set to server1 also generate the tr
344. jects of a specific type from the SOL Export disable the corresponding checkbox Press Show Filter and add objects or patterns to the ignore list to exclude them from the export F Export MySQL Table Objects Show Filter 2 Total Objects 2 Selected C Export MySQL View Objects Show Filter 0 Total Objects 0 Selected C Export MySQL Routine Objects Show Filter 0 Total Objects 0 Selected Export MySQL Trigger Objects Show Filter 0 Total Objects 0 Selected C Export User Objects Show Filter 0 Total Objects 0 Selected Precise control over the objects to export can be fine tuned by clicking the Show Filter button After the objects to export have been selected it is possible to reduce the expanded panel by clicking the same button now labeled Hide Filter After selecting the objects to export click the Next button to review the script that has been generated 123 Forward Engineering Figure 7 30 Review Generated Script Forward Engineer SQL Script SQL Export Options E ee Review Generated Script Filter Objects Review SQL Script Review the generated script SET OLD_UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS UNIQUE_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS i FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS FOREIGN_KEY_CHECKS 0 SET OLD_SQL_MODE SQL_MODE SQL_MODE TRADITIONAL CREATE SCHEMA IF NOT EXISTS mydb DEFAULT CHARACTER SET latin COLLATE latint_swedish_ci USE mydb Table nyd tablet CREATE
345. jects such as views or routines can be added in the same way as tables Any objects you have created can be found in the Catalog palette on the right To view these schema objects select the Catalog tab in the middle palette on the right View all the objects by clicking the button to the left of the schema name Save your changes to a MySQL Workbench Models file mwb extension by choosing Save from the File menu or by using the keyboard command Control S 7 8 3 Basic Modeling On the MySQL Model page double click the Add Diagram icon This creates and opens anew EER Diagram Canvas Figure 7 49 Adding an EER Diagram MySQL Model Y EER Diagrams P Add Diagram From an EER diagram page you can graphically design a database 7 8 3 1 Adding a Table The tools in the vertical toolbar on the left of the EER Diagram tab are used for designing an EER diagram Start by creating a table using the table tool The table tool is the rectangular grid in the middle of the vertical toolbar Mousing over it shows the message Place a New Table T Clicking this tool changes the mouse pointer to a hand with a rectangular grid Create a table on the canvas by clicking anywhere on the EER Diagram grid Right click the table and choose Edit in New Window from the pop up menu This opens the table editor docked at the bottom of the application The table name defaults to table1 Change the name by entering invoice into the Name f
346. just entered 9 You can also carry out a similar check from within MySQL Workbench Click on the Home window tab 10 Click the link Open Connection to start Querying in the SQL Development section of the Workspace This will launch the Connect to Database dialog Select Big Iron Server from the list Click OK 11 A new SQL Editor tab will be displayed In the SQL Statements area enter the following code USE Mdviduicollectaonr SELECT FROM movies 12 Now click the Execute toolbar button This resembles a small lightning bolt The SQL Editor will display a new Result tab contain the result of executing the SQL statements 33 Adding Data to Your Database Figure 4 21 Getting Started Tutorial Results 1 USE dvd collection 20 SELECT FROM movies O bpo py ome E reiese _ ste Gone mth the Wind 1939 06 17 The Hound of the Baskerv es 1935 0331 The Mat 1993 03 31 Above te Law 1968 0448 Aton Apa Tme Acton 1 190521 USE rd_colecton 2 190521 SELECT FROM mowes LIMIT 0 1000 In this section of the tutorial you have learned how to add data to your database and also how to execute SQL statements using MySQL Workbench 34 Chapter 5 The Home Window Table of Contents 5 1s Workbench Cental aidean dashes a lace eth a deed aa doleaed 36 922 WOKS PACE 5 A AT eave EAE AAE E E EAT E E A E T E 37 5 3 Workbench Application Minimum Window Size ccccceccceeeeeeeeeee cece ae eaeee
347. l bin 000001 571 GTID Executed Set ZAG DEO0 gt 2DAN MI E2 AT TOO 7G4n2BEIOR T 7 iia Replication Health Status 4 4 4 4 4 4 l host port role state gtid_mode health 4 4 4 4 4 4 Mecelloosig S33 Mastik We ON OK localhost NSse2s lp solAliE UP ON OK tecelloosie 2333 SiwAwaa UP ON OK Mecalorosic S334 SiwAwaa UP ON OK 4 4 4 4 4 4 Q quit R refresh H health G GTID Lists U UUIDs L log entries Pressing the q key will exit the utility Pressing the r key will refresh the current display Pressing the h key will return to the replication health report If the user presses the g key the gtid report is shown like the following The first page shown is the master s executed GTID set MySQL Replication Monitor and Failover Utility Failover Mode auto Next Interval Mon Mar 19 15 59 33 2012 Master Information Binary Log File Position Binlog_Do_De Binlog_Ignore_Ds mysql bin 000001 571 GTID Executed Set 2A67DE00 2DA1 11E2 A711 00764F2BE90F 1 7 Master GTID Executed Set 2A67DE00 2DA1 11E2 A711 00764F2BE90F 1 7 SHOSw is 7E 2 DB2 IEAA Tel hO 7 TAD IAB SS s hs 275 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring a
348. l to invoke failover exec post failover lt script gt Name of script to execute after failover is complete and the utility has refreshed the health report failover mode lt mode gt f lt mode gt Action to take when the master fails auto automatically fail to best slave elect fail to candidate list or if no candidate meets criteria fail fail take no action and stop when master fails Default auto force Override the registration check on master for multiple instances of the console monitoring the same master interval lt seconds gt i lt seconds gt Interval in seconds for polling the master for failure and reporting health Default 15 seconds Minimum is 5 seconds log lt log_file gt Specify a log file to use for logging messages log age lt days gt 273 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring and failover NOTES Specify maximum age of log entries in days Entries older than this will be purged on startup Default 7 days master lt connection gt Connection information for the master server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format max position lt position gt Used to detect slave delay The maximum difference between the master s log position and the slave s reported read position of the master A value greater than this means the slave is too far behind the master Default 0
349. lation process for each of these platforms 3 1 Hardware Requirements MySQL Workbench requires a system that runs smoothly The minimum hardware requirements are e CPU 32 bit or 64 bit e Cores Single Single Core 3GHz or higher Dual Core 2GHz or higher recommended e RAM 4 GB 6 GB or higher recommended e Graphic Accelerators nVidia or ATI with support of OpenGL 2 or higher e Display Resolution 1280x1024 minimum 1920x1200 or higher recommended 3 2 Software Requirements The following operating systems are officially supported e Apple Mac OS X v10 6 1 32 bit 64 bit e Fedora 15 32 bit 64 bit e Microsoft Windows 7 32 bit 64 bit e Oracle Linux 6 32 bit 64 bit Starting MySQL Workbench e Ubuntu 10 04 LTS 32 bit 64 bit e Ubuntu 11 04 32 bit 64 bit MySQL Workbench also has the following general requirements Note R On startup the application checks the OpenGL version and chooses between software and hardware rendering To determine which rendering method is being used open the Help menu and choose the System Info item Requirements for Linux The requirements for Linux are embedded within their respective packages Use the platform specific tool for example yum or apt to install the package and their dependencies Requirements for Microsoft Windows e Microsoft NET 4 0 Framework e Microsoft Visual C 2010 Redistributable Package x86 Note R For convenience the Windows libraries are available a
350. le_name Removes the role Copy SQL to Clipboard Currently not implemented 78 The SQL Scripts Panel To rename a role click the role name Then you will be able to edit the text All roles that have been defined are listed under Roles on the left side of the role editor Double clicking a role object opens the role editor docked at the bottom of the page Figure 7 5 Role Editor Select the role to which you wish to add objects You may drag and drop objects from the Physical Schemata to the Objects section of the role editor To assign privileges to a role select it from the Roles section then select an object in the Ob jects section In the Privileges section check the rights you wish to assign to this role For example a web_user role might have only SELECT privileges and only for database objects exposed through a web interface Creating roles can make the process of assigning rights to new users much easier 7 5 5 2 Adding Users To add a user double click the Add User icon This creates a user with the default name user1 Double clicking this user opens the user editor docked at the bottom of the application Inthe User Editor set the user s name and password using the Name and Password fields Assign one role or a number of roles to the user by selecting the desired roles from the field on the right and then clicking the lt button Roles may be revoked by moving them in the opposite directi
351. ll Python licenses unlike the GPL let you distribute a modified version without making your changes open source The GPL compatible licenses make it possible to combine Python with other software that is released under the GPL the others don t 2 According to Richard Stallman 1 6 1 is not GPL compatible because its license has a choice of law clause According to CNRI however Stallman s lawyer has told CNRI s lawyer that 1 6 1 is not incompatible with the GPL Thanks to the many outside volunteers who have worked under Guido s direction to make these releases possible B TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR ACCESSING OR OTHERWISE USING PYTHON PYTHON SOFTWARE FOUNDATION LICENSE VERSION 2 1 This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between the Python Software Foundation PSF and the Individual or Organization Licensee accessing and otherwise using this software Python in source or binary form and its associated documentation 2 Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Agreement PSF hereby grants Licensee a nonexclusive royalty free world wide license to reproduce analyze test perform and or display publicly prepare derivative works distribute and otherwise use Python alone or in any derivative version provided however that PSF s License Agreement and PSF s notice of copyright i e Copyright c 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 Python Software Foundation All Rights Reserved are retained in Python alone or in any
352. lp Display a help message and exit destination lt destination gt Connection information for the destination server in lt user gt lt passwa gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format dump d Display the GRANT statements to create the account rather than executing them In this case the utility does not connect to the destination server and no dest ination 311 option is needed format lt list_format gt f lt list_format gt Specify the user display format Permitted format values are grid csv tab and vertical The default is grid This option is valid only if 1 ist 311 is given force Drop the new user account if it exists before creating the new account Without this option it is an error to try to create an account that already exists include global privileges Include privileges that match base_user as well as base_user host list List all users on the source server With this option a destination server need not be specified quiet q Turn off all messages for quiet execution 311 Parsers NOTES source lt source gt Connection information for the source server in lt users lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format e verbose vV Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug e version D
353. lso be validated The steps that are performed include connects to the source DBMS checks the connection and retrieves the schema list from the source Schemata Selection Select the schemata that you want to migrate 10 7 3 Reverse Engineering This is an automated step where the actions include Connect to the source DBMS Reverse engineer the selected schemata and perform post processing if needed 10 7 4 Object Selection By default all table objects will be migrated Use the Show Selection button in order to disable individual table objects from being migrated 10 7 5 Migration Reverse engineered objects from the source RDBMS will be automatically converted to MySQL compatible objects Default datatype and default column value mappings will be used You will be able to review and edit the generated objects and column definitions in the next step which is Section 10 7 6 Manual Editing The steps performed include Migrating the selected objects and generating the SQL CREATE statements 10 7 6 Manual Editing The migrated objects may be reviewed and edited here You can manually edit the generated SQL before applying them to the target database Target schemas and tables may be renamed and column definitions may be changed by double clicking on them By default the All Objects View is loaded Other View options include Migration Problems and Column Mappings All Objects Shows all objects which can al
354. lt set may be resized to reveal the SELECT query that it originated from This query can be altered to show only columns you want which might mean adding a WHERE Clause In addition to the controls offered by the Results tabsheet the Live Editor tab features some additional controls These controls are highlighted in the following screenshot Figure 6 11 SQL Editor Live Editing Tabsheet Navigation Controls Bal FfaOBliCOeol sia 1 SELECT FROM world Country 100 3 29 1 Filter Q Code Name I SurfaceArea IndepYear Population LifeExpectancy GNP GNPO d ABW Aruba North America Caribbean 193 00 noe 103000 78 4 828 00 793 00 AFG Afghanistan Asia Southern and 652090 00 1919 22720000 45 9 5976 00 m AGO Angola Africa Central Africa 1246700 00 1975 12878000 38 3 6648 00 7984 00 AIA Anguilla North America Caribbean 96 00 Nut 8000 76 1 63 20 Hu ALB Albania Europe Southern Europe 28748 00 1912 3401200 71 6 3205 00 2500 00 AND Andorra Europe Southern Europe 468 00 1278 78000 83 5 1630 00 NULL ANT Netherlands A North America Caribbean 800 00 putt 217000 74 7 1941 00 HULL ARE United Arab E Asia Middle East 83600 00 1971 2441000 74 1 37966 00 36846 00 ARG Argentina South America South America 2780400 00 1816 37032000 75 1 340238 00 323310 00 ARM Armenia Asia Middle East 29800 00 1991 3520000 66 4 1813 00 1627 00 ASM American Samoa Oceania Polynesia 199 00 nu 68000 75 1 334 00 nuu ATA Antarctica Antarctica Antarctica 13120000 00
355. lt values for ENUM columns and will fail if an attempt is made to run the script on MySQL Server 90 Creating Tables 7 7 1 3 3 The Indexes Tab The Indexes tab holds all index information for your table Use this tab to add drop and modify indexes Figure 7 11 The Indexes Tab PRIMARY PRIMARY idx_fk_city_id Column iV address_id E address E address2 E distria EJ cty_id E postal_code E phone E last_update fafaf Columns Foreign Keys Triggers Partitioning Options Select an index by right clicking it The Index Columns section displays information about the selected index To add an index click the last row in the index list Enter a name for the index and select the index type from the list Select the column or columns that you wish to index by checking the column name in the Index Columns list You can remove a column from the index by removing the check mark from the appropriate column You can also specify the order of an index by choosing ASC or DESC under the Order column Create an index prefix by specifying a numeric value under the Length column You cannot enter a prefix value for fields that have a data type that does not support prefixing To drop an index right click the row of the index you wish to delete then select the Delete Selected Indexes menu item 91 Creating Tables 7 7 1 3 4 7 7 1 3 5 The Foreign Keys Tab The Foreign Keys tab is
356. lude the master 292 option to specify the existing master the new master 292 option to specify the candidate slave the slave to become the new master 291 mysqlrpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication OPTIONS mysqlrpladmin accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit candidates lt candidate slave connections gt Connection information for candidate slave servers for failover in the form lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt Valid only with failover command List multiple slaves in comma separated list demote master Make master a slave after switchover discover slaves login lt user password gt At startup query master for all registered slaves and use the user name and password specified to connect Supply the user and password in the form lt users lt passwad gt For example discover joe secret will use joe as the user and secret as the password for each discovered slave exec after lt script gt Name of script to execute after failover or switchover Script name may include the path exec before lt script gt Name of script to execute before failover or switchover Script name may include the path format lt format gt f lt format gt Display the replication health output in either grid default tab csv or vertical format log lt log_file gt Specify a log file to u
357. m page of the wizard Click Next to continue 168 Manage Server Instances Dialog Complete Setup On this page you finally assign a name to the server instance This name is used in various parts of the GUI to enable you to refer to this instance After setting a suitable name click Finish to save the instance 9 6 2 Manage Server Instances Dialog The Manage Server Instances dialog enables you to create delete and manage server instances The Connection tab of the wizard enables you to select a predefined connection to use for connecting to a server to be managed It is also possible to connect to a remote server using an SSH connection Figure 9 1 Manage Server Instances Dialog Server Instances World Instance Name World Connection System Profile MySQL Connection Pick a preset connection to the MySQL server instance The connection will be used for basic administration tasks such as managing users and viewing schema objects Connection world root 127 0 0 1 3306 lt Standard TCP IP gt X Eit Seded MySQL Server Version Connect and Check SSH Shell Connection mysql ssh ssh_private_key new osete Dupicate Moveup Nove Down 169 Manage Server Instances Dialog The System Profile tab of the wizard enables you to specify server specific information This is achieved primarily through selecting a Profile Template A Profile Template contains standard
358. master localhost 3333 Replication Topology Health 4 4 4 4 host port role state gtid_mode health 4 4 4 4 4 4 localhost 3333 MASTER UE ON OK localhost S382 SLAVE UP ON l OK localhost 3334 SLAVE UP ON I OK 4 4 4 4 4 done To view a detailed replication health report but with all of the replication health checks revealed use the verbose 293 option as shown below In this example we use vertical format to make viewing easier mysqlrpladmin master root localhost 3331 slaves root localhost 3332 root localhost 3333 root localhost 3334 verbose health Getting health for master localhost 3331 Attempting to contact localhost Success Attempting to contact localhost Success Attempting to contact localhost Success Attempting to contact localhost Success Replication Topology Health KREKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEEKEK dhe row KREKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEEKEK nosed heres llinesic Owes BISA role MASTER state WIE gtid_mode ON health OK version 5 6 5 m8 debug log master_log_file mysql bin 000001 master_log_ pos 571 294 mysql rpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication IT0_ Thread SOL_Thread Secs_Behind Remaining_Delay LO Error
359. mber of digit characters validate_password_policy_number validate_password password policy validate _password_special_char_count 1 validate_password required number of special characters 4 m Configuration File C PROGRA 1 MySQL ENTERP 1 Monitor mysql my ini As of MySQL Workbench 5 2 45 the Password Validation Plugin available as of MySQL Server 5 6 6 is supported in Workbench For information about what these settings mean see The Password Validation Plugin 9 7 3 The Accounts Tab The Accounts tab has two subtabs e Server Access Management e Schema Privileges Server Access Management enables you to list existing user accounts You can also add and delete accounts You can allocate administrative roles and also set account limits Schema Privileges enables you to set specific privileges on a user basis 176 The Accounts Tab Figure 9 7 Administrator Accounts Tab f i MYSQL Workbench gagar Admin mysqld 127 0 0 1 X File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help Task and Object Browser Users and Privileges MANAGEMENT 6 Server Status E Startup Shutdown bara Status and System Variables User From Host Login Administrative Roles Account Limits A Server Logs root localhost Server Access Management Schema Privileges User Accounts Select an Account to Edit CONFIGURATION Options File SECURITY o Users and Priv
360. meters from Existing Database Connection utilizes a pre existing connection as defined within MySQL Workbench Click Next to continue Database Connection This page enables you to select a connection to a specific database The settings entered previously have been concerned with the connection to the server required for administrative purposes This page is concerned with connecting to a specific database You can either launch the Manage DB Connections dialog or select a pre existing connection from a list The former is most useful if you have not created any connections If you must create a connection at this point refer to Section 6 6 Manage DB Connections Dialog After a connection has been selected click Next to continue Test DB Connection On this page MySQL Workbench tests your database connection and displays the results If an error occurs you are directed to view the logs which can be done by clicking the Show Logs button Management and OS Used to specify a remote management type and target operating system which is available when the Host Machine is defined as a remote host The SSH login based management option includes configuration entries for the Operating System and MySQL Installation Type SSH Configuration 167 New Server Instance Wizard If you specified a Remote Host on the Specify Host Machine page you will be presented with the Host SSH Connection page that enables you to use SSH for the co
361. mmand an mysqldbimport server root localhost import data bulk insert format csv data csv Source on localhost connected Importing data from data csv done To import both data and definitions from the util_test database importing the data using bulk insert statements from a file that contains SQL statements use this command mysqldbimport server root localhost import both bulk insert format sql data sql Source on localhost connected Importing definitions and data from data sql done 13 3 7 mysqldiff Identify Differences Among Database Objects This utility reads the definitions of objects and compares them using a diff like method to determine whether they are the same The utility displays the differences for objects that are not the same Use the notation db1 db2 to name two databases to compare or alternatively just db1 to compare two databases with the same name The latter case is a convenience notation for comparing same named databases on different servers The comparison may be run against two databases of different names on a single server by specifying only the server1 265 option The user can also connect to another server by specifying the server2 265 option In this case db1 is taken from server1 and db2 from server2 When a database pair is specified all objects in one database are compared to the corresponding objects in the other Any objects not
362. ms Use them to go online and learn more about MySQL Workbench Workbench Blog FAQs About Workbench Learn How To Code For Workbench Discuss Workbench Topics Contribute To Workbench 7 5 1 10 The Help Menu The Help menu has the following items Use them to go online and learn more about MySQL Workbench Help Index Opens a window showing the MySQL Workbench documentation Read search or print the documentation from this window MySQL com Website Opens your default browser on the MySQL Web site home page Workbench Product Page Opens your default browser on the MySQL Workbench product page System Info Displays information about your system which is useful when reporting a bug For more information see Section 7 5 1 10 1 System Info Report a Bug Opens a form to submit a bug to bugs mysql com and optionally attaches the log file to the report Additional information such as the MySQL Workbench version configuration and data 75 The Toolbar directory paths operating system and more are appended to the report but is made private so only those with proper permissions such as MySQL developers can view this helpful debugging information e View Reported Bugs Opens your default browser to see a list of current bugs Locate log file Opens up the directory that contains the MySQL Workbench log files e Check For Updates Opens the MySQL Workbench website using your default browser and checks for a newer
363. n test do lt test_database gt The database name to use for testing the replication setup If this option is not given no testing is done only error checking e verbose vV Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug e version Display version information and exit The login user for the master server must have the appropriate permissions to grant access to all databases and the ability to create a user account For example the user account used to connect to the master must have the WITH GRANT OPTION privilege The server IDs on the master and slave must be nonzero and unique The utility reports an error if the server ID is 0 on either server or the same on the master and slave Set these values before starting this utility EXAMPLES To set up replication between two MySQL instances running on different ports of the same host using the default settings use this command mysqlreplicate master root localhost 3306 sglave root localhost 3307 rpl user rpl rpl master on localhost connected slave on localhost connected Checking for binary logging on master Setting up replication daone Sh Sh SE OSE OE The following command uses pedant ic 287 to ensure that replication between the master and slave is successful if and only if both serve
364. n This is an easy way to begin setting up a new connection that differs only slightly from an existing one 6 6 1 The Password Storage Vault The vault provides a convenient secure storage for passwords used to access MySQL servers By using the vault you need not enter credentials every time MySQL Workbench attempts to connect to a server The vault is implemented differently on each platform Windows The vault is an encrypted file in the MySQL Workbench data directory This is where connections xml and related files are located The file is encrypted using a Windows API which performs the encryption based on the current user so only the current user can decrypt it As a result it is not possible to decrypt the file on any other computer It is possible to delete the file in which case all 47 Standard TCP IP Connection stored passwords are lost but MySQL Workbench will otherwise perform as expected You then must re enter passwords as required Mac OS X The vault is implemented using the Mac OS X Secure Keychain The keychain contents can be viewed using the Keychain Access app utility Linux The vault works by storing passwords using the gnome keyring daemon which must be running for password persistency to work The daemon is automatically started in GNOME desktops but normally is not in KDE and others The gnome keyring daemon can be used for password storage in MySQL Workbench on non GNOME platforms but must be start
365. n Message ColistionLstint_General_CS_aSmigratedto utf CollationLatiat_General_CS_ASmigratedto Default value is getdatel se type was chang Collation Latint_General_CS_ASmigratedte utft_g CollationLatint_General_CS_ASmigratedte utf8 g CotationLatini_ General CS_AS igratedto utf g Collation Latint_General_CS_ASmigratedte utf g Collation Latint_General_CS_ASmigratedta ut 8_g aa Create Target Results HumanResoere L Employee HireDate DATETIME a HumanResources Z Employee HireDate DATETIME HumanRescerc L Emoloyee SalariedFiag FLAG t z FumanResources L Employee SelariedFiag TINYINT a DATA MIGRATION HuranRescerc_ ij Employee Vacationtours SMALLINT El HumanResources L Employee VacetionHous SMALLINT ai Source coluren type BIT was migrated to TINYINT a SSSS8S5 5880588885558 MumanRescere Emolovee Sickieaven SMALLINT M MumanRecources Employee gt SickLeavelio SMALLINT JE m You can rename target schemas and tables and change colunn definisons by diding them once elected Dats Transter Setup Bulk Data Transfer REPORT z Migration Report Lock edited SQL Comment out Target Creation Options The schema may be created by either adding it to the target RDBMS creating an SQL script file or both 197 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 12 MySQL Workbench migration Target Creation Options Migration Task List Target Creation Options OVERVIEW
366. n Modules GAE Module to work with Workbench runtime grt objects get TOCE The root object in the internal Workbench object hierarchy grt modules Location where Workbench modules are available grt classes List of classes known to the GRT system mforms A Module to access the cross platform UI toolkit used in some Workbench features wb Utility module for creating Workbench plugins Type help module object function to get information about a module object or function Type dir object to get a quick list of methods an object has For an introductory tutorial on the Python language Visit http docs python org tutorial For general Python and library reference documentation visit http python org doc Within the Workbench Scripting Shell there are four tabs on the top of the left side panel Files Globals Classes and Modules Discussion of these additional tabs follows Note R An exception is thrown while attempting to use input or read from stdin 11 5 3 The Files Globals Classes and Modules Tabs The Workbench Scripting Shell features the Files Globals Classes and Modules tabs in addition to the main Shell tab The Files Tab Lists folders and files for user defined custom script files The categories are User Scripts User Modules and User Libraries The Globals Tab At the top of the window is a list that is used to select the starting point or root of the GRT Globals tree displayed beneath it By default
367. n Samoa Andorra Angola Anguilla Antigua and Barbuda United Arab Emirates Argentina Armenia Controls are provided to enable you to easily move over the results These are shown in the following screenshot Figure 6 10 SQL Editor Results Tabsheets Navigation Controls e lt o A a E K lgy lQ Fetched 239 records vd From left to right the controls are 55 Main Tabsheets e Move to first row Highlights the first row in the current result set e Move to previous row Highlights the previous row Move to next row Highlights the next row Move to last row Highlights the last row in the current result set Toggle wrapping of cell contents Toggles between truncating or wrapping the data in a cell e Sort Ascending Sorts the selected column in ascending order e Sort Descending Sorts the selected column in descending order e Export record set to an external file Writes a result set to a CSV HTML or XML file as required e Refresh Data from Data Source Refreshes the current result set from the data source e Search for substring within data Searches the data for the string entered in the search box 6 7 4 3 Live Editing Tabsheets It is possible to edit data in real time using the Live Editing tabsheets The live editor is the default view type so it will be displayed after running a SELECT query or by right clicking a table in the Schema Viewer and choosing Edit Data Table The top part of the resu
368. n key fk_table3_table41 with columns table4_idtabled referred table table4 with columns idtabled action on update NO ACTION action on delete NO ACTION removed foreign key fk_table3_table41 End of MySQL Workbench Report Differences Report Copy to Clipboard 7 8 Modeling Tutorials This chapter contains three short tutorials intended to familiarize you with the basics of MySQL Workbench These tutorials show how MySQL Workbench can be used both to design and to document databases Creating a database from scratch is the focus of Section 7 8 2 Using the Default Schema and exploring the graphic design capabilities of MySQL Workbench is touched upon in Section 7 8 3 Basic Modeling Both these tutorials show the database design capabilities of MySQL Workbench Importing an SQL data definition script is probably the quickest way to familiarize yourself with MySQL Workbench this tutorial makes use of the sakila database and emphasizes the use of MySQL Workbench as a documentation tool Examples taken from the sakila database are used throughout the documentation so doing this tutorial can be very helpful in understanding MySQL Workbench 140 Importing a Data Definition SQL Script 7 8 1 Importing a Data Definition SQL Script For this tutorial use the sakila database script which you can find by visiting the http dev mysql com doc page selecting the Other Docs tab and looking inthe Ex
369. n menu or the context sensitive menu Much of the MySQL Workbench functionality is implemented using plugins for example table view and routine editors are native C plugins as are the forward and reverse engineering wizards The Administrator facility in MySQL Workbench is implemented entirely as a plugin in Python A plugin can be a simple function that performs some action on an input and ends without further interaction with the user Examples of this include auto arranging a diagram or making batch changes to 215 Adding a GUI to a Plugin Using MForms objects To create a simple plugin the function must be located in a module and declared as a plugin using the plugin decorator of the ModuleInfo object Plugins can have an indefinite runtime such as when they are driven by the user through a graphical user interface This is the case for the various object editors and wizards within MySQL Workbench Although this latter type of plugin must be declared in the usual way only the entry point of the plugin will need to be executed in the plugin function as most of the additional functionality will be invoked as a result of the user interacting with the GUI Note E Reloading a plugin requires MySQL Workbench to be restarted Declare a plugin using this syntax ModuleInfo plugin plugin_name caption input groups pluginMenu These parameters are defined as follows plugin_name A unique name for the plugin It m
370. name COLUMN_DATATYPE Variable COLUMNS The column data type COLUMN_NOTNULL Variable COLUMNS Whether the column permits NULL values COLUMN _DEFAULTVALUE Variable COLUMNS The column default value 156 Supported Template Markers Marker text Type Data Dictionary or Parent Corresponding data Dictionary COLUMN_COMMENT Variable COLUMNS The column comment COLUMN_ ID Variable COLUMNS The column ID COLUMN_KEY_PART Variable COLUMNS if detailed The column key type COLUMN_NULLABLE Variable COLUMNS if detailed Can the column contain NULL values COLUMN_AUTO_INC Variable COLUMNS if detailed Does the column auto increment COLUMN_CHARSET Variable COLUMNS if detailed The column character set COLUMN_COLLATION Variable COLUMNS if detailed The column collation COLUMN_IS_USERTYPE Variable COLUMNS if detailed Whether the column is a user type INDICES_LISTING Section TABLES Marks the start and end of an INDICES_LISTING section the INDICES_ LISTING data dictionary becomes active in this section INDICES Section INDICES LISTING Marks the start and end of an INDICES section the INDICES data dictionary becomes active in this section INDEX_NAME Variable INDICES The index name INDEX_PRIMARY Variable INDICES Whether this is a primary key INDEX_UNIQUE Variable INDICES Whether this is a unique index INDEX_TYPE Variable INDICES The index type for exam
371. ncapsulate a set of primitive commands and bundles them so they can be used to perform macro operations with a single command They can be installed via MySQL Workbench or as a standalone package The utilities are written in Python available under the GPLv2 license and are extendable using the supplied library They are designed to work with Python 2 x greater than 2 6 227 Connection Parameters How do we access the MySQL Utilities There are two ways to access the utilities from within the MySQL Workbench Either use Plugins Start Shell for MySQL Utilities from the main Workbench toolbar or click the MySQL Utilities icon from the main Workbench page Both methods will open a terminal shell window and list the available commands Figure 13 1 Starting MySQL Utilities from Workbench MySQLWorkbench File Edit View Database Scripting Community Help e00 Start Shell for MySQL Utilities f Workbench Central we Welcome to MySQL Workbench Gy anam What s New in This Release Workbench Read about all changes in this MySQL Workbench release MySQL Doc MySQLBug Workbench Planet MySQL Workbench Scripting Shel MySQL Utilities Library Reporter Blogs Forums m Workspace SQL Development Data Modeling Server Administration Connect to existing databases and run A Create and manage models forward amp Configure your database server setup SQL Queries SQL scripts edit data and reverse engineer compare
372. nd failover Q quit R refresh H health G GTID Lists U UUIDs L log entries Up Down scroll If the user continues to press the g key the display will cycle through the three gtid lists If the list is longer than the screen permits as shown in the example above the scroll up and down help is also shown In this case if the user presses the down arrow the list will scroll down If the user presses the u key the list of UUIDs used in the topology are shown MySQL Replication Monitor and Failover Utility Failover Mode auto Next Interval Mon Mar 19 16 02 34 2012 Master Information Binary Log File Position Binlog_Deo_DB Binlog_Ignore_DB mysql bin 000001 571 GTID Executed Set 2A67DE00 2DA1 11E2 A711 00764F2BE90F 1 7 UUIDs je SSS SS SSS SS a ess dees Se SES 4b host jo iete role uuid e SSS SS SSS SSS a psss dos eS SS ES 4b localhost 2351 MASTER 55c65a00 71fd llel 9f80 ac64ef35c961 loeedlinosic 3332 SLAVE PSdds0s ssa lnd iMet ors0 de2z47 13 sb isc localniosialiNsss3 SLAVE 65ccbb38 71fd 1lel1 9f80 bda8146bdb0a Iplocalhostsics34 SLAVE 6dd6abf 4 71f d 1le1 9f80 d406a0117519 pee SSS SSeS Sn gees SSeS jee SS SS SS SS 4b Q quit R refresh H health G GTID Lists U UUIDs L log entries If once the master is detected as down and failover mode is auto or elect and there are viable candidate slaves the failover feature will engage automatically and the user will see the fail
373. nd small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work
374. nership or joint venture between CNRI and Licensee This License Agreement does not grant permission to use CNRI trademarks or trade name in a trademark sense to endorse or promote products or services of Licensee or any third party 8 By clicking on the ACCEPT button where indicated or by copying installing or otherwise using Python 1 6 1 Licensee agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of this License Agreement ACCEPT 341 Python License CWI LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 0 9 0 THROUGH 1 2 Gopyrignt wey VOvie Logs The Netherlands All rights reserved modify Permission to use copy Stichting Mathematisch Centrum Amsterdam and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation and that the name of Stichting Mathematisch Centrum or CWI not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific permission STICHTING MATHEMATISCH CENTRUM DISCLAIM THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WA FITNESS FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENT WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PER Licenses and Acknowledgements for Incor This section is an incomplete but grow wr
375. ng against iODBC then you must perform the following steps 1 Install the development files for iODBC Usually you just need to install the 1 ibiodbc devel or libiodbc2 dev package provided by your distribution 2 Inthe pyodbc source directory edit the setup py file and around line 157 replace the following line settings libraries append odbc with settings libraries append iodbc 3 Execute the following command as the root user CFLAGS iodbc config cflags LDFLAGS iodbc config libs python setup py install 10 1 2 ODBC Drivers For each RDBMS you need its corresponding ODBC driver which must also be installed on the same machine that MySQL Workbench is running on This driver is usually provided by the RDBMS manufacturer but in some cases they can also be provided by third party vendors or open source projects Operating systems usually provide a graphical interface to help set up ODBC drivers and data sources Use that to install the driver i e make the ODBC Manager see a newly installed ODBC driver You can also use it to create a data source for a specific database instance to be connected using a previously configured driver Typically you need to provide a name for the data source the DSN in addition to the database server IP port username and sometimes the database the user has access to If MySQL Workbench is able to locate an ODBC manager GUI for your system a Plugins Start ODBC Adm
376. ng or product endorsement purposes The source code for the md5 module contains the following notice Copyright C 1999 2002 Aladdin Enterprises All rights reserved This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution L Peter Deutsch ghost aladdin com ndependent implementation of MD5 RFC 1321 This code implements the MD5 Algorithm defined in RFC 1321 whose text is available at Noto VAMM eer org E ECE ECIS 2 IREE The code is derived from the text of the RFC including the test suite section A 5 but excluding the rest of Appendix A It does not include any code or documentation that is identified in the RFC as being copyrighted The original and principal author of
377. nistrator functionality can be broadly grouped into two main areas e Creating and managing server instances e Administration and configuration functions using a server instance The Workspace section of the Home window has an area for Server Administration tasks This section of the Workspace has the following action items e Server Administration e Server Administration icon e New Server Instance Manage Data Import Export e Manage Security e Manage Server Instances The following sections describe each of these action items 9 1 Server Administration This action item enables you to quickly connect to a predefined server instance and carry out administration functions on the associated server Clicking this item launches the Server Administration dialog from which you can select the server instance to which you wish to connect A new Admin tab will be launched which displays the Server Status and Configuration 165 New Server Instance Server Administration icon If you have already created server instances you can most quickly launch these by clicking the icon for the Server Instance you wish to access A new Admin tab will be launched which displays Server Status and Configuration For further details see Section 9 7 Server Administration and Configuration 9 2 New Server Instance This action item enables you to create a new server instance A server instance is primarily a combination of conne
378. nnection to the server instance This facility enables you to create a secure connection to remotely administer and configure the server instance You must enter the host name and user name of the account that will be used to log in to the server for administration and configuration activities If you do not enter the optional SSH Key for use with the server then you will be prompted for the password when the connection is established by MySQL Workbench Server itself It is not the same as the connection used to connect to a server for Note R This connection is to enable remote administration and configuration of the MySQL general database manipulation to start or stop the server or edit its configuration file Other administrative functions Note R You must use an SSH connection type when managing a remote server if you wish do not require an SSH connection Windows Management If a Windows server is used then the Windows configuration parameters must be set Windows management requires a user account with the required privileges to query the system status and to control services And read write access to the configuration file is needed to allow editing of the file Test Settings On the next page your settings are tested and the wizard reports back the results after attempting to connect to the server If an error occurs you are directed to view the logs which can be done by clicking the Show Logs button MySQL Workbench must kno
379. nown slaves or slaves that do not report their host and ip and to discover any other slaves connected to the master mysqlrpladmin master root localhost 3332 discover slaves login root health Discovering slaves for master at localhost 3332 Getting health for master localhost 3332 296 mysqlrplcheck Check Replication Prerequisites Replication Topology Health 4 4 4 4 4 4 host port role state gtid_mode health 4 4 4 4 localhost 3332 MASTER UP ON OK localhost S3531 SLAVE UP ON OK llocallingst S833 SivAvwaa Ue ON OK localhost S334 SLAVE UP ON OK 4 4 4 4 4 4 done 13 3 15 mysql rplcheck Check Replication Prerequisites This utility checks the prerequisites for replication between a master and a slave These checks called tests are designed to ensure a healthy replication setup The utility performs the following tests 1 Is the binary log enabled on the master 2 Are there binary logging exceptions such as _do_db or _ignore_db settings If so display them Does the replication user exist on the master with the correct privileges PF ow Are there server_id conflicts 5 Is the slave connected to this master If not display the master host
380. ns 5 1 and above It is also compatible with MySQL Server 5 0 but not every feature of 5 0 may be supported It does not support MySQL Server versions 4 x MySQL Workbench provides three main areas of functionality SQL Development Enables you to create and manage connections to database servers As well as enabling you to configure connection parameters MySQL Workbench provides the capability to execute SQL queries on the database connections using the built in SQL Editor This functionality replaces that previously provided by the Query Browser standalone application Data Modeling Enables you to create models of your database schema graphically reverse and forward engineer between a schema and a live database and edit all aspects of your database using the comprehensive Table Editor The Table Editor provides easy to use facilities for editing Tables Columns Indexes Triggers Partitioning Options Inserts and Privileges Routines and Views e Server Administration Enables you to create and administer server instances MySQL Workbench is available in two editions the Community Edition and the Standard Edition The Community Edition is available free of charge The Standard Edition provides additional Enterprise features such as database documentation generation at low cost For release notes detailing changes made in each release of MySQL Workbench see Appendix C MySQL Workbench and Utilities Change History Chapter
381. nsure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots hese requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If dentifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library nd can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in hemselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those ections when you distribute them as separate works But when you istribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based n the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of his License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the ntire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote iene FE Gr ey Oh wy Gr ir feb TS hits stews mC LE hc oeeie o eS Seeon eon GllanmmaicitSmommCconltesits your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not
382. nt jd SMALLINT 5S 4 amp customer Jd SMALLINT 5 staff_id TINYINT 3 rental_id INT 11 fk_payment_staff gt staff id TINYINT 3 address _id SMALLINT 5 store_id TINYINT 3 f address_id SMALLINT S We city_id SMALLINT S fk_staff_address The object notation style used in Figure 7 50 The sakila Database EER Diagram is Workbench PKs only This notation shows only primary keys and no other columns which is especially useful where space is at a premium The relationship notation is the default Crow s Foot As the connection lines show each table is related to at least one other table in the database with the exception of the film_text table Some tables have two foreign keys that relate to the same table For example the film table has two foreign keys that relate to the Language table namely fk_film_language_original and fk_film_language Where more than one relationship exists between two tables the connection lines run concurrently Identifying and nonidentifying relationships are indicated by solid and broken lines respectively For example the foreign key category_id is part of the primary key in the film_category table so its relationship to the category table is drawn with a solid line On the other hand in the city table the foreign key count ry_id is not part of the primary key so the connection uses a broken line 145 Printing 7
383. nts a dialog box that enables you to add and delete user defined data types Object Notation For information about this menu item see Section 7 5 1 5 3 The Object Notation Submenu Relationship Notation For information about this menu item see Section 7 5 1 5 4 The Relationship Notation Submenu Diagram Properties and Size Opens a diagram size dialog box that enables you to adjust the width or height of the canvas The unit of measure is pages the default value is two When you have tables with numerous columns use this menu item to increase the size of the EER Validation For information about this menu item see Section 7 5 1 5 2 The Validation Submenus Commercial Version Commercial version only Model Options Sets options at the model level These options should not be confused with the options that are set globally for the Workbench application and which are referred to as Workbench Preferences The available model options are a subset of the Workbench Preferences options For more information about Workbench Preferences see Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version This dialog window is found by navigating to the Model menu and choosing the DBDoc Model Reporting item Note R The DBDoc Model Reporting item is not available in the MySQL Workbench OSS version 72 Modeling Menus 7 5 1 5 2 7 5 1 5 3 Use this dialog
384. o display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit worst lt N gt If stats 279 is given limit index statistics to the worst N indexes The default value of Nis 5 if omitted You must provide connection parameters user host password and so forth for an account that has the appropriate privileges to read all objects accessed during the operation For the format 278 option the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 278 specifies the grid format An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES To check all tables in the employees database on the local server to see the possible redundant and d E A uplicate indexes use this command mysqlindexcheck server root localhost employees Source on localhost connected The following indexes are duplicates or redundant for table employees dept_emp REATE INDEX emp_no ON employees dept_emp emp_no USING BTREE may be redundant or duplicate of LTER TABLE employees dept_emp ADD PRIMARY KEY emp_no dept_no The following indexes are duplicates or redundant for table employees dept_manager REATE INDEX emp_no ON employees dept_manager emp_no USING BTREE may be red
385. o not export BLOB data e verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug e version Display version information and exit You must provide connection parameters user host password and so forth for an account that has the appropriate privileges to access all objects in the operation To export all objects from a source database the user must have these privileges SELECT and SHOW VIEW on the database as well as SELECT on the mysq1 database Actual privileges needed may differ from installation to installation depending on the security privileges present and whether the database contains certain objects such as views or events Some combinations of the options may result in errors when the export is imported later For example eliminating tables but not views may result in an error when a view is imported on another server For the format 256 export 256 and display 255 options the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 256 specifies the grid format An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES To export the definitions of the database dev from a MySQL server on the local host via port 3306 producing output consisting of CREATE statements use t
386. o the RDBMS Parameters advanced Hostname 127 0 0 1 Port 3306 Name or IP address of the server host TCP Username root Name of the user to connect with rt esr Default Schema world The schema that will be used as default sche The first page of the wizard enables you to set up a connection to the live database you wish to reverse engineer You can set up a new connection or select a previously created stored connection Typical information required for the connection includes host name user name and password After this information has been entered or you have selected a stored connection click the Next button to proceed to the next page 112 Reverse Engineering Figure 7 20 Connect to DBMS Connection Options Connect to DBMS and Fetch Information Connect to DBMS The following tasks will now be executed Please monitor the execution Press Show Logs to see the execution logs Connect to DBMS Retrieve Schema List from Database Execution Completed Successfully Fetch finished Review the displayed information to make sure that the connection did not generate errors then click Next The next page displays the schemata available on the server Click the check box or check boxes for any schemata you wish to process 113 Reverse Engineering Figure 7 21 Select Schemata Connection Options Select Schemata to Reverse Engineer Connect to DBMS Select Schemata
387. object comparison check skip row count Skip the row count check verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit width lt number gt Change the display width of the test report The default is 75 characters The login user must have the appropriate permissions to read all databases and tables listed 246 mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences For the difftype 245 option the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example dif ft ype d 245 specifies the differ type An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES Use the following command to compare the emp1 and emp2 databases on the local server and run all tests even if earlier tests fail mysqldbcompare serverl root localhost empl emp2 run all tests serverl on localhost connected Checking databases empl on serverl and emp2 on server2 WARNING Objects in server2 emp2 but not in serverl empl1 TRIGGER CEG PROCEDURE pl TABLE t1 VIEW v1 Defn Row Data Type Object Name DISEE Count Check FPUNCTILON TET pass TABLE departments pass pass FAIL Data differences found among rows empl departments emp2
388. ode Before working directly with a live server a connection must be created After a connection is established it is possible to execute SQL code directly on the server and manipulate the server using SQL code The starting point for embarking on SQL Development work is the SQL Development area of the Home window which has the following action items e Open Connection to start Querying e New Connection e Edit Table Data Edit SQL Script e Manage Connections The following sections describe each of these action items Note R The SQL Development facility in MySQL Workbench provides the functionality that was formerly available in MySQL Query Browser 6 1 Open Connection to Start Querying Clicking this action item launches the Connect to Database Wizard From this wizard you can select a predefined connection A new SQL Editor tab is launched If you already have created a connection to a database it will appear in this panel as an icon Double clicking the icon directly launches an SQL Editor tab and connects you to the database as defined by the connection 45 New Connection To read more about the SQL Editor see Section 6 7 SQL Editor 6 2 New Connection Clicking the New Connection action item launches the Manage DB Connections wizard This wizard enables you to create a new connection Note that the wizard when launched from here does not display existing connections it only enables you to create a
389. off copying any or all of the objects as well as not copying the data To exclude specific objects by name use the exclude 250 option with a name in db obj format or you can supply a search pattern For example exclude db1 trigi 250 excludes the single trigger and exclude trig_ 250 excludes all objects from all databases having a name that begins with trig and has a following character By default the utility creates each table on the destination server using the same storage engine as the original table To override this and specify the storage engine to use for all tables created on the destination server use the new storage engine 251 option If the destination server supports the new engine all tables use that engine To specify the storage engine to use for tables for which the destination server does not support the original storage engine on the source server use the default storage engine 250 option The new storage engine 251 option takes precedence over default storage engine 250 if both are given If the new storage engine 251 or default storage engine 250 option is given and the destination server does not support the specified storage engine a warning is issued and the server s default storage engine setting is used instead By default the operation uses a consistent snapshot to read the source databases To change the locking mode use the locking 250 option with a locking ty
390. oftware Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by 328 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHE
391. om of the application Warning messages are displayed on the left side of this window and the tests performed are displayed on the right The following sections outline the tasks performed by the validation modules 7 10 1 General Validation The following list names the general validation types and gives examples of specific violations e Empty Content Validation e A table with no columns e A routine or view with no SQL code defined A routine group containing no routines 146 MySQL Specific Validation A table view or routine not referenced by at least one role A user with no privileges e Objects such as tables that do not appear on at least one EER Diagram e Table Efficiency Validation e A table with no primary key A primary key that does not use an integer based data type e A foreign key that refers to a column with a different data type Duplicated Identifiers Validation e Duplicate object names e Duplicate role or user names Duplicate index or routine names e Consistency Validation Use of the same column with columns of differing data types e Logic Validation A foreign key that refers to a column other than the primary key in the source table e Any object that is object is either read only or write only by role definition Placeholder objects left over from reverse engineering 7 10 2 MySQL Specific Validation The following list names the MySQL specific validation types and gives example
392. on Right clicking a user opens a pop up menu The items in the menu function as described in Section 7 5 5 1 Adding Roles 7 5 6 The SQL Scripts Panel Use the SQL Scripts panel to load and modify SQL scripts If you created your project from an SQL script and plan to create an ALTER script you may want to add the original script here since it will be needed to create an ALTER script For more information see Section 7 7 10 1 2 Altering a Schema 7 5 7 The Model Notes Panel Use the Model Notes panel to write project notes Any scripts or notes added will be saved with your project 7 5 8 The History Palette Use the History palette to review the actions that you have taken Left clicking an entry opens a pop up menu with the item Copy History Entries to Clipboard Choose this item to select a single entry You 79 The Model Navigator Panel can select multiple contiguous entries by pressing the Shift key and clicking the entries you wish to copy Select noncontiguous entries by using the Control key Only actions that alter the MySQL model or change an EER diagram are captured by the History palette 7 5 9 The Model Navigator Panel Docked at the top left of the application is the Model Navigator or Bird s Eye panel This panel provides an overview of the objects placed on an EER diagram canvas and for this reason it is most useful when an EER diagram is active Any objects that you have placed on
393. on and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are commercial computer software or commercial technical data pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such the use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract and to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software License December 2007 Oracle USA Inc 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications which may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of this software Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates MySQL is a trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates and shall not be used without Oracle s express written authorization Other names may be trademarks of their re
394. onships in the diagram 11 2 Modules In the GRT Modules are libraries containing a list of functions that are exported for use by code in other modules scripts or Workbench itself Modules can currently be written in C Lua or Python but the data types used for arguments and the return value must be GRT types GRT modules are similar to Python modules but are imported from the built in grt module instead of directly from an external file The list of modules loaded into the grt module is obtained from grt modules Modules can be imported in Python using statements such as from grt modules import WbModel To export functions as a module from Python code you must carry out the following steps 1 The source file must be located in the user modules folder This path is displayed in the Workbench Scripting Shell with the label Looking for user plugins in It is also possible to install the file using the main menu item Scripting Install Plugin Module File 214 Plugins 2 The source file name must have the extension _grt py for example my_module_grt py 3 Some module metadata must be defined This can be done using the DefineModule function from the wb module from wb import ModuleInfo DefineModule name MyModule author Your Name version 1 0 4 Functions to be exported require their signature to be declared This is achieved using the export decorator in the previously created Modulelnfo obj
395. onsole quits it deregisters itself from the master If this process is broken the user may override the registration check by using the force 273 option EXAMPLES To launch the utility you must specify at a minimum the master 274 option and either the discover slaves login 273 option or the slaves 274 option The option option can be 274 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring and failover used in conjunction with the s laves 274 option to specify a list of known slaves or slaves that do not report their host and ip and to discover any other slaves connected to the master An example of the user interface and some of the report views are shown in the following examples STATUS view If there are multiple GTIDs listed the utility shall display to indicate there are additional GTIDs to view You can view the complete list of GTIDs Note R The GTID Executed Set will display the first GTID listed in the SHOW MASTER on the GTID display screens The default interface will display the replication health report like the following In this example the log file is enabled A sample startup command is shown below mysqlfailover master root localhost 3331 discover slaves login root MySQL Replication Monitor and Failover Utility Failover Mode auto Next Interval Mon Mar 19 15256 02 2012 Master Information Binary Log File Postt ion Binlog Do De Binlog Ignore Diz mysq
396. ontext Help Index F1 Command Option question on Mac All OS X EER Diagram Mode In the EER Diagram view a number of other keyboard shortcuts are available Table 12 10 EER diagram mode keyboard shortcuts Function Keyboard Shortcut Selection tool Escape Hand tool H Delete tool Layer tool Note tool Image tool a Table tool View tool Routine Group tool Non ldentifying Relationship 1 1 Non ldentifying Relationship 1 n Identifying Relationship 1 1 Identifying Relationship 1 n Identifying Relationship n m Relationship Using Existing Columns olal p olni ilo lt a 225 226 Chapter 13 MySQL Utilities Table of Contents 13 1 13 2 13 3 13 4 Introductio Nere a ce cumccen sade mar adneuenrsnun iach odreuaesenteGueeadeniceteccunsaeecapeeaeataae 227 13 1 1 Introduction to MySQL Utilities 2 0 eee cece eee neen eee e ee ee aa ea ee eeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaaes 227 13 1 2 CONNECTION Parameter S 20 ccc cece c cc eece ce ecce es ceceeeeeseeeeeeecesseceeseeesseeceseeeeeaeesseseeseeeeseeees 228 13 1 3 Introduction to extending the MySQL Utilities 2 0 cece eeee eter esse ae aaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaea 229 Commands isein cease en Gees dow dans du een eee ce dde Suuencuees dey esidsauteGuedtuianedsanieet losuacecudenauaecaee 235 13 2 1 mysql utilities
397. onvenience notation for comparing same named databases on different servers The comparison may be run against two databases of different names on a single server by specifying only the server1 246 option The user can also connect to another server by specifying the server2 246 option In this case db1 is taken from server1 and db2 from server2 Those objects considered in the database include tables views triggers procedures functions and events A count for each object type can be shown with the vv option The check is performed using a series of steps called tests By default the utility stops on the first failed test but you can specify the run ali tests 246 option to cause the utility to run all tests regardless of their end state Note Using run ali tests 246 may produce expected cascade failures For example if the row counts differ among two tables being compared the data consistency will also fail The tests include the following 1 Check database definitions A database existence precondition check ensures that both databases exist If they do not no further processing is possible and the run all tests 246 option is ignored 2 Check existence of objects in both databases The test for objects in both databases identifies those objects missing from one or another database The remaining tests apply only to those objects that appear in both databases To skip this test use the skip object
398. ool changes the contents of the toolbar that appears immediately below the main menu bar When the Views pointer is active this toolbar contains a schemata list and a color chart list Use these lists to select the appropriate schema and color accent for the new view Make sure that you associate the new view with a database The color of your view can be changed using the Properties palette Create a view by clicking anywhere on the EER Diagram canvas This creates a new view with the default name view1 To revert to the default mouse pointer click the arrow icon at the top of the vertical toolbar 102 Creating Routines and Routine Groups Right clicking a view opens a pop up menu With the exception of the delete item these menu items function as described in Section 7 7 3 1 Adding Views to the Physical Schemata The behavior of the delete option is determined by your MySQL Workbench options settings For more information see Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab 7 7 3 3 The View Editor To invoke the view editor double click a view object on the EER Diagram canvas or double click a view in the Physical Schemata section on the MySQL Model page This opens the view editor docked at the bottom of the application Double clicking the title bar undocks the editor Do the same to redock it Any number of views may be open at the same time Each additional view appears as a tab at the top of the view editor There are three tabs at
399. op up menu With the exception of the delete option and rename options these menu options function as described in Section 7 7 4 2 1 Adding Routine Groups to the Physical Schemata There is no rename option and the behavior of the delete option is determined by your MySQL Workbench options settings For more information see Section 5 4 4 The Model Tab The Routine Group Editor To invoke the routine group editor double click a routine group object on the EER Diagram canvas or double click a routine group in the Physical Schemata section on the MySQL Model page This opens the routine group editor docked at the bottom of the application Double clicking the title bar undocks the editor Do the same to redock it Any number of routine groups may be open at the same time Each additional routine group appears as a tab at the top of the routine editor Routine group and Privileges tabs appear at the bottom of the routine editor Navigate between different tabs using the mouse or from the keyboard by pressing Control Alt Tab The Routine Groups Tab Use the Routine Groups tab of the routine groups editor to perform the following tasks e Rename the routine group using the Name field e Add routines to the group by dragging and dropping them Add comments to the routine group 7 7 4 2 3 2 The Privileges Tab The Privileges tab of the routine group editor functions in exactly the same way as the Privileges tab of the table edi
400. options use one of the following values with the format 278 option grid default Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor e cSV Display output in comma separated values format e tab Display output in tab separated format sql print SQL statements rather than a list vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysq1 monitor Note The best 278 and worst 279 lists cannot be printed as SQL statements OPTIONS mysqlindexcheck accepts the following command line options e help Display a help message and exit e best lt N gt If stats 279 is given limit index statistics to the best N indexes The default value of Nis 5 if omitted format lt index_format gt f lt index_format gt Specify the index list display format for output produced by stats 279 Permitted format values are grid csv tab sql and vertical The default is grid e Server lt SOurce gt Connection information for the server in lt user gt lt passwa gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format 278 mysqlindexcheck Identify Potentially Redundant Table Indexes NOTES show drops d Display DROP statements for dropping indexes show indexes i Display indexes for each table Skip S Skip tables that do not exist Stats Show index performance statistics verbose v Specify how much information t
401. organized in much the same fashion as the Indexes tab and adding or editing a foreign key is similar to adding or editing an index Figure 7 12 The Foreign Keys Tab Foreign Keys Foreign Key Name Referenced Table Foreign Key Optons fk_customer_address sakila address On Update fk_customer_store sakila store S i On Delete L a Foreign Key Comment eel Foreign Keys Marre sell ie Mme sell ry To add a foreign key click the last row in the Foreign Key Name list Enter a name for the foreign key and select the column or columns that you wish to index by checking the column name in the Column list You can remove a column from the index by removing the check mark from the appropriate column Under Foreign Key Options choose an action for the update and delete events The options are e RESTRICT e CASCADE e SET NULL e NO ACTION To drop a foreign key right click the row you wish to delete then select the Delete Selected FKs menu item To modify properties of a foreign key select it and make the desired changes The Triggers Tab The Triggers tab opens a field for editing an existing trigger or creating a new trigger Create a trigger as you would from the command line 92 Creating Tables Figure 7 13 The Triggers Tab Triggers 1 Trigger DDL Statements 2 DELIMITER 3 4 USE sakila ss B 6 CREATE 7 DEFINER root localhost 8 TRIGGER sakila customer_create
402. ort port startup variables to specify the correct hostname and ip port of the slave If these are missing or report the incorrect information the slaves health may not be reported correctly or the slave may not be listed at all The discover slaves feature ignores any slaves it cannot connect to The utility permits the user to demote a master to a slave during the switchover operation The demote master 292 option tells the utility to once the new master is established make the old master a slave of the new master This permits rotation of the master role among a set of servers The utility permits the user to specify an external script to execute before and after the switchover and failover commands The user can specify these with the xec be fore 292 and exec after 292 options The return code of the script is used to determine success thus each script must report 0 Success to be considered successful If a script returns a value other than 0 the result code is presented in an error message The utility permits the user to log all actions taken during the commands The 10g 292 option requires a valid path and file name of the file to use for logging operations The log is active only when this option is specified The option 1og age 292 specifies the age in days that log entries are kept The default is seven 7 days Older entries are automatically deleted from the log file but only if the log 292 option is spec
403. osen from the When Deleting Physical Model Figures in Diagram section Use the Model tab to set the default value for various object names and the primary key data type The following table shows the object names and their default values Object Name Default Value PK Column Name idstables PK Column Type INT 41 The MySQL Tab Object Name Default Value Column Name stablescol Column Type VARCHAR 45 FK Name fksstable_sdtables Foreign Key Column Name Sstable _ scolumn ON UPDATE NO ACTION ON DELETE NO ACTION Associative Table Name sstable _has_ dtable The PK Column Name PK Column Type Column Name and Column Type values are the defaults used by the table editor and only function on Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X The others are the default names used when using the relationship tools on an EER diagram Within object values items enclosed by percentage signs are variables Their meanings are as follows Stables The table associated with the object e stable The source table associated with the object e Sdtable The destination table associated with the object e column The column associated with the object Legitimate values for the foreign key update or delete rules are RESTRICT CASCADE SET NULL NO ACTION default For more information about these actions see Section 7 7 1 3 4 The Foreign Keys Tab 5 4 5 The MySQL
404. ot connect to The discover slaves feature is run automatically on each interval The utility permits the user to specify an external script to execute before and after the switchover and failover commands The user can specify these with the xec be fore 273 and exec after 273 options The return code of the script is used to determine success thus each script must report 0 Success to be considered successful If a script returns a value other than 0 the result code is presented in an error message The utility also permits the user to specify a script to be used for detecting a downed master or an application level event to trigger failover This can be specified using the xec fail check 273 271 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring and failover option The return code for the script is used to invoke failover A return code of 0 indicates failover should not take place A return code other than 0 indicates failover should take place This is checked at the start of each interval if a script is supplied The timeout option is not used in this case and the script is run once at the start of each interval The utility permits the user to log all actions taken during the commands The 10g 273 option requires a valid path and file name of the file to use for logging operations The log is active only when this option is specified The option 1og age 273 specifies the age in days that log entri
405. oumn Target Type Target Selection HumanResoerc_ ij Department Departmento il D Oepetment DepartmemiD SMALLINT Bee MumanRescarc _ Department Name NAME 100 5 Latin General i depertment o name VARCHAR 1D3 HuranRescere L Deparment GroupName NAME tOD I Latint_General HumanResources C Department amp GroupName VARCHAR 100 Y Schemata Selection HumanReseare 7 Department wocifiedDate DATETIME i HumanResources C Department MacifiedDate TIMESTAMP S Reverse Engineer Source HumanRescerc_ L Emolovee EnployeelD INT HumanResources 7 Employee P EmployeelD INT HumanRescere_ ij Employee NationslEN NVARCHAR 3O Latind General Employee NatonsDN VARCHAR 30 OBJECT MIGRATION HumanRescerc i Employee ContactiD INT E L Employee ContactiD Int S Source Objects HumanRescerc Employee LagitD NVARCHAR S12 i Latini General HumanResources Employee LogieiD VARCHAR SIZ Z Migration HumanResowe Employee Manager INT HumanResources ir Employee Manage NT HumanResourc_ L Emoloyee Tale NVARCHAR L09 Latini General HumanResources L Employee Title VARCHAR LO0 HumanRescere_ Employee BirthDate DATETIME HumanResources L Employee BirthOate DATETIME Target Creation Options HumanRescere Employee Manitalstatus NCHAR Z Latin Generel MamanRescurces Employee Mectalstetus CHAR Z Creste Schemata Humankesowe Employee Gender NCHAR 2 Latint_General_ HumanResaurces C Employee Gender cHaRt2 i GGGSEES8EeE8 gt as Marato
406. ource and target RDBMS servers Migration Make sure you have privileges to read schema information and data from the source database and create objects and inserting data in the target MySQL server Manual Editing The max_allowed_packet option in the target MySQL server must be enough to fit Target Creation Options the largest field value to be copied from source especially BLOBs and large TEXT fields Create Schemata Create Target Results The wizard supports migrating from specific database systems but a generic RDBMS support is also provided The generic support is capable of migrating tables from many RDBMS that can be connected to using ODBC DATA MIGRATION although certain type mappings may not be performed correctly A manual mapping step is provided for Data Transfer Setup reviewing and fixing any migration problems that could occur Bulk Data Transfer REPORT Migration Report Start Migration It describes the prerequisites and requirements that should be understood before proceeding further The Open ODBC Administrator option will load odbcad32 exe and is used to confirm that the ODBC Driver for SQL Server is installed and to make configuration changes if needed Click Start Migration to continue Source Selection The source is the RDBMS that will be migrated to MySQL Define the connection parameters and related information here by first choosing the Database System as the other parameters will change
407. over messages appear When failover is complete the interface returns to monitoring replication health after 5 seconds The following shows an example of failover occurring Failover starting Candidate slave localhost 3332 will become the new master Preparing candidate for failover Creating replication user if it does not exist Stopping slaves Performing STOP on all slaves Switching slaves to new master Starting slaves Performing START on all slaves Checking slaves for errors Failover complete Discovering slaves for master at localhost 3332 Failover console will restart in 5 seconds After the failover event the new topology is shown in the replication health report MySQL Replication Monitor and Failover Utility Failover Mode auto Next Interval Mon Mar 19 16 05 12 2012 Master Information Binary Log File Position Binilog_De_DB Binlog_Ignore_DB niyo loin OOOO sabi GTID Executed Set ZAG DEOO gt 2 DATS Ine A il OO G4h2 BESO HE lS een mysqlindexcheck Identify Potentially Redundant Table Indexes host port I role state gtid_mode health 4 4 4 4 4 4 tecallinosic S332 MENSimaR WE ON OK tecailinosic S383 Sivas Ue ON OK tecallinosic S334 Silas UE ON Oks 4 4 4 4 4 4 Q quit R refresh H health G GTID Lists
408. pare and user accounts browse status variables manage database objects ses Synchronize schemas report and server logs ee Open Existing EER Model le alr Neel al eo ncdanmeen 3 Edit SQL Script B Create EER Model From Existing Database E Ma Security j Manage Connections Eeh acai yg Manage Server Instances 2 On the Physical Schemata toolbar click the button to add a new schema This will create a new schema and display a tabsheet for the schema In the tabsheet change the name of the schema to dvd_collection by typing into the field called Name Ensure that this change is reflected on the Physical Schemata tab Now you are ready to add a table to your schema 26 Creating a Model Figure 4 14 Getting Started Tutorial New Schema T MYSQL Workbenc MySQL Model x File Edt View Arrange Model Oatebase Plugins Scripting Community Help Een EAEEE aa Model Overnew mydb 8 dvd_collection i G amp Boo TINYINT 1 E SOOLE TINYINT reo oecma 0 D FLOATS FLOAT amp FLOATe DOUBLE NT TANYINTIA amp wr SMALLINT 6 NTS MEDIUMINT b INTs wT amp 78 BIGINTQO WE Gi INTEG NT E LONG MEDIUMBLOB LONG MEDIUMTEXT D LONG MEDIUMTEXT Ps MIDOL MEDIUMINT B Nume DecmMaL 10 User Types In the Physical Schemata section double click Add Table This will automatically load the table editor with the default table name being tablet In the table editor change the name
409. part of a larger software package but no copy of one or more of the ont Software typefaces may be sold by itself ny HE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT ARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING UT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY ITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT E COPYRIGHI PATENT TRADEMARK OURS OTHER RLGEL TN O EVENT SHALL BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE TABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY NCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL R CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF ONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF HE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR ROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE Fal r OY Te el ey eal los Except as contained in this notice the names of Gnome the Gnome Foundation and Bitstream Inc shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Font Software without prior written authorization from the Gnome Foundation or Bitstream Inc respectively For further information contact fonts at gnome dot org A 4 Boost Library License The following software may be included in this product Boost C Libraries Use of any of this software is governed by the terms of the license below Boost Software License Version 1 0 August 17th 2003 Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person or organization obtaining a
410. pe value Use a value of no locks to turn off 249 mysqldbcopy Copy Database Objects Between Servers locking altogether or lock all to use only table locks The default value is snapshot Additionally the utility uses WRITE locks to lock the destination tables during the copy You can include replication statements for copying data among a master and slave or between slaves The rp1 251 option permits you to select from the following replication statements to include in the export master Include the CHANGE MASTER statement to start a new slave with the current server acting as the master This executes the appropriate STOP and START slave statements The STOP SLAVE statement is executed at the start of the copy and the CHANGE MASTER followed by the START SLAVE statements are executed after the copy slave Include the CHANGE MASTER statement to start a new slave using the current server s master information This executes the appropriate STOP and START slave statements The STOP SLAVE statement is executed at the start of the copy and the CHANGE MASTER followed by the START SLAVE statements follow the copy To include the replication user in the CHANGE MASTER statement use the rpl user 251 option to specify the user and password If this option is omitted the utility attempts to identify the replication user In the event that there are multiple candidates or the user requires a password the utility aborts with an e
411. pies THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder A 8 DockPanel Suite License The following software may be included in this product DockPanel Suite The MIT License Copyright c 2007 Weifen Luo email weifenluo yahoo com Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
412. ple PRIMARY INDEX_KIND Variable INDICES The index kind INDEX_COMMENT Variable INDICES The index comment INDEX_ID Variable INDICES The index ID INDEX_COLUMNS Section INDICES Marks the start and end of an INDEX_COLUMNS section the INDEX_COLUMNS data dictionary becomes active in this section INDEX_COLUMN_NAME Variable INDEX_ COLUMNS The index column name INDEX_COLUMN_ORDER Variable INDEX_COLUMNS The index column order for example ascending descending INDEX_COLUMN_COMMENT Variable INDEX_COLUMNS The index comment INDEX_KEY_BLOCK_SIZE Variable INDEX_COLUMNS if The index key block size detailed REL_LISTING Section TABLES Marks the start and end of a REL_LISTING section the 157 Creating a Custom Template Marker text Type Data Dictionary or Parent Corresponding data Dictionary REL_LISTING data dictionary becomes active in this section REL Section REL_LISTING Marks the start and end of a REL section the REL data dictionary becomes active in this section REL_NAME Variable REL FOREIGN KEYS The relationship name REL_TYPE Variable REL FOREIGN_KEYS The relationship type REL_PARENTTABLE Variable REL FOREIGN_KEYS The relationship parent table REL_CHILDTABLE Variable REL FOREIGN_KEYS The relationship child table REL_CARD Variable REL FOREIGN_KEYS The relationship cardinality FOREIGN_KEY_ID Variable REL Foreign key ID FOREIGN_KEYS Section SCHEMATA Marks th
413. priate column in the Referenced Column column To delete the relationship between two tables click the line joining the tables and then press Control Delete Experiment with the other tools on the vertical toolbar Delete a relationship by selecting the eraser tool and clicking the line joining two tables Create a view add a text object or add a layer Save your changes to a MySQL Workbench Models file mwb extension by choosing Save from the File menu or by using the keyboard command Control S 7 8 4 Documenting the sakila Database This chapter highlights the capabilities of MySQL Workbench as a documentation tool using the sakila database as an example This is a sample database provided by MySQL that you can find by visiting the http dev mysql com doc page selecting the Other Docs tab and looking in the Example Databases section An EER diagram is an invaluable aid to a quick understanding of any database There is no need to read through table definition statements glancing at an EER diagram can immediately indicate that various tables are related You can also see how tables are related what the foreign keys are and what the nature of the relationship is 7 8 4 1 A PNG File of the sakila Database Find following an EER digram showing all the tables in the sakila database This image was created using the File Export Export as PNG menu item 144 Documenting the sakila Database Figure 7 50 The sak
414. project and have not saved those changes an asterisk appears in the title bar following the model name When you save a model it is saved as a MySQL Workbench file with the extension mwb Use the Import menu item to import a MySQL data definition DDL script file For example this might be a file created by issuing the command mysqldump no data MySQL Workbench handles the script as follows If the script does not contain a CREATE DATABASE db_name statement the schema objects are copied to the default schema mydb If the script creates a database a new tab bearing the database name is added to the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page If the script contains data the data is ignored 66 Modeling Menus For details about importing a DDL script see Section 7 7 9 1 Reverse Engineering Using a Create Script Under the Import submenu you can also import DBDesigner4 files There are variety of items under the Export submenu You may generate the SQL statements necessary to create a new database or alter an existing one For more information about these menu items see Section 7 7 10 1 Forward Engineering Using an SQL Script Using the Export submenu you can also export an EER diagram as a PNG SVG PDF or Postscript file For an example of a PNG file see Figure 7 50 The sakila Database EER Diagram The Page Setup menu item enables you to set the paper size orientation and mar
415. provided with the distribution Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the name of Google Inc nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE End A 22 Pixman License The following software may be included in this product Pixman Pixman v0 21 2 The following is the MIT license agreed upon by most contributors Copyright holders of new code should use this license statement where possible They may also add themselves to the list below Cejowienelne 1S See Wee WS alse Oen Creig Copyright 1987 1988 1989 Digital Equipment Corporation Copyright 199
416. provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of OpenLink Software Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission Tj 4 T H n SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS S AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO HE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR URPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL OPENLINK OR CONTRIBUTORS E LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY R CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF UBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS ERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN ONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE RISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF HE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE gt na Z H i Ee el we los be iS A 15 Libiconv License The following software may be included in this product Libiconv You are receiving a copy of the GNU LIBICONV Library The terms of the Oracle license do NOT apply to the GNU LIBICONV Library it is licensed under the following license separately from the Oracle programs you receive If you do not wish to install this program you may delete tcony dll or libicony files This component is
417. pt Executes the given Workbench Python script at startup tiel SCDE oaan Executes the given Workbench Lua script at startup script scriptfile Executes the given Workbench script file at startup quit when done swrendering nelly Seeacece HNC Eecoeeocees verbose v WEE soanaes GEEVErSiON 2 help ig srs Quits Workbench once the given script finishes executing Force the canvas to use software rendering instead of OpenGL Do not display the splash screen Instruction to save messages other debug info to file Print verbose output in the GRT Shell Print the version information Print the GRT version information soos Prime CLS Cmicjoure The MySQL Workbench help output includes a version number a usage message and the option descriptions Use the swrendering option if your video card does not support OpenGL 1 5 The version option can be used to display the MySQL Workbench version number The grt version can be used to display the GRT Generic RunTime shell version number The other options are self explanatory 5 Note When using the help and version command line options that display output to a console window be sure that you pipe the output through the more command Otherwise nothing will be displayed 3 3 3 Uninstalling MySQL Workbench on Windows The method for uninstalling MySQL Workbench depends on how you installed MySQL Workbench in the fi
418. py modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice hall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software n HE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF NY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED OQ THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A ARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT HALL THE DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE PH a Lgl I Except as contained in this notice the name of Daniel Veillard shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from him A 18 Libzip License The following software may be included in this product oaia Copyright C 1999 2008 Dieter Baron and Thomas Klausner The authors can be contacted at lt libzip nih at gt Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions remets 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and t
419. queries And with the option to either send these queries to the system s clipboard or to the SQL Editor window Right clicking on a field within a cell in the SQL Editor offers the Copy Row Content and Copy Field Content options and includes the option to leave the chosen values unquoted All of the MySQL Workbench Export options include the option to export as SQL 8 2 Generating PHP code MySQL Workbench can be used to generate PHP code with the bundled PHP plugin by using the Plugins Utilities Copy as PHP Code menu option Below is an example scenario for how to create PHP code It is a SELECT statement and optionally uses SET to set variables SQL variables will generate PHP variables in the code which will then be bounded to the statement before execution 1 Generate or type in the desired SQL query into the SQL editor This example will use the sakila database with the query being SET last_update 2006 02 14 SELECT actor_id first_name last_name last_update FROM actor WHERE last_update gt last_update 2 While in the SQL editor choose Plugins Utilities Copy as PHP Code Iterate SELECT Results from the main menu This will copy PHP code to the clipboard 3 Paste the code to the desired location Additionally PHP code that connects to the MySQL database can also be generated by choosing Plugins Utilities Copy as PHP Code Connect to Server 163 Generating P
420. r nii an na ce tetanic E 120 T8 Modeling TUtOM al Siu sscedcees sanecce sanecectinnneeut dawenceeseuaeeee dan ee EKE REENE EERO KEE REEE T PREE NA EERE eet EENEN Ri 140 7 8 1 Importing a Data Definition SQL Script sssssesssesssssssssssrrrirsresssrrtnrrtrnsstsnnrntrnrssssnnrrnent 141 7 8 2 Using the Default Schema senseseesseesessssesssrerrtrsrerssttnntrrrerssttrntrrrtrsessnernrenneessntrnrennent 142 1 8 3 Basic Mod ling seerosninonneieri is in evened deceac sb udenie eunedicgutvedseaddeceacsaunee 143 7 8 4 Documenting the sakila Database cececccccceeeeeeeeeeeee ee aeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeneeseeeeeeaeaaenees 144 FQ PAING eener i AET E E E TA AONE Geadenes EAA 146 7 91 Printing Options saesson einda iiaei ena kainai ee adaa a aa iaai den aai Naak 146 7 10 MySQL Workbench Schema Validation Plugins Commercial Version 146 7 10 1 General Validation 20 2 2 ce cece cece ee eect ee ee entree eee teeter ee ee ee aaa eeeeee ease aaeaaaeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeees 146 7 10 2 MySQL Specific Validation cc cece eece ee eeee cece ee ee eee tere esse ee aa aa eeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeeeeaeaaed 147 7 11 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version s ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 148 7 12 Customizing DBDoc Model Reporting Templates c ccceceeeeeee ee aeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaea 151 7 12 1 Supported Template Markers cccccccceeeeeeeee cece ee ae aa eeeeeeeeee esse
421. r replication topology is shown like this where lt gt indicates circularity 300 mysqlrplshow Show Slaves for Master Server Replication Topology Graph localhost 3311 MASTER PR localhost 3312 SLAVE MASTER localhost 3313 SLAVE MASTER a Teocalhost 7331 lt gt SLAVE To produce a column list in addition to the graph specify the show 1list 802 option In this case to specify how to display the list use one of the following values with the format 301 option e grid default Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysq1 monitor e csv Display output in comma separated values format e tab Display output in tab separated format e vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysq1 monitor The utility uses of the SHOW SLAVE HOSTS statement to determine which slaves the master has If you want to use the recurse 302 option slaves should have been started with the report host and report port options set to their actual host name and port number or the utility may not be able to connect to the slaves to determine their own slaves OPTIONS mysqlrplshow accepts the following command line options e help Display a help message and exit e format lt format gt f lt format gt Specify the display format for column list output Permitted format values are grid csv tab and vertical The default is grid This option
422. r the Standard TCP IP connection See Section 6 6 2 Standard TCP IP Connection 6 7 SQL Editor MySQL Workbench 5 2 introduced the SQL Editor facility The SQL Editor can be launched using various action items on the Home window It can also be launched by selecting Database Query Database from the main menu or by using the keyboard shortcut Control U on Windows or Command U on Mac 50 Main Menu OS X At this point you will be asked to either select a stored connection or enter the details for a new connection After a connection has been made to the server a new tab called SQL Editor schema is displayed Figure 6 5 SQL Editor eoo MySQL Workbench SQL Editor localhost REE E GEE SCHEMAS f country x a mE FFACRB CCB 4s a Jg ve My Snippets rs Ge ene 1e SELECT FROM world Country sakila 100 4 1 1 Filter Q 4 Edit A Eb E expor Ay Code Name Continent Region SurfaceArea IndepYear ABW Aruba North America Caribbean 193 00 AFG Afghanistan Asia Southern and 652090 00 1919 AGO Angola Africa Central Africa 1246700 00 1975 AIA Anguilla North America Caribbean 96 00 ALB Albania Europe Southern Europe 28748 00 1912 AND Andorra Europe Southern Europe 468 00 1278 ANT Netherlands A North America Caribbean 800 00 ARE United Arab E Asia Middle East 83600 00 1971 ARG Argentina South America South America 2780400 00 1816 ARM Armenia Asia Middle East 29800 00 1991 ASM American Samoa Ocean
423. rage engine lt new_engine gt The engine to use for all tables created on the destination server quiet q Turn off all messages for quiet execution regexp basic regexp G Perform pattern matches using the REGEXP operator The default is to use LIKE for matching rpl lt dump_option gt replication lt dump_option gt Include replication information Permitted values are master include the CHANGE MASTER statement using the source server as the master slave include the CHANGE MASTER statement using the destination server s master information and both include the master and slave options where applicable rpl user lt user password gt The user and password for the replication user requirement e g rpl passwd default rpl rpl skip lt objects gt Specify objects to skip in the operation as a comma separated list no spaces Permitted values are CREATE_DB DATA EVENTS FUNCTIONS GRANTS PROCEDURES TABLES TRIGGERS and VIEWS Source lt Ssource gt Connection information for the source server in lt users lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format where lt passwd gt is optional and either lt port gt or lt socket gt must be provided threads Use multiple threads for cross server copy The default is 1 verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv mo
424. re verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit You must provide connection parameters user host password and so forth for an account that has the appropriate privileges to access all objects in the operation To copy all objects from a source the user must have these privileges SELECT and SHOW VIEW for the database and SELECT for the mysql database 251 mysqldbcopy Copy Database Objects Between Servers To copy all objects to a destination the user must have these privileges CREATE for the database SUPER when binary logging is enabled for procedures and functions and GRANT OPTION to copy grants Actual privileges required may differ from installation to installation depending on the security privileges present and whether the database contains certain objects such as views or events and whether binary logging is enabled The new storage engine 251 and default storage engine 250 options apply to all destination tables in the operation Some option combinations may result in errors during the operation For example eliminating tables but not views may result in an error a the view is copied The rp1 251 option is not valid for copying databases on the same server An error will be generated EXAMPLES The following example demonstrates how to use the utility to copy a database named ut il_test toa new database named ut il_test_copy on the same server mysqldbcopy
425. rform the following tasks 110 Reverse Engineering Rename the image using the Name text box Browse for an image using the Browse button 7 7 9 Reverse Engineering With MySQL Workbench you can reverse engineer a database using a MySQL create script or you can connect to a live MySQL server and import a single database or a number of databases All versions of MySQL Workbench can reverse engineer using a MySQL DDL script Only commercial versions of MySQL Workbench can reverse engineer a database directly from a MySQL server 7 7 9 1 Reverse Engineering Using a Create Script To reverse engineer using a create script choose the File Import Reverse Engineer MySQL Create Script menu items This opens a file open dialog box with the default file type set to an SQL script file a file with the extension sql You can create a data definition DDL script by executing the mysqldump db_name no data gt script_file sq1 command Using the no data option ensures that the script contains only DDL statements However if you are working with a script that also contains DML statements you need not remove them they will be ignored the changes be sure to retain a copy of the original DDL script You will need the original script to create an ALTER script For more information see Section 7 7 10 1 2 Altering a Schema Note E If you plan to redesign a database within MySQL Workbench and then export Use the
426. rm lt users lt passwd gt lt host lt port gt lt socket gt List multiple slaves in comma separated list timeout lt seconds gt Maximum timeout in seconds to wait for each replication command to complete For example timeout for slave waiting to catch up to master Default 3 Also used to check down status of master Failover will wait timeout seconds to check master response If no response failover event occurs verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit The login user must have the appropriate permissions to execute SHOW SLAVE STATUS SHOW MASTER STATUS and SHOW VARIABLES on the appropriate servers as well as grant the REPLICATE SLAVE privilege The utility checks permissions for the master slaves and candidates at startup The force option cannot be used with the failover command EXAMPLES To perform best slave election for a topology with GTID MODE ON server version 5 6 5 or higher where all slaves are specified with the slaves 293 option run the following command UV mysqlrpladmin master root localhost 3331 slaves root localhost 3332 root localhost 3333 root localhost 3334 elect Electing candidate slave from known slaves Best slave found is located on localhost 3332
427. rmat An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value You must provide connection parameters user host password and so forth for an account that has the appropriate privileges for all objects accessed during the operation EXAMPLES To show only the disk space usage for the employees and test databases in grid format the default use this command 269 mysqldiskusage Show Database Disk Usage mysqldiskusage server root localhost employees test Source yon slocalhose Couneececd Database totals 4 4 db_name total 4 4 employees 205 979 648 test 4096 4 4 Total database disk usage 205 983 744 bytes or 196 00 MB o EENE To see all disk usage for the server in CSV format use this command mysqldiskusage server root localhost format csv a vv Source on localhost connected Database totals db_name db_dir_size data_size misc_files total ces il 00 0 0 Obs 0 0 0 0 Ob2 0 0 0 0 Obl 0 0 0 0 backup_test 19410 1117 18293 19410 employees 242519463 205979648 242519463 448499111 mysql amp 67211 657669 191720 649389 t1 9849 1024 8825 9849 test 56162 4096 52066 56162 util test a 19625 2048 17577 19625 vead eese ioy LISA Op LISA SE tel testo 19623 2048 17575 19623 Total database disk usage 449 490 516 bytes or 428 00 M
428. rmat csv vvv Source on localhost connected user host database joe localhost util_test Taj Ol localhost sally loc alihosia uicelamtse sits sam localhost util_test joe user util_test 13 4 Parsers 13 4 1 mysql utilities parser Parse MySQL Log Files This module provides classes for parsing MySQL log files Currently Slow Query Log and General Query Log are supported 312 mysq utilities parser Parse MySQL Log Files class mysql utilities parser GeneralQueryLog stream This class parses the MySQL General Query Log Instances are iterable but the class does not provide multiple independent iterators For example to read the log and print the entries gt gt gt general_log open var lib mysql mysql log gt gt gt log GeneralQueryLog general_log eee 0F Emery tn log print entry Parameters e stream file type a valid file type for example the result of the built in Python function open version Returns Version of the MySQL server that produced the log Return type tuple program Returns Full path of the MySQL server executable Return type str port Returns TCP IP port on which the MySQL server was listening Return type int socket Returns Full path of the MySQL server Unix socket Return type str start_datetime Returns Date and time of the first read log entry
429. rom the MySQL utility command and common modules is easy and is limited only by your imagination Enhancing the Example A complete solution for the example named copy_server py is located in the docs intro examples folder It is complete in so far as this document explains but it can be enhanced in a number of ways The following briefly lists some of the things to consider adding to make this example utility more robust e Table locking Currently databases are not locked when copied To achieve a consistent copy of the data on an active server you may want to add table locking or use transactions for example if you are using InnoDB for a more consistent copy e Skip users not associated with the databases being copied Do not copy users with only global privileges Start replication after all of the users are copied makes this example a clone and replicate scale out solution e Stop new client connections to the server during the copy Conclusion If you find some primitives missing or would like to see more specific functionality in the library or scripts please contact us with your ideas or better still write them yourselves We welcome all suggestions in code or text To file a feature request or bug report visit http ougs mysql com For discussions visit http forums mysql com list php 155 13 2 Commands 13 2 1 mysql utilities command grep Search Databases for Objects This module provides utilities to
430. root localhost The user can provide any number of user defined variables but they must contain a value and no spaces around the character Once the console is launched the user can see all variables using the show variables command OPTIONS NOTES e version show program s version number and exit e help show the program s help page e verbose v control how much information is displayed For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug e quiet suppress all informational messages e execute lt commands gt e lt commands gt Execute commands and exit Multiple commands are separated with semi colons Note some platforms may require double quotes around command list utildir lt path gt location of utilities e width lt number gt Display width Using the option or piping commands to the console may require quotes or double quotes for example on Windows EXAMPLES To launch the console use this command S mysqluc The following demonstrates launching the console and running the console command help utilities to see a list of all utilities supported The console will execute the command then exit S mysqluc e help utilities 309 mysqluserclone Clone Existing User to Create New User Utility Description mysqlindexcheck check for duplicate or redundant indexes mysqlrplcheck check replication mysqluserclone clone a MySQL user account to one or more new user
431. rough the other interfaces but at least these parameters are supported e user 228 Introduction to extending the MySQL Utilities The name of the user to connect as The default if no user is supplied is login name of the user as returned by getpass getuser passwd The password to use when connecting The default if no password is supplied is the empty password e host The domain name of the host or the IP address The default ilf no host name is provided is localhost This field accepts host names and IPv4 and IPv6 addresses It also accepts quoted values which are not validated and passed directly to the calling methods This enables users to specify host names and IP addresses that are outside of the supported validation mechanisms port The port to use when connecting to the server The default if no port is supplied is 3306 which is the default port for the MySQL server as well e unix_socket The socket to connect to instead of using the host and port parameters Providing the connection parameters as a string requires the string to have the format user passwd host port socket where some values are optional If a connection specification string is provided it is parsed using the options parse_connection function 13 1 3 Introduction to extending the MySQL Utilities Administration and maintenance on the MySQL server can at times be complicated Sometimes tasks require tedious or even repetitiv
432. roup icon For a complete description of importing a MySQL create script see Section 7 7 9 1 Reverse Engineering Using a Create Script 7 8 1 1 Adding an EER Diagram To create an EER diagram for the sakila database first add an EER diagram by double clicking the Add Diagram icon in the EER Diagrams panel to create and open a new EER Diagram editor The EER Diagram canvas is where object modeling takes place To add a table to the canvas select the Catalog tab in the middle panel on the right side of the application to display any schemata that appear in the MySQL Model tab Find the sak ila schema and expand the view of its objects by clicking the button to the left of the schema name Expand the tables list in the same way You can add tables to the EER canvas by dragging them from the Catalog panel dropping them onto the canvas Drop the address table and the city table onto the canvas Figure 7 47 Adding Tables to the Canvas address v address _id SMALLINT m city m v address VARCHAR SO city id SMALLINT address2 VARCHAR 50 R city ARCHAR SO istri fk_address_city ate a OHT ae country _id SMALLINT z last_update TIMESTAMP postal_code ARCHAR 10 gt phone VARCHAR 20 gt last_update TIMESTAMP gt gt 141 Using the Default Schema MySQL Workbench automatically discovers that address city_id has been defined as a foreign key referencing the city city_id fi
433. rrange menu has these items Align to Grid Aligns items on the canvas to the grid lines Bring to Front Brings objects to the foreground Send to Back Sends objects to the background 71 Modeling Menus Center Diagram Contents Centers objects on the canvas Autolayout Automatically arranges objects on the canvas Reset Object Size Expands an object on an EER diagram For example if a table has a long column name that is not fully displayed this menu item expands the table to make the column visible This menu item is not enabled unless an object is selected Expand All Use this item to expand all objects on an EER diagram This item will display a table s columns if the object notation supports expansion Some object notations such as Classic do not permit expansion or contraction Indexes will not automatically be expanded unless they were previously expanded and have been collapsed using the Collapse All menu item Collapse All Undo the operation performed by Expand All 7 5 1 5 The Model Menu 7 5 1 5 1 The Model menu has these items Add Diagram Creates a new EER Diagram The keyboard shortcut is Control T Create Diagram From Catalog Objects Creates an EER diagram from all the objects in the catalog DBDoc Model Reporting For information about this menu item see Section 7 5 1 5 1 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version Commercial version only User Defined Types Prese
434. rror OPTIONS mysqldbcopy accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit default storage engine lt def_engine gt The engine to use for tables if the destination server does not support the original storage engine on the source server destination lt destination gt Connection information for the destination server in lt user gt lt passwa gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format where lt passwd gt is optional and either lt port gt or lt socket gt must be provided exclude lt exclude gt x lt exclude gt Exclude one or more objects from the operation using either a specific name such as db1 t1 or a search pattern Use this option multiple times to specify multiple exclusions By default patterns use LIKE matching With the regexp 251 option patterns use REGEXP matching This option does not apply to grants force Drop each database to be copied if exists before copying anything into it Without this option an error occurs if you attempt to copy objects into an existing database locking lt locking gt 250 mysqldbcopy Copy Database Objects Between Servers NOTES Choose the lock type for the operation Permitted lock values are no locks do not use any table locks lock all use table locks but no transaction and no consistent read and snaphot consistent read using a single transaction The default is snapshot new sto
435. rs Review the information then click Next 11 Finally you can give the server instance a suitable name This will be used to select this particular instance from a list of available instances 22 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 10 Getting Started Tutorial Instance Name Create New Server Instance Profile Create the Instance Profile Please enter a name for this server instance and click Next 4 new Server Instance Profile entry will be created for managing this MySQL server Server Instance Name mysqld localhost Complete Setup Set the desired name then click Finish to complete the server instance creation process 12 You will now be returned to the Home window You will see the new server instance you created along with the new connection you created as part of the preceding procedure 23 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 11 Getting Started Tutorial Home Window Instance i MySQL Workbench File Edt View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help i Bhalla Workbench Central A P Ve MON Workbench Read about all changes in this MySQL Workbench release MySQLDoc MySQLBug Workbench PlanetMySQL Workbench Library Reporter Team Blog Forums Workspace Connect to existing databases and run Create and manage models forward amp Configure your database server setup SQL Queries SQL scripts edit data and reverse engineer compare and user accounts brow
436. rs have the same storage engines available the same default storage engine and the same InnoDB storage engine mysqlreplicate master root localhost 3306 slave root localhost 3307 rpl user rpl rpl vv pedantic master on localhost connected slave on localhost connected master id 2 slave id 99 288 mysqlreplicate Set Up and Start Replication Between Two Servers Checking InnoDB statistics for type and version conflicts Checking storage engines Checking for binary logging on master Setting up replication Flushing tables on master with read lock Connecting slave to master CHANGE MASTER TO MASTER_HOST omitted Starting slave status Waiting for master to send event error 0 Unlocking tables on master eICOMer The following command starts replication from the current position of the master which is the default mysqlreplicate master root localhost 3306 slave root localhost 3307 rpl user rpl rpl master on localhost connected slave on localhost connected Checking for binary logging on master Setting up replication IC Oncor Sh Sh SE SE OE The following command starts replication from the beginning of recorded events on the master mysqlreplicate master root localhost 3306 slave root localhost 3307 rpl user rpl rpl stare Fcon beginning master on localhost connected slave on
437. rse engineering of triggers for schema HumanResources completed Reverse engineering foreign keys for tables in schema HumanResources Reverse engineering of foreign keys in table HumanResources Department completed Reverse engineering of foreign keys in table HumanResources EmployeePayHistory completed Reverse engineering of foreign keys in table HumanResources JobCandidate completed Second pass of table reverse engineering for schema HumanResources completed Reverse engineering completed Reverse engineer selected schemata finished Post processing of reverse engineered schemata Post processing of reverse engineered schemata done Finished performing tasks Source Objects The discovered objects from the Reverse Engineer Source stage are revealed and made available This includes Table View and Routine objects with only the Table objects being selected by default 194 A visual guide to performing a database migration Figure 10 8 MySQL Workbench migration Source Objects File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Source Objects OVERVIEW 3 Overview You may select the objects to be migrated in the lists below All tables will be migrated by default SOURCE amp TARGET Source Selection Target Selection Migrate Table objects Fetch Schemata List aig 7 total 7 selected Y Schemata Selection Y Reverse Engineer Source E Migrate View objects OBJECT MIGRAT
438. rst place Removing MySQL Workbench After Installation Using the Installer Package 1 To uninstall MySQL Workbench open the Control Panel and Choose Add or Remove Programs Find the MySQL Workbench entry and choose the Remove button This will remove MySQL Workbench 2 Any modules added to the c SPROGRAMFILES MySQL MySQL Workbench version modules directory will not be deleted E Note If you installed MySQL Workbench using the Installer package it is not possible to remove MySQL Workbench from the command line Although you can manually remove some of the components there is no command line option for removing MySQL Workbench Removing the MySQL Workbench directory manually will not remove all the files belonging to MySQL Workbench Removing MySQL Workbench After Installation from a Zip File To remove MySQL Workbench just delete the MySQL Workbench directory 5 Note If you installed any additional modules within the modules directory and you want to keep them make sure you copy those modules to a different directory before deleting the MySQL Workbench directory Installing MySQL Workbench on Linux 3 3 4 Installing MySQL Workbench on Linux There are binary distributions of MySQL Workbench available for several variants of Linux including Fedora Oracle Linux and Ubuntu In addition to the binary distributions it is also possible to download the MySQL Workbench source code as atar gz or RPM package
439. rt Replication Between Two Servers The utility reports conditions where the storage engines on the master and the slave differ It also reports a warning if the InnoDB storage engine differs on the master and slave For InnoDB to be the same both servers must be running the same type of InnoDB built in or the InnoDB Plugin and InnoDB on both servers must have the same major and minor version numbers and enabled state By default the utility issues warnings for mismatches between the sets of storage engines the default storage engine and the InnoDB storage engine To produce errors instead use the pedantic 287 option which requires storage engines to be the same on the master and slave The vv option displays any discrepancies between the storage engines and InnoDB values with or without the pedant ic 287 option Replication can be started using one of the following strategies OPTIONS Start from the current position default Start replication from the current master binary log file and position The utility uses the SHOW MASTER STATUS statement to retrieve this information Start from the beginning Start replication from the first event recorded in the master binary log To do this use the start from beginning 288 option Start from a binary log file Start replication from the first event in a specific master binary log file To do this use the master log file 287 option Start from a
440. s e Model Notes For each of these sections add objects to a project by clicking the appropriate add object icon You may also rename edit cut copy or delete objects on this page by right clicking to open a pop up menu The following sections further discuss the MySQL Model page 7 5 1 Modeling Menus Some menu items are not available in the OSS version of this application and are available only in the Standard Edition This is indicated where applicable 7 5 1 1 The File Menu Use the File menu to open a project begin a new project or save a project Choosing New Model opens the default schema mydb Choosing Open Model opens a file dialog box with the default file type set to MySQL Workbench Models mwb extension To display a list of recently opened MWB files choose the Open Recent menu item The keyboard shortcut to create a new project is Control N and the command to open an existing project is Control O To close the currently active MySQL Model or EER Diagram tab use the Close Tab menu item You can also do this from the keyboard by pressing Control W To reopen the MySQL Model tab see Section 7 5 1 3 The View Menu To reopen an EER Diagram tab double click the EER Diagramicon in the EER Diagrams section of the MySQL Model page Use the Save Model or Save Model As menu items to save a model When you save a model its name appears in the title bar of the application If you have made changes to a
441. s mysqldbcompare compare databases for consistency mysqldiff compare object definitions among objects where the difference is how dbl objl differs from db2 o0bj2 mysqldbcopy copy databases from one server to another mysqlreplicate establish replication with a master mysqldbexport export metadata and data from databases mysqldbimport import metadata and data from files mysqlmetagrep search metadata mysqlprocgrep search process information mysqldiskusage show disk usage for databases mysqlserverinfo show server information mysqlserverclone start another instance of a running server The following demonstrates launching the console to run several commands using the option to including setting a variable for a server connection and executing a utility using variable substitution Note it may be necessary to escape the on some platforms for example Linux Output below is an excerpt and is representational only mysqluc e set SERVER root host123 mysqldiskusage server SERVER Source on host123 connected NOTICE Your user account does not have read access to the datadir Data sizes will be calculated and actual file sizes may be omitted Some features may be unavailable Database totals 4 4 db_name total 4 4 world oO 4 4 Total database disk usage 1 072 359 052 bytes or 1022 00 MB
442. s option multiple times to see information for multiple servers show defaults d Display default settings for mysqid from the local configuration file It uses my_print_defaults to obtain the options show servers Display information about servers running on the local host The utility examines the host process list to determine which servers are running Start S Start the server in read only mode if it is offline With this option you must also give the basedir 306 and datadir 306 options verbose v 306 mysqluc Command line client for running MySQL Utilities Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug e version Display version information and exit For the format 306 option the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 306 specifies the grid format An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES To display the server information for the local server and the settings for mysqld in the configuration file with the output in a vertical list use this command mysqlserverinfo server root pass localhost d format vertical Source on localhost connected KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK lL row KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKE
443. s and the data The default is definitions If you attempt to import objects into an existing database the result depends on the import format If the format is definitions or both an error occurs unless drop first 261 is given If the format is data imported table data is added to existing table data new storage engine lt new_engine gt The engine to use for all tables created on the destination server no headers h Input does not contain column headers This option applies only for csv and tab output quiet q Turn off all messages for quiet execution server lt server gt Connection information for the server in lt user gt lt passwa gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format skip lt skip_objects gt Specify objects to skip in the operation as a comma separated list no spaces Permitted values are CREATE_DB DATA EVENTS FUNCTIONS GRANTS PROCEDURES TABLES TRIGGERS and VIEWS skip blobs Do not import BLOB data skip rpl Do not execute replication commands verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit The login user must have the appropriate permissions to create new objects access read the mysql database and grant privileges If a database to be imported already exists the user m
444. s of specific violations e Integrity Violation e An object name longer than the maximum permitted e A foreign key defined for an engine type that does not support foreign keys not yet implemented A view or routine that references a nonexistent table not yet implemented A default value that does not match a column s data type e An invalid partitioning scheme e Syntax Violation e A routine trigger or view with incorrect SQL syntax A reserved keyword used as an identifier Use of an invalid character 147 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version 7 11 The DBDoc Model Reporting Dialog Window Commercial Version This dialog window is found by navigating to the Model menu and choosing the DBDoc Model Reporting item Note R The DBDoc Model Reporting item is not available in the MySQL Workbench OSS version Use this dialog window to set the options for creating documentation of your database models Figure 7 51 The DBDoc Model Reporting Main Wizard DBDoc Model Reporting Generate a Report for the Current Model HTML Base Frames detailed HTML report using frames For printing HTML Basic Single Page use a single page HTML report template HTML Detailed Frames Text Basic Template Style Vibrant Vibrant colors Basic Options Title Model Report Title used for the report Output Path documentstolder teport_ date _ time Path where the r
445. s tab features two subtabs e General e Slow Query Log The General tab shows entries from the server s general log file The Slow Query Log tab displays entries from the server s slow query log file 183 The Logs Tab Figure 9 13 Administrator Logs Tab Admin mysqld 127 0 0 1 X File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help Task and Object Browser Server Logs prone Your current Log Destination is set to FILE Sener Status For logs to be viewed within Workbench they must be configured to be sent to TABLE This option is only available in MySQL version 5 1 and newer Fore more information read http dev mysql com doc refman 5 1 en log tables htm f Startup Shutdown 2 Status and System Variables CONFIGURATION Pa Options File SECURITY Users and Privileges DATA EXPORT RESTORE 3 Data Export and Restore WB Admin Opened 184 Chapter 10 Database Migration Wizard Table of Contents 10 1 General installation requirements cccceee ee ceeeeeee cece ee ee eee te testes ee ae aaa teeeeeeeeeaeaaaaneeeeeeeeeaeaae 186 101 1 ODBC LID FANGS sescrccvas ered sanececees osa iaaa a KA Ea AEA todas aetanecea EDE vedanta 186 10 12 ODBC DIVES enrnurentsin a a a a E 187 10 2 Migration OVErViEW sec stucsies vax occetiesdareshexecdeal nara ranae A EA aa a AEA Eaa A E eels 187 10 2 1 A visual guide to performing a database migration cccccceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
446. s the download Dependencies for Compiling in Windows 3 3 Starting MySQL Workbench The procedure for launching MySQL Workbench depends on the platform Generally there are two ways to launch MySQL Workbench either from the command line or from the graphical user interface of the host operating system Using the command line launching facility is useful when you want to customize some aspects of the way MySQL Workbench operates The following sections describe how to launch MySQL Workbench for each of the supported platforms In addition to platform specific command line options MySQL Workbench has the following command line options log level level Controls the verbosity level for logging output from Workbench With increasingly levels of verbosity the valid values for level are error warning info debug1 debug2 and debug3 The location of the generated log files are as follows Linux mysql workbench log wb 1log Mac Library Application Support Workbench 1log wb 1log and on Windows C Users your user id AppData Roaming MySQL Workbench wb log e admin instance Load the server instance specified e query connection Load the connection specified e model modelfile Load the model specified e script script Run the script specified e run code Run the code snippet specified Installing MySQL Workbench on Windows e quit when done Quits MySQL Workbench after script or
447. schema has been added to the current model you can see the schema objects on the Physical Schemata panel on the MySQL Model page The Routines and Routine Groups are listed there MySQL Workbench unifies both stored procedures and stored functions into one logical object called a Routine Routine Groups are used to group routines that are related You can decide how many Routine 103 Creating Routines and Routine Groups Groups you want to create and you can use the Routine Group Editor to assign specific routines to a group using a drag and drop interface When designing an EER Diagram you can place the Routine Groups on the canvas by dragging them from the Catalog Palette Placing individual routines on the diagram is not permitted as it would clutter the canvas 7 7 4 1 Routines 7 7 4 1 1 7 7 4 1 2 Adding Routines to the Physical Schemata To add a routine double click the Add Routine icon in the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page The default name of the routine is rout ine1 If a routine with this name already exists the new routine is named routine2 Adding a new routine automatically opens the routine editor docked at the bottom of the application For information about using the routine editor see Section 7 7 4 1 2 The Routine Editor Right clicking a routine opens a pop up menu with the following items e Rename e Cut rout ine_name Copy routine_name e Paste Edit Routine
448. se for logging messages log age lt days gt Specify maximum age of log entries in days Entries older than this will be purged on startup Default 7 days master lt connection gt Connection information for the master server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt ports lt socket gt format max position lt position gt Used to detect slave delay The maximum difference between the master s log position and the slave s reported read position of the master A value greater than this means the slave is too far behind the master Default 0 new master lt connection gt Connection information for the slave to be used to replace the master for switchover in the form lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt Valid only with switchover command 292 mysqlrpladmin Administration utility for MySQL replication NOTES no health Turn off health report after switchover or failover ping lt number gt Number of ping attempts for detecting downed server Note on some platforms this is the same as number of seconds to wait for ping to return quiet q Turn off all messages for quiet execution seconds behind lt seconds gt Used to detect slave delay The maximum number of seconds behind the master permitted before slave is considered behind the master Default 0 Slaves lt slave connections gt Connection information for slave servers in the fo
449. se is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License al
450. se object there is no confirmation dialog box when you delete a text object 7 7 7 2 The Text Object Editor To invoke the text object editor double click a text object on the EER Diagram canvas This opens the editor docked at the bottom of the application Double clicking the text object table undocks the editor Double click the title bar to redock it Any number of text objects may be open at the same time Each additional text objects appears as a tab at the top of the text editor Use the editor to change the name of a text object or its contents 109 Creating Images 7 7 7 2 1 Modifying a Text Object Using the Properties Palette When you select a text object on the EER Diagram canvas its properties are displayed in the Properties palette Most of the properties accessible from the Properties palette apply to the appearance of a view on the EER Diagram canvas For a list of properties accessible through the Properties palette see Section 7 5 12 The Properties Palette There is no property in the Properties palette for changing the font used by a text object To do so choose the Appearance tab of the Workbench Preferences dialog For more information see Section 5 4 7 The Appearance Tab 7 7 8 Creating Images Images exist only on the EER Diagram canvas you can add them only from the EER Diagram window 7 7 8 1 Adding Images to an EER Diagram To add images to an EER Diagram use the Image tool
451. se products can also be migrated by using its Generic database support as long as you have an ODBC driver for it In this case the migration will be less automatic but should still work nonetheless 10 2 1 A visual guide to performing a database migration This example will migrate a Microsoft SQL Server database to MySQL and include a screenshot for each step From MySQL Workbench choose Database Migrate to open the migration wizard The opening screen will look like this 188 A visual guide to performing a database migration Overview Figure 10 2 MySQL Workbench migration Overview File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Help Migration Task List Overview OVERVIEW Overview Welcome to the MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard SOURCE amp TARGET This wizard will assist you in migrating tables and data from a supported database system to MySQL 5 eat You can also use this to copy databases from one MySQL instance to another gt Source Selection Target Selection Prerequisites Fetch Schemata List Before starting check the following preparation steps Schemata Selection The Migration Wizard uses ODBC to connect to the source database You must have an ODBC driver for Reverse Engineer Source the source database installed and configured as Workbench does not bundle any such drivers For MySQL connections the native dient library is used OBJECT MIGRATION Source Objects Ensure you can connect to both s
452. se status variables manage database objects synchronize schemas report and server logs SQL Development EA Data Modeling 0 Server Administration g Open Connection to Start Querying Open Existing EER Model g Server Administration gt te localhost gt mysqld localhost a User root Host localhost 3306 Local Type Windows eere amp New Server Instance ei Edit Table Data m Create New EER Model P Manage Import Export m Edit SQL Script Create EER Model From Existing Database Manage Security Ei Bs Manage Connections E gt Create EER Model From SQL Script i Manage Server Instances gt i New server instance created You are now ready to test your new server instance 13 From the Home window double click the Server Instance you created The Administrator will open on the Startup configuration page 24 Creating a Model Figure 4 12 Getting Started Tutorial Admin Startup eoo MySQL Workbench Admin mysqld localhost MANAGEMENT Server Status B 5 PTERA INFO SYSTEM SERVER HEALTH eh SE x Name mysqld localhost Status and System Variables Sieg Host localhost I Sener log Lo Server 5 5 15 log Status Running Load Mem 68 Connection Usage Traffic 7 90 KB s Query Cache Hitrate 0 0 Key Efficiency 0 00 PERSE aes Options File id User Host DB Command Time State Info SECURITY 2 root localhost 49320 Query 0 SHOW PROCESSLIST Users and Privileges 3 root localhost 4
453. search for objects on a server The module defines a set of object types that can be searched by searching the fields of each object The notion of an object field is very loosely defined and means any names occurring as part of the object definition For example the fields of a table include the table name the column names and the partition names if it is a partitioned table Constants The following constants denote the object types that can be searched mysql utilities command grep ROUTINE 235 mysql utilities command proc Search Processes on Servers mysql utilities command grep EVENT e mysql utilities command grep TRIGGER e mysql utilities command grep TABLE e mysql utilities command grep DATABASE e mysql utilities command grep VIEW mysql utilities command grep USER The following constant is a sequence of all the object types that are available It can be used to generate a version independent list of object types that can be searched for example options and help texts mysql utilities command grep OBJECT_TYPES Classes class mysql utilities command grep ObjectGrep pattern database_pattern None types OBJECT_TYPES check_body False use_regexp False Search MySQL server instances for objects where the name or content for routines triggers or events matches a given pattern sql gt string Return the SQL code for executing the search in the form of a SELECT s
454. ses to MySQL The MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard was added in MySQL Workbench 5 2 41 e Convert migrate different database types including MySQL across servers e Convert tables and copy data but will not convert stored procedures views or triggers e Allows customization and editing during the migration process e Works on Linux Mac OS X and Microsoft Windows This is not an exhaustive list The following sections discuss these and additional migration capabilities Set up may be the most challenging aspect of using the MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard There is the installation section which describes setting up ODBC requirements for Linux Mac OS X and Microsoft 185 General installation requirements Windows and the Database Product Specific Notes section that references setup conditions for each RDBMS 10 1 General installation requirements The MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard uses ODBC to connect to a source database except for MySQL You will need the ODBC driver installed that corresponds to the database you want to migrate from For example PostgreSQL can be migrated with the psqlodbc ODBC driver Microsoft SQL Server can be migrated using the native Microsoft SQL Server driver on Windows or with FreeTDS on Linux and Mac OS X The following diagram shows the general components involved in an ODBC connection Figure 10 1 MySQL Workbench migration installation diagram SS client side sso Server
455. should be made before manipulating the tree Read only access to the tree is the safest approach and is sufficient in most cases The main nodes in the Application Object Tree Table 11 1 The main nodes in the Application Object Tree Node Description wb registry Application data such as plugin registry list of editors and options wb customData A generic dictionary for data you can use to store your own data This dictionary is saved and reloaded with Workbench and is global not document specific wb options Contains some default options that are used by Workbench wb rdomsMgmt Internal registry of supported RDBMS modules known data types wb doc The currently loaded model document whb doc physicalModels 0 The currently loaded model object containing the database catalog and diagrams wb doc physicalModels 0 catalog The database catalog for the model Contains the list of schemata whb doc physicalModels 0 catalog schemata List of schemata in the model Individual schema can be accessed as a list schemata 0 schemata 1 whb doc physicalModels 0 catalog schemata 0 tables views routines Lists of tables views routines in the schema wb doc physicalModels 0 diagrams List of EER diagrams in the model wb doc physicalModels 0 diagrams 0 figures layers connections List of figures layers connections relati
456. siawgeenestduetecineeges 212 10 72 12 Migration ROPO 2 sfco ei52 sc ou nde ceeveede heen E a a A AN 212 10 8 MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard FAQ 0 ccccccecccccc cette eee e eee ee ee ee te eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 212 VA EXTS MING WOFK BS Gis cae arsar e aa A EAE ERTES seed srg ce gate ead AAEE ee ee eee 213 11 1 GRT and Workbench Data Organization 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee tees eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeseeeeeeaaa 213 WA IMOOUIOS a c bats pete cus ownia tdedaad ee fevauada deb cde E aac Sdsad cay E huuad vee lavat eee uaesuats 214 TiS PIUGINS 3 viccteciie ariel Ader tel nce ee eee a ein ale 215 11 4 Adding a GUI to a Plugin Using MFOrms ccccceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeenees 216 11 5 The Workbench Scripting Shell 0 ccecccececeeeeeeeee e ni aaar aaa aa A E A iai 217 11 5 1 Exploring the Workbench Scripting Shell ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeees 217 1125 2 The Shell Window E E E EE E eieadaee bettie teed eae E 218 11 5 3 The Files Globals Classes and Modules Tabs c cccccceceeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeanees 219 TES Tutorial Writing PIUQINS serie eee ea REEE ERRA EEA Ar ONAE EE RENCO EEEE POANIER 220 12 Keyboard SNOMCUIS ganein des case aa a a daaaseeenacdy coveitad deen alendedutdaeeenaceyereedteaces 223 MySQL Workbench 13 MYSQL WUINMIGS cccisiccrcaseieecduaavccciaveidedduatuncccaanibedduasveeecsaundeddantuccccasaibeddesaekec
457. so be edited by double clicking e Migration Problem Will list all of the migration problems or report that no mapping problems were found Column Mappings Displays all of the schema columns which may also be edited There is an advanced Show Code and Messages option that displays the SQL CREATE script for the selected object 10 7 7 Target Creation Options Defines addition settings for the target schema 211 Schema Creation Configuration options include Create schema in target RDBMS Create a SQL script file e An option to keep the schemata if they already exist Objects that already exist will not be recreated or update 10 7 8 Schema Creation The SQL scripts generated for the migrated schema objects will now be executed in the target database You can monitor execution in the logs if errors exist then they will be fixed in the next step Table data will be migrated in a later step as well This is an automated step where the actions include Create Script File Connect to Target Database and Create Schemata and Objects 10 7 9 Create Target Results Scripts to create the target schemas were executed but the data has not yet been migrated This step allows reviewing a creation report If there are any errors then you can manually fix the scripts and click Recreate Objects to retry the schema creation or return to the Manual Editing page to correct them there and then retry the target creation
458. so called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program t
459. soft SQL Server 2012 e MySQL Server 4 1 and greater as the source and MySQL Server 5 1 and greater as the target e PostgreSQL 8 0 and greater e Sybase Adaptive Server Enterprise 15 x and greater 10 2 3 Migrating from unsupported generic databases Most ODBC compliant databases may be migrated using the generic database support In this case code objects will not be retrieved from the source database only tables and data When using the generic support column datatypes are mapped using the following steps 1 It searches for the first entry in the Generic Datatype Mapping Table for the source type name If the length scale ranges of the entry matches the source column it will pick that type Otherwise it continues searching 2 If no matches were found in the generic table then it tries to directly map the source type to a MySQL type of the same name 3 If the source type name doesn t match any of the MySQL datatypes thenit will not be converted and an error is logged You can then manually specify the target datatype in the Manual Object Editing step of the wizard 10 3 Conceptual DBMS equivalents Table 10 1 Conceptual equivalents between supported DBMS products and MySQL Concept MS SQL Sybase PostgreSQ ilySQL_ Note Server ASE Authentication Yes Yes Yes Yes Auto_Increment Yes Yes Yes Yes PostgreSQL uses sequences for Auto_Increment Backup Yes Yes Yes Yes See MySQL Enterprise Backup Catalog Yes Yes Yes
460. specific event Start replication from specific event coordinates specific binary log file and position To do this use the master log file 287 and master log pos 287 options mysqlreplicate accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit master lt master gt Connection information for the master server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format master log file lt master_log_file gt Begin replication from the beginning of this master log file master log pos lt master_log_pos gt Begin replication from this position in the master log file This option is not valid unless master log file 287 is given pedantic p Fail if both servers do not have the same set of storage engines the same default storage engine and the same InnoDB storage engine 287 mysqlreplicate Set Up and Start Replication Between Two Servers NOTES rpl user lt replication_user gt The user and password for the replication user in name passwad format The default is rp1 rpl slave lt slave gt Connection information for the slave server in lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port lt socket gt format Start from beginning b Start replication at the beginning of events logged in the master binary log This option is not valid unless both master log file 287 and master log pos 287 are give
461. spective owners This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services This document in any form software or printed matter contains proprietary information that is the exclusive property of Oracle Your access to and use of this material is subject to the terms and conditions of your Oracle Software License and Service Agreement which has been executed and with which you agree to comply This document and information contained herein may not be disclosed copied reproduced or distributed to anyone outside Oracle without prior written consent of Oracle or as specifically provided Legal Notices below This document is not part of your license agreement nor can it be incorporated into any contractual agreement with Oracle or its subsidiaries or affiliates This documentation is NOT distributed under a GPL license Use of this documentation is subject to the following terms You may create a printed copy of this documentation solely for your own personal use Conversion to other formats is allowed as long as the actual cont
462. st Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 04 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 05 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 06 Test Basic database example NSERT INTO util_test t1 VALUES 07 Test Basic database example done Connecting to the current server s master CHANGE MASTER TO MASTER_HOST localhost MASTER_USER rpl MASTER_PASSWORD rpl MASTER_PORT 3310 MASTER_LOG_FILE clone bin 000001 MASTER_LOG_POS 1739 Starting slave START SLAVE 13 3 6 mysqldbimport Import Object Definitions or Data into a Database This utility imports metadata object definitions or data or both for one or more databases from one or more files If an object exists on the destination server with the same name as an imported object it is dropped first before importing the new object To skip objects by type use the skip 262 option with a list of the objects to skip This enables you to extract a particular set of objects say for importing only events by excluding all other types Similarly to skip creation of UPDATE statements for BLOB data specify the skip blobs 262 option To specify the input format use one of the following values with the format 261 option These correspond to the output formats of the mysqldbexport utility sql default Input consists of SQL statements For definitions this consi
463. stand the relationship between sections and data dictionaries in more detail In a data dictionary the key for a variable is the variable name a marker The variable value is the variable s data The entry for a section in a data dictionary is different For a section entry in a data dictionary the key is the section name the marker However the value associated with the key is a list of data dictionaries In 152 Customizing DBDoc Model Reporting Templates MySQL Workbench each section is usually associated with a data dictionary You can think of a section as activating its associated dictionary or dictionaries When a template is processed data dictionaries are loaded in a hierarchical pattern forming a tree of data dictionaries This is illustrated by the following table Table 7 1 Data Dictionaries Tree Data Dictionary Loads Data Dictionary MAIN SCHEMATA SCHEMATA TABLES COLUMNS Detailed is true FOREIGN_KEYS Detailed is true INDICES Detailed is true TABLES REL_LISTING INDICES_LISTING COLUMNS LISTING TABLE_COMMENT_LISTING DDL_LISTING COLUMNS LISTING COLUMNS Detailed is false REL_LISTING REL Detailed is false INDICES_ LISTING INDICES Detailed is false The root of the tree is the main dictionary Additional dictionaries are loaded from the root to form the dictionary tree the main dictionary If a variable is not found in the main dictionary which can be thought of
464. stribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution A 29 TreeViewAdv for NET License The following software may be included in this product TreeViewAdv for NET The BSD License Copyright c 2009 Andrey Gliznetsov a gliznetsov gmail com All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation andor other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL T
465. sts of the appropriate CREATE and GRANT statements For data this is an INSERT statement or bulk insert if the bulk insert 255 option is specified grid Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor CSV Display output in comma separated values format tab Display output in tab separated format vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysql monitor To specify how much data to display use one of the following values with the display 255 option e brief Display only the minimal columns for recreating the objects e full Display the complete column list for recreating the objects names Display only the object names Note For SQL format output the display 255 option is ignored To turn off the headers for csv or tab display format specify the no headers 256 option To turn off all feedback information specify the quiet 256 option To write the data for individual tables to separate files use the file per table 256 option The name of each file is composed of the database and table names followed by the file format For example the following command produces files named db1 table_name csv mysqldbexport server root serverl 3306 format csv dbl export data By default the operation uses a consistent snapshot to read the source databases To change the locking mode use the locking 256 option with a lock
466. sts of the appropriate CREATE and GRANT statements For data this is an INSERT statement or bulk insert if the bulk insert 261 option is specified grid Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor e cSV Input is formatted in comma separated values format tab 260 mysqldbimport Import Object Definitions or Data into a Database Input is formatted in tab separated format e vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysql monitor To indicate that input in csv or tab format does not contain column headers specify the no headers 262 option To turn off all feedback information specify the quiet 262 option By default the utility creates each table on the destination server using the same storage engine as the original table To override this and specify the storage engine to use for all tables created on the destination server use the new storage engine 262 option If the destination server supports the new engine all tables use that engine To specify the storage engine to use for tables for which the destination server does not support the original storage engine on the source server use the default storage engine 261 option The new storage engine 262 option takes precedence over default storage engine 261 if both are given If the new storage engine 262 or default storage engine 261 option is given an
467. t Folder Path C Wsers Tony Documents dumps Dump20110301 amp Options File world Export to Self Contained File Export to Disk Import from Disk Advanced Export Options SECURITY j re 1 y Y S Users and Privileges File Path C Users Tony Documents dumps Dump20110301 sql DATA EXPORT RESTORE Data Export and Restore C Dump Views IFA mn Carad Naudinnn Meard wan and Einstand m Press Start Export to start i WARNING mysqldump exe is version 5 1 40 but the T Sams MySQL Server to be dumped has version 5 5 9 Statistics Because the version of mysqldump is older than _ WB Admin Opened 9 7 6 2 Import from Disk The Import from Disk tab enables you to import a previously exported project You can select to import a project where tables were stored in individual files In this case you will also be able to select which of these tables to import You can also import a project saved to a single file 181 The Data Dump Tab Figure 9 11 Administrator Import from Disk C MYSQL Workbench aam File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help Task and Object Browser Data Export and Restore MANAGEMENT Export to Disk Import from Disk Advanced aa Server Status f startup Shutdown Options Status and System Variables Server Logs Select Database Objects
468. t folder are considered the main suite You can select any number of tests to run select one or more suites to restrict the tests exclude suites and tests and specify the location of the utilities and tests The utility requires the existence of at least one server to clone for testing purposes You must specify at least one server but you may specify multiple servers for tests designed to use additional servers 240 mut MySQL Utilities Testing The utility has a special test suite named performance where performance related tests are placed This suite is not included by default and must be specified with the suite 242 option to execute the performance tests OPTIONS mut accepts the following command line options e help Display a help message and exit e do tests lt prefix gt Execute all tests that begin with prefix e force Do not abort when a test fails e record Record the output of the specified test if successful With this option you must specify exactly one test to run e server lt server gt Connection information for the server to use in the tests in lt user gt lt passwa gt lt host gt lt port lt socket gt format Use this option multiple times to specify multiple servers e skip long Exclude tests that require greater resources or take a long time to run e skip suite lt name gt Exclude the named test suite Use this option multiple times to specify m
469. t socket gt format Use this option multiple times to search multiple servers sql print sql Q Instead of displaying the selected processes emit the SELECT statement that retrieves information about them If the kill connection 284 or kill query 284 option is given the utility generates a stored procedure named kill_processes for killing the queries rather than a SELECT statement sql body Like sq1 285 but produces the output as the body of a stored procedure without the CREATE PROCEDURE part of the definition This could be used for example to generate an event for the server Event Manager When used with a kill option code for killing the matching queries is generated Note that it is not possible to execute the emitted code unless it is put in a stored routine event or trigger For example the following code could be generated to kill all idle connections for user www data 285 mysqlreplicate Set Up and Start Replication Between Two Servers S mysqlprocorep kill connection sql body gt match user www data match state sleep DECLARE kill_done INT DECLARE kill_cursor CURSOR FOR SELECT Id User Host Db Command Time State Ino FROM INFORMATION_SCHEMA PROCESSLIST WHERE user LIKE www data AND State LIKE sleep ORE Nea ll eures on BEGIN DECLARE id BIGINT DECLARE EXIT HANDLER FOR NOT FOUND SET kill_done 1 kill_loop LOOP FETCH kill cursor INTO id KIL
470. t software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You 322 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute
471. tabase it will be incorporated into the MySQL Workbench model For convenience the wizard provides three additional buttons to enable synchronization directions to be applied to a group of selected changes The Update Model button causes the selected changes to be applied only to the model itself In the following example t able7 would be added to the model 134 Forward Engineering Figure 7 41 Update Model Button Synchronize Model with Database Model and Database Differences Double click arrows in the list to choose whether to ignore changes update the model with database changes or vice versa You can also apply an action to multiple selected rows Update Source mydb table1 table2 table3 tablet tableS 1 NjA table The Ignore button causes the selected changes to be ignored No synchronization will take place for those changes In the following example no changes would take place 135 Forward Engineering Figure 7 42 Ignore Button Synchronize Model with Database Model and Database Differences Double click arrows in the list to choose whether to ignore changes update the model with database changes or vice versa You can also apply an action to multiple selected rows Update Source mydb tablet table2 table3 table tables lt B gt INA lt gt tater Select Changes to Apply The Update Source button causes the selected changes to be applied only to the live database
472. tabase Plugins Scripting Community Help Task and Object Browser MANAGEMENT gt Server Status i Startup Shutdown E Status and System Variables A Server Logs CONFIGURATION Options File SECURITY Users and Privileges DATA EXPORT RESTORE 3 Data Export and Restore WB Admin Opened Startup Shutdown Database Server Status The database server is started and ready for dient connections To shut the Server down use the Stop Server button The database server instance is running If you stop the server you and your applications will not be able to use the Database and all current connections will be dosed 2011 03 01 14 29 41 Workbench will use cmd shell commands to start stop this instance 2011 03 01 14 29 49 Status check of service MySQL returned running 2011 03 01 14 32 47 Status check of service MySQL returned running 9 7 2 The Configuration Tab The Configuration tab enables you to edit the my ini or my cn configuration file by selecting check boxes and other GUI controls This tab also features a number of subtabs which provide access to various sub sections within the configuration file The subtabs are General MyISAM InnoDB Performance 174 The Configuration Tab Log Files Replication Networking Security Advanced General Tab Figure 9 5 Administrator Configuration General Tab Task and Object Browser MANAGEMENT Serer Status B startup
473. tance action item from the Server Administration section of the Home window This launches the Create a new server instance wizard For further details see Section 9 6 1 New Server Instance Wizard Click the Manage Server Instances action item from the Server Administration section of the Home window This launches the Manage Server Instances dialog from within which a new server instance can be created For further details see Section 9 6 2 Manage Server Instances Dialog 9 6 1 New Server Instance Wizard Clicking the New Server Instance action item launches the Create a new server instance wizard The wizard provides a step by step approach to creating a new server instance This is most suitable for 166 New Server Instance Wizard beginners Users who are familiar with the various settings and parameters can also quickly create a new instance from the Manage Server Instances dialog discussed later The steps presented in the wizard are as follows 1 Specify Host Machine 2 Database Connection Test DB Connection PF 9 Management and OS 5 SSH Configuration 6 Windows Management 7 Test Settings 8 Review Settings 9 MySQL Config File 10 Specify Commands 11 Complete Setup Specify host machine On this page you can select Localhost if you intend to manage a server on your local machine If you select Remote Host you must provide the IP address or the network name of the remote server Or Take Para
474. tance to start a new server instance on the same host The utility creates a new datadir new data 304 and starts the server with a socket file You can optionally add a password for the login user account on the new instance OPTIONS mysqlserverclone accepts the following command line options e help Display a help message and exit 303 mysqlserverclone Clone Existing Server to Create New Server mysqld lt options gt Additional options for mysqld To specify multiple options separate them by spaces Use appropriate quoting as necessary For example to specify 1log bin binlog and general log file mylogfile use mysqld log bin binlog general log file my log file new data lt path_to_new_datadir gt The full path name of the location of the data directory for the new server instance If the directory does not exist the utility will create it new id lt server_id gt The server_id value for the new server instance The default is 2 new port lt port gt The port number for the new server instance The default is 3307 quiet q Turn off all messages for quiet execution root password lt password gt The password for the root user of the new server instance Server lt source gt Connection information for the server to be cloned in lt user gt lt passwa gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt format verbose v Specify how much information
475. tatement Returns SQL code for executing the operation specified by the options Return type string execute connections output sys output connector mysql connector Execute the search on each of the connections in turn and print an aggregate of the result as a grid table Parameters connections Sequence of connection specifiers to send the query to output File object to use for writing the result connector Connector to use for connecting to the servers 13 2 2 mysql utilities command proc Search Processes on Servers This module searches processes on a server and optionally kills either the query or the connection for all matching processes Processes are matched by searching the fields of the INFORMATION _SCHEMA PROCESSLIST table which is available only for servers from MySQL 5 1 7 and later Internally the module operates by constructing a SELECT statement for finding matching processes and then sending it to the server Instead of performing the search the module can return the SQL code that performs the query This can be useful if you want to execute the query later or feed it to some other program that processes SQL queries further Constants The following constants correspond to columns in the INFORMATION _SCHEMA PROCESSLIST table They indicate which columns to examine when searching for processes matching the search conditions 236 mysql utilities command proc
476. tation 2 Subject to the terms and conditions of this License Agreement CNRI hereby grants Licensee a nonexclusive royalty free world wide license to reproduce analyze test perform and or display publicly prepare derivative works distribute and otherwise use Python 1 6 1 alone or in any derivative version provided however that CNRI s License Agreement and CNRI s notice of copyright i e Copyright c 1995 2001 Corporation for National Research Initiatives All Rights Reserved are retained in Python 1 6 1 alone or in any derivative version prepared by Licensee Alternately in lieu of CNRI s License Agreement Licensee may substitute the following text omitting the quotes Python 1 6 1 is made available subject to the terms and conditions in CNRI s License Agreement This Agreement together with Python 1 6 1 may be located on the Internet using the following unique persistent identifier known as a handle 1895 22 1013 This Agreement may also be obtained from a proxy server on the Internet using the following URL http hdl handle net 1895 22 1013 3 In the event Licensee prepares a derivative work that is based on or incorporates Python 1 6 1 or any part thereof and wants to make the derivative work available to others as provided herein then Licensee hereby agrees to include in any such work a brief summary of the changes made to Python 1 6 1 4 CNRI is making Python 1 6 1 available to Licensee on an AS IS basis CN
477. tem onnection Test DB Connection Select the type of remote management you want to use Management and 0S Do not use remote management Native Windows remote management only available on Windows SSH login based management Operating System Selection Select the operating system and the type of database installation on the target machine IF you are unsure about the type of database installation select the vendor Package variant IF your specific operating system is not in this list select a related variant It can later be customized if needed Operating System Windows MySQL Installation Type a Cie Ce Set the configuration method then click Next 7 Ifthe SSH login based management was chosen then you will configure its parameters which includes the User Name Host Name and optionally the SSH key for authentication 18 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 6 Getting Started Tutorial SSH Configuration Create New Server Instance Profile Specify Host Machine cee sol Set remote SSH configuration parameters Database Con In order to remotely configure this database instance an SSH account on this host with appropriate privileges is required This account needs write access to the my cnf database config file read access to the database logs and Management and OS privileges to start stop the database daemon Test DB Connection Port 22 SSH Configuration Host
478. tement to drop each object before the statement that creates it This ensures that any existing instance of each object is removed when the output is executed Omit Schema Qualifier in Object Names Select this option to generate unqualified object names in SQL statements Generate Separate CREATE INDEX Statements Select this option to create separate statements for index creation instead of including index definitions in CREATE TABLE statements Add SHOW WARNINGS after every DDL statement Select this option to add SHOW WARNINGS statements to the output This causes display of any warnings generated when the output is executed which can be useful for debugging Do Not Create Users Only Export Privileges Select this option to update the privileges of existing users as opposed to creating new users Exporting privileges for nonexistent users will result in errors when you execute the CREATE script Exporting users that already exist will also result in an error Generate INSERT Statements for Tables Select this option if you have added any rows to a table For more information about inserting rows see Section 7 7 1 3 8 The Inserts Tab Clicking Next takes you to the SQL Object Export Filter page where you select the objects you wish to export 122 Forward Engineering Figure 7 29 SQL Object Export Filter Forward Engineer SQL Script Options SQL Object Export Filter Filter Objects To exclude ob
479. tems are disabled if no object is currently selected on an EER diagram When multiple objects have been selected using one of these menu items you can navigate between selected items by choosing the Go to Next Selected or Go to previous Selected menu item Selecting objects changes some of the Edit menu items If only one object is selected that object s name appears after the Cut Copy and Delete menu items If more than one object is selected these menu items show the number of objects selected Find Dialog Window Each MySQL Workbench window includes search functionality The Find panel with Find amp Replace enabled is shown below 68 Modeling Menus Figure 7 2 The Find Panel with Find amp Replace lt lt alae sc L MySQL Model sakila_full mwb EER Diagra SQL Editor Local instance M X File Edit View Query Database Plugins Scripting Help Sica Object Browser SQL File 1 x _ OB YFAOBIOOR Ane mystuff Find amp Replace la gt Q sakila Replace All Replace Replace amp Find x String Matching bey 1e SELECT Regular Expression world k r film_id title description release_year Wrap Around language_id original_language_ rental_duration rental_rate Clear Recent Searches length Ignore Case Match Whole Words Recent Searches replacement_cost rating special_features last_update FROM sakila film LIMIT 1000 f Sn
480. text object by selecting it and then changing its properties in the Properties panel To activate the text tool from the keyboard use the N key For more information about text objects see Section 7 7 7 Creating Text Objects 84 The Vertical Toolbar 7 6 1 6 The Image Tool Use the image tool to place an image on the canvas When this tool is selected and you click the canvas a dialog box opens enabling you to select the desired graphic file To activate the image tool from the keyboard use the I key For more information about images see Section 7 7 8 Creating Images 7 6 1 7 The Table Tool Use this tool to create a table on the EER Diagram canvas Clicking the canvas creates a table To edit the table with MySQL Table Editor right click it and choose Edit Table or Edit in New Window from the pop up menu You can also double click the table to load it into the table editor To activate the table tool from the keyboard use the T key For more information about creating and editing tables see Section 7 7 1 3 The MySQL Table Editor 7 6 1 8 The View Tool Use this tool to create a view on an EER Diagram canvas When the table tool is activated a schema list appears on the toolbar below the main menu enabling you to associate the new view with a specific schema You can also select a color for the object by choosing from the color list to the right of the schema list After selecting t
481. than what the terminal window permits When a long list is presented the scroll options become enabled The user can scroll the list up with the up arrow key and down with the down arrow key 272 mysql failover Automatic replication health monitoring and failover Use the verbose 274 option to see additional information in the health report and additional messages during failover OPTIONS mysqlfailover accepts the following command line options help Display a help message and exit candidates lt candidate slave connections gt Connection information for candidate slave servers for failover in the form lt user gt lt passwd gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt Valid only with failover command List multiple slaves in comma separated list discover slaves login lt user password gt At startup query master for all registered slaves and use the user name and password specified to connect Supply the user and password in the form lt user gt lt passwa gt For example discover joe secret will use joe as the user and secret as the password for each discovered slave exec after lt script gt Name of script to execute after failover or switchover Script name may include the path exec before lt script gt Name of script to execute before failover or switchover Script name may include the path exec fail check lt script gt Name of script to execute on each interva
482. the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE 320 Dojo Toolkit v1 7 0b1 License A 9 Dojo Toolkit v1 7 0b1 License The following software may be included in this product Poqo Toolkic wll Joel Copyright c 2005 2006 The Dojo Foundation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the dist ei bueion Neither the name of the Dojo Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY
483. the bottom of the view editor View Comments and Privileges Navigate between different tabs using the mouse or from the keyboard by pressing Control Alt Tab The View Tab Use the View tab to perform the following tasks Rename the view using the Name text box e Enter the SQL to create a view using the SQL field Comment a view using the Comments text area The Comments Tab This tab enables you to enter comments for a particular view The Privileges Tab The Privileges tab of the view editor functions in exactly the same way as the Privileges tab of the table editor For more information see Section 7 7 1 3 9 The Privileges Tab 7 7 3 4 Modifying a View Using the Properties Palette When you select a view on the EER Diagram canvas its properties are displayed in the Properties palette Most of the properties accessible from the Properties palette apply to the appearance of a view on the EER Diagram canvas For a list of properties accessible through the Properties palette see Section 7 5 12 The Properties Palette 7 7 4 Creating Routines and Routine Groups You can add Routine Groups to a database either from the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page or from an EER Diagram Routines may be added only from the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page To view an existing schema along with its Routines and Routine Groups choose Database Reverse Engineer from the main menu After the
484. the canvas should be visible in the navigator The Model Navigator shows the total area of an EER diagram A black rectangular outline indicates the view port onto the visible area of the canvas To change the view port of an EER diagram left click this black outline and drag it to the desired location You can zoom in on selected areas of an EER diagram by using the slider tool at the bottom of this window The dimensions of the view port change as you zoom in and out If the slider tool has the focus you can also zoom using the arrow keys The default size of the Model Navigator is two pages To change this use the Model menu Diagram Size menu item Figure 7 6 The Model Navigator Palette m J 0 lt 7 5 10 The Catalog Tree Palette The Catalog Tree palette shows all the schemata that are present in the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page Expand the view of the objects contained in a specific schema by clicking the button to the left of the schema name This displays the following folder icons e Tables e Views e Routine Groups Expand each of these in turn by clicking the button to the left of the folder icon Selecting an object in this palette displays its properties in the Properties palette which can be found in the lower left corner of the page The Catalog Tree palette is primarily used to drag and drop objects onto an EER diagram canvas generates a new selection To drag multiple objects from
485. the mouse pointer over each tool to see a text hint that describes its function For more information about relationships see Section 7 7 2 Creating Foreign Key Relationships 7 7 Working with Models 7 7 1 Creating Tables 7 7 1 1 Adding Tables to the Physical Schemata Double clicking the Add table icon in the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page adds a table with the default name of table1 If a table with this name already exists the new table is named table2 Adding a new table automatically opens the table editor docked at the bottom of the application For information about using the table editor see Section 7 7 1 3 The MySQL Table Editor Right clicking a table opens a pop up menu with the following items e Cut table_name e Copy table_name e Edit Table Edit in New Window Copy SQL to Clipboard Copy Insert to Clipboard Copies INSERT statements based on the model s inserts Nothing is copied to the clipboard if the table has no inserts defined Copy Insert Template to Clipboard Copies a generic INSERT statement that is based on the model e Delete table_name If the table editor is not open the Edit Table item opens it If it is already open the selected table replaces the previous one Edit in New Window opens a new table editor tab The cut and copy items are useful for copying tables between different schemata Warning O Use the Delete table_name item to r
486. ther than the Properties palette If you make a relationship invisible by hiding it using the relationship editor s Visibility Settings and then close the relationship editor you will no longer be able to select the relationship to bring up its relationship editor To make the relationship visible again you must expand the table object relating to the relationship in the Layers palette and select the relationship object To edit the selected object right click it then select Edit Object You can then set the Visibility Settings to Fully Visible The relationship will then be visible in the EER Diagram window 7 7 3 Creating Views You can add views to a database either from the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page or from the EER Diagram 7 7 3 1 Adding Views to the Physical Schemata To add a view double clicking the Add View icon in the Physical Schemata section of the MySQL Model page The default name of the view is view1 If a view with this name already exists the new view is named view2 101 Creating Views Adding a new view automatically opens the view editor docked at the bottom of the application For information about using the view editor see Section 7 7 3 3 The View Editor Right clicking a view opens a pop up menu with the following items e Cut view_name As of MySQL Workbench 5 2 45 the view_name is only cut from the EER canvas Before it was also removed from the schema Copy
487. tility for MySQL replication This utility permits users to perform administrative actions on a replication topology consisting of a master and its slaves The utility is designed to make it easy to recover from planned maintenance of the master or from an event that takes the master offline unexpectedly The act of taking the master offline intentionally and switching control to another slave is called switchover In this case there is no loss of transactions as the master is locked and all slaves are allowed to catch up to the master Once the slaves have read all events from the master the master is shutdown and control switched to a slave in this case called a candidate slave Recovering from the loss of a downed master is more traumatic and since there is no way to know what transactions the master may have failed to send the new master called a candidate slave must be the slave that is most up to date How this is determined depends on the version of the server see below However it can result in the loss of some transactions that were executed on the downed master but not sent The utility accepts a list of slaves to be considered the candidate slave If no slave is found to meet the requirements the operation will search the list of known slaves The utility also provides a number of useful commands for managing a replication topology including the following elect This command is available to only those servers supporting global tr
488. tising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written prior permission LANCE ELLINGHOUSE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS IN NO EVENT SHALL LANCE ELLINGHOUSE CENTRUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Modified by Jack Jansen CWI July 1995 Use binascii module to do the actual line by line conversion between ascii and binary This results in a 1000 fold speedup The C version is still 5 times faster though Arguments more compliant with Python standard 346 Python License XML Remote Procedure Calls The xmlrpclib module contains the following notice The XML RPC client interface is Copyright c 1999 2002 by Secret Labs AB Gogoz weine GC mele 710 Oa lay schiza Inara Clin By obtaining using and or copying this software and or its associated documentation you agree that you have read understood and will comply with the following terms and conditions Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its associated documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copi
489. to Import only available for Project Folders Import from Dump Project Folder Select the Dump Project Folder to import You can do a selective reste z CONFIGURATION Folder Path C Users Tony Documents dumps SECURITY Import Tables in Schema Import from Self Contained File Users and Privileges Users Tony s dumps export sql DATA EXPORT RESTORE FilePath C Users Tony Documents dumps export sq Data Export and Restore Select All Tables Press Start Import to start Statistics Start Import WB Admin Opened 9 7 6 3 Advanced Export Options The Advanced Export Options tab contains a number of options to enable you to control the export operation These options control the SQL generated during the operation 182 The Logs Tab Figure 9 12 Administrator Advanced Options m _ MYSQL Workbench ola Admin mysqld 127 0 0 1 X File Edit View Database Plugins Scripting Community Help Task and Object Browser Data Export and Restore MANAGEMENT 6 Server Status f Startup Shutdown E Status and System Variables V addocks Surround each table dump with LOCK TABLES and UNLOCK TABLES statements Export to Disk Import from Disk Advanced Export Options Inserts Server Logs complete insert Use complete INSERT statements that indude column names CONFIGURATION extended insert Use multiple row INSERT syntax that
490. to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug version Display version information and exit write command lt file_name gt w lt file_name gt Path name of file in which to write the command used to launch the new server instance EXAMPLES The following command demonstrates how to create a new instance of a running server set the root user password and enable binary logging Se Sh Se SE mkdir source test123 mysqlserverclone server root pass localhost new data Users cbell source test123 new port 3310 root password pass mysqld log bin mysql bin Cloning the MySQL server running on localhost Creating new data directory Configuring new instance Locating mysql tools 304 mysqlserverinfo Display Common Diagnostic Information from a Server Setting up empty database and mysql tables Starting new instance of the server Testing connection to new instance Success Setting the root password done Sh Sh Sh SE OSE OE 13 3 18 mysqlserverinfo Display Common Diagnostic Information from a Server This utility displays critical information about a server for use in diagnosing problems The information displayed includes the following e Server connection information e Server version number Data directory path name e Base directory path name e Plugin d
491. tor For more information see Section 7 7 1 3 9 The Privileges Tab Note R Privileges are available only in the Standard Edition of MYSQL Workbench 106 Creating Layers 7 7 4 2 3 3 Modifying a Routine Group Using the Properties Palette When you select a routine group on the EER Diagram canvas its properties are displayed in the Properties palette All of the properties accessible from the Properties palette apply to the appearance of a routine group on the EER Diagram canvas For a list of properties accessible through the Properties palette see Section 7 5 12 The Properties Palette 7 7 5 Creating Layers You can add layers to a database only from an EER Diagram Layers are used to help organize objects on the canvas Typically related objects are added to the same layer for example you may choose to add all your views to one layer 7 7 5 1 Adding Layers to an EER Diagram To add layers to an EER Diagram use the Layer tool on the vertical toolbar Select an EER Diagram tab and right click the layer icon on the vertical toolbar The layer icon is the rectangle with an L in the lower left corner and it is found below the eraser icon Clicking the mouse on this icon changes the mouse pointer to a layer pointer You can also change the mouse pointer to a layer pointer by pressing the L key Choosing the Layer tool changes the contents of the toolbar that appears immediately below the menu bar When the
492. tore in Yault The user s password Default Schema The schema that will be used as default schem You can now click Next 5 The connection will now be tested You should see that the connection was successful If not click Back and check that you have entered the information required 16 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 4 Getting Started Tutorial Connection Test Create New Server Instance Profile Testing the Database Connection se Connection Test DB Connection The database connection information is being tested This might take a few moments depending on your network connection Open Database Connection Get Server Version 5 5 16 Get Server OS Windows Database connection tested successfully If the connection test was successful click Next Optionally you may configure a method for remote management if a Remote Host was specified Setting these options enables MySQL Workbench to determine the location of configuration files and the correct start and stop commands to use for the server SSH login based management and Native Windows remote management types are available The Operating System and MySQL Installation Type are configured for the SSH login variant 17 Administering a MySQL Server Figure 4 5 Getting Started Tutorial Management and OS Create New Server Instance Profile y Host Machine i sat Specify remote management type and target operation sys
493. ts their accidental removal You cannot remove them by clicking and dragging to remove an object you also must press the Control key while dragging it As a visual cue that the object is being locked the outline of the layer is highlighted as the object is dragged over it If you drag a layer over a table object the table object will automatically be added to the layer This also works for multiple table objects Layers cannot be nested That is a layer cannot contain another layer object 7 7 5 2 Modifying a Layer Using the Properties Palette When you select a layer on the EER Diagram canvas its properties are displayed in the Properties palette The properties accessible from the Properties palette apply to the appearance of a layer on the EER Diagram canvas In some circumstances you may want to make a layer invisible Select the layer and in the Properties palette set the visible property to False To locate an invisible object open the Layers palette and select the object by double clicking it After an object is selected you can reset the visible property from the Properties palette For a list of properties accessible through the Properties palette see Section 7 5 12 The Properties Palette In addition to the properties listed there a layer also has a description property Use this property to document the purpose of the layer 7 7 6 Creating Notes You can add notes to a database only from the Model Notes
494. tsseusedeayiekeccasueboddayaens 227 1S Me IMMUROCUICHIOM Aeneas caecesaedaanevatecasuia A a E T E A 227 13 1 1 Introduction to MySQL Utilities 0 0 cece cece enact tere ee ee ee ae aa ee teeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeeeees 227 13 1 2 Connection Parameters cc ccccececece eee eeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaaseeeesaaeeeesaaaaees 228 13 1 3 Introduction to extending the MySQL Utilities 2 0 0 cece cece eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeees 229 13 2 Commands ci2eisids seetecsecahinesceesddaeesiudwecsaveeienatendass ae R Aa A a ORE 235 13 2 1 mysql utilities command grep Search Databases for Objects 235 13 2 2 mysql utilities command proc Search Processes on Servers 06 236 13 3 Manual Pages oseon keinen EE E ENER AA A E 238 13 3 1 MySQL Utilities Overview Brief overview of command line utilities 0 238 13 3 2 mut MySQL Utilities Testing 2 0 0 0 cece cece cece ee anna atean aidan 240 13 3 3 mysqldbcompare Compare Two Databases and Identify Differences 243 13 3 4 mysqldbcopy Copy Database Objects Between Servers ccecesseeeeeeaeeees 249 13 3 5 mysqldbexport Export Object Definitions or Data from a Database 253 13 3 6 mysqldbimport Import Object Definitions or Data into a Database 260 13 3 7 mysqldiff Identify Differences Among Database Objects 0 cceeeeeeeeeees 263 13 3 8 mysql
495. ty Licenses Table of Contents AAl ANET Flat TabControl LIC NSE sirenat e E exe dsaiuadiudiaeaneteaseaveubesecees Az2 AN TERS 4 LICENSE scria tas santevsbana na van siweaversinna vag snatevansnesavansamiencsaieresarsimemwarsuaenceet A3 Bitstream Vera LICENSE wicsassciesscriisdecaataneceass sandeansueecesaedseedyat a averevidaveresabevaresetigersnadasievesastweten Ad Boost Library LICOnSe serrnieniecs ina T T enntaskedsaaedeercuivnaeedabeaees A5 Gairo LICENSE asirio EA E E A T AA AA EE E A E AONAN A 6 CTemplate Google Template System License ccceceeeeeee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeeeeeeees AT CURL ibeur 1 LICENSE seiosssieoieki siian R eetebaahenee vi a EAR SS A 8 DockPanell Suite LICENSE enrenar i A E T E A9 Dojo Toolkit v1 7 0D1 LICENSE siisii EEEE a OEEO KERA KOES KAET ARARKEN KEAS RA A 10 GLib License for MySQL Workbench s sesssssssssssssssrsissssssrrrrrrrrsssssrnrrnnntssrtnnrrnnenastsnnnnnnennn ATi GINZ LICENSE secssesossasisiawesses beosvaavavieveces a DO EA EEA as A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 cccccecesseeeeeeaneeeeeeaaeeeees A 13 HtmlRenderer System Drawing Html ccececceeeeeeeeeeeee eee ee teense esse ee ae aaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeseeeeeeaaa AAV4IODBG LICENSE srianan bastausadnses can vuaidw ay silences sanidn atshswa ven ssauseavauainannabunbdcaslatied coavages A 15 LIDIGONV LICENSE asioinnin aae steve vain deanea sveres weapons N
496. uded in this product PCRE Perl Compatible Regular Expressions Library PCRE LICENCE PCRE is a library of functions to support regular expressions whose syntax and semantics are as close as possible to those of the Perl 5 language Release 7 of PCRE is distributed under the terms of the BSD licence as specified below The documentation for PCRE supplied in the doc directory is distributed under the same terms as the software itself The basic library functions are written in C and are freestanding Also included in the distribution is a set of C wrapper functions THE BASIC LIBRARY FUNCTIONS Written by Philip Hazel Email local part PAIO Email domain cam ac uk 334 Pixman License University of Cambridge Computing Service Cambridge England Phone 44 1223 334714 Copyright c 1997 2006 University of Cambridge All rights reserved THE C WRAPPER FUNCTIONS Contributed by Google Inc Copyright c 2006 Google Inc All rights reserved THE BSD LICENCE Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials
497. ue for this attribute is either true or false manualSizing Whether the object has been manually sized The value for this attribute is either t rue or false name The name of the object top The number of pixels from the object to the top of the canvas visible Whether the object shows up on the canvas Use 1 for true and 0 for false It is currently used only for relationships width The width of the object Depending upon the object this property may be read only or read write Tables have the following additional properties e indexesExpanded Whether indexes are displayed when a table is placed on the canvas Use 1 for true and 0 for false triggersExpanded Whether triggers are displayed when a table is placed on the canvas Use 1 for true and 0 for false For a discussion of connection properties see Section 7 7 2 3 Connection Properties 7 6 EER Diagram Editor EER diagrams are created by double clicking the Add Diagramicon You may create any number of EER diagrams just as you may create any number of physical schemata Each EER diagram shows as a tab below the toolbar a specific EER diagram is selected by clicking its tab Clicking an EER diagram tab navigates to the canvas used for graphically manipulating database objects The Vertical Toolbar is on the left side of this page 7 6 1 The Vertical Toolbar The vertical toolbar shows on the left sidebar when an EER d
498. uhaae gs isher EA 208 10 5 3 Connection Setup a er edie i aie ada eet ied ieee atic avd bs 209 10 5 4 PostgreSQL Type Mapping 0 cccceeeeeee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeeeeeeaeaae 209 10 6 MYSQL MIQratiOny saeed sarae aa ar aa aara aaea aaa 210 10 7 Using the MySQL Workbench Migration Wizard ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaea 210 10 7 1 Connecting to the databases ccceeeceeeeeeeeeee cece ae ae ents eeeeeeeeaeaaeaneeeeeeeeeseaaaaeeees 210 10 7 2 Schemata Retrieval and Selection ccccceceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeaeenees 211 10 7 3 Reverse Engineering ececccceeeecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeedeeeeaeeaaeeceeegaeeeaeeuaeeeeeeeeeeeee 211 10 7 4 Object Selecto rianan eect eter ener ee ae aaa te ee anes ee se aa EE 211 10 753 MIQFAtlOn ses raia peo ek a ate ee et lace i ed 211 10 27 66 Manual EGItinig rrean ee AAE AA EAE AEA AAEREN 211 10 7 7 Target Creation OptiOnS sikrsiisbeidira ireira tenaaa raa eaii aaia aa elana ai 211 10 7 8 Schema Creation ssssssessessseeesnesnesssesssrssrtrssesssrssntntissssrsnntsrecessusnntstecsesssnnenerereees 212 10 7 9 Greate Target Results nerpie eaaa e a a paea ea irae ee 212 10 7 10 Data Migration Setup 200 00 cece cece cece cece eee eneeee cree sees aa eae neeeeeeeeeaaaaaeneeseeeeeeaeaaeeees 212 10 711 Bulk Data Transter scscitseoeecest devees teeugetesheuser taeovbacsldevjestieepeneehdueer
499. ultiple suites e skip test lt name gt Exclude the named test Use this option multiple times to specify multiple tests e skip tests lt prefix gt Exclude all tests that begin with prefix e sort Execute tests sorted by suite name either ascending asc or descending desc Default is ascending asc e Start port lt port gt The first port to use for spawned servers If you run the entire test suite you may see up to 12 new instances created The default is to use ports 3310 to 3321 e start test lt prefix gt Start executing tests that begin with prefix 241 mut MySQL Utilities Testing NOTES suite lt name gt Execute the named test suite Use this option multiple times to specify multiple suites testdir lt path gt The path to the test directory utildir lt path gt The location of the utilities verbose v Specify how much information to display Use this option multiple times to increase the amount of information For example v verbose vv more verbose vvv debug To diagnose test execution problems use vvv to display the actual results of test cases and ignore result processing version Display version information and exit width lt number gt Specify the display width The default is 75 characters The connection specifier must name a valid account for the server Any test named _template py is skipped This enables the developer to create a base
500. und To generate a set of SQL statements that transform the definitions of dbx table3 and db1 tablel in both directions use this command mysqldiff serverl root hostl server2 root host2 show reverse difftype sql dbl tablel dbx table3 serverl on hostl connected server2 on host2 connected Comparing dbl tablel to dbx table3 FAIL Transformation statments destination serverl1 ALTER TABLE dbl tablel ADD COLUMN notes char 30 AFTER a CHANGE COLUMN misc misc char 55 destination server2 ALTER TABLE dbx table3 DROP COLUMN notes CHANGE COLUMN misc misc char 30 Se Se SE SE Compare failed One or more differences found 13 3 8 mysqldiskusage Show Database Disk Usage 267 mysqldiskusage Show Database Disk Usage This utility displays disk space usage for one or more databases The utility optionally displays disk usage for the binary log slow query log error log general query log relay log and InnoDB tablespaces The default is to show only database disk usage If the command line lists no databases the utility shows the disk space usage for all databases Sizes displayed without a unit indicator such as MB are in bytes The utility determines the the location of the data directory by requesting it from the server For a local server the utility obtains size information directly from files in the data directory and InnoDB home directory In this case you must h
501. undant or duplicate of LTER TABLE employees dept_manager ADD PRIMARY KEY emp_no dept_no The following indexes are duplicates or redundant for table employees salaries 279 mysqlimetagrep Search Database Object Definitions CREATE INDEX emp_no ON employees salaries emp_no USING BTREE may be redundant or duplicate of ALTER TABLE employees salaries ADD PRIMARY KEY emp_no from_date The following indexes are duplicates or redundant for table employees titles CREATE INDEX emp_no ON employees titles emp_no USING BTREE may be redundant or duplicate of ALTER TABLE employees titles ADD PRIMARY KEY emp_no title from_date 13 3 11 mysqlmetagrep Search Database Object Definitions This utility searches for objects matching a given pattern on all the servers specified using instances of the server 282 option It produces output that displays the matching objects By default the first nonoption argument is taken to be the pattern unless the pattern 282 option is given If the pattern 282 option is given all nonoption arguments are treated as connection specifications Internally the utility generates an SQL statement for searching the necessary tables in the INFORMATION_SCHEMA database on the designated servers and executes it in turn before collecting the result and printing it as a table Use the sq1 282 option to have the utility display the statement rather than exec
502. unning script Reconnect to Server Reconnects to the MySQL server New Tab Creates a duplicate of the current SQL Editor tab Commit Transaction Commits a database transaction Rollback Transaction Rolls back a database transaction Refresh Synchronizes with the live server and refreshes views such as the live Overview tabsheet Commit Result Edits Commits any changes you have made to the server Discard Result Edits Discards any changes you have made Export Results Exports result sets to a file Selecting this option displays the Export Query Results to File dialog The dialog enables you to select which result set you wish to export the file format CSV HTML XML and the name and location of the output file Then click Export to export the data Edit Menu The Edit menu features the Format submenu The Format submenu includes the following menu items that are of importance when in SQL Editor mode Beautify Query Reformats the query selected in the query tab and lays it out in nicely indented fashion UPCASE Keywords Converts keywords to uppercase in the currently selected query in the query tab lowercase Keywords Converts keywords to lowercase in the currently selected query in the query tab Indent Lines Indents the lines selected in the query tab Unindent Lines Unindents the lines selected in the query tab Un Comment Selection Comments the lines currently selected in the query tab If the lines are already commented
503. urposes we want all objects to be copied so we supply only the minimal settings and let the library use the defaults This example shows how you can fine tune the scripts to meet your specific needs without having to specify a lot of additional options in your script We enable the quiet option on so as not to clutter the screen with messages and tell the copy to skip databases that do not exist in case we supply the databases option and provide a database that does not exist options quiet True force True The actual copy of the databases is easy Just call the method and supply the list of databases from mysql utilities command import dbcopy Gives dbcopy copy_db conn dest_values db_list options except exception UtilError e print ERROR e errmsg exit 1 Lastly we copy the user accounts Once again we must provide a dictionary of options and call the command module directly In this case the userclone module provides a method that clones one user to one or more users so we must loop through the users and clone them one at a time from mysql utilities command import userclone 234 Commands options overwrite True quiet True globals True for user in user_list TEN res userclone clone_user conn dest_values user user options except exception UtilError e print ERROR e errmsg exit 1 We are done As you can see constructing new solutions f
504. ust have read permission for it which is needed to check the existence of objects in the database Actual privileges needed may differ from installation to installation depending on the security privileges present and whether the database contains certain objects such as views or events and whether binary logging is enabled 262 mysqldi ff Identify Differences Among Database Objects Some combinations of the options may result in errors during the operation For example excluding tables but not views may result in an error when a view is imported The new storage engine 262 and default storage engine 261 options apply to all destination tables in the operation For the format 261 and import 262 options the permitted values are not case sensitive In addition values may be specified as any unambiguous prefix of a valid value For example format g 261 specifies the grid format An error occurs if a prefix matches more than one valid value EXAMPLES To import the metadata from the ut il_test database to the server on the local host using a file in CSV format use this command ny mysqldbimport server root localhost import definitions format csv data csv Source on localhost connected Importing definitions from data csv done Similarly to import the data from the ut i1_test database to the server on the local host importing the data using bulk insert statements use this co
505. ute it This can be useful if you want to feed the output of the statement to another application such as the mysql monitor The MySQL server supports two forms of patterns when matching strings SQL Simple Patterns used with the LIKE operator and POSIX Regular Expressions used with the REGEXP operator By default the utility uses the LIKE operator to match the name and optionally the body of objects To use the REGEXP operator instead use the regexp 282 option Note that since the REGEXP operator does substring searching it is necessary to anchor the expression to the beginning of the string if you want to match the beginning of the string To specify how to display output use one of the following values with the format 282 option grid default Display output in grid or table format like that of the mysql monitor e CsV Display output in comma separated values format tab Display output in tab separated format vertical Display output in single column format like that of the G command for the mysql monitor SQL Simple Patterns The simple patterns defined by the SQL standard consist of a string of characters with two characters that have special meaning percent matches zero or more characters and _ underscore matches exactly one character For example mats 280 mysqlmetagrep Search Database Object Definitions Match any string that starts with mats Skindahl Matc
506. utilities directly although you could Now let us dive into the code for this example The first task is to connect to the original server We use the same connection mechanism as the other MySQL utilities by specifying a server option like this parser add_option server action store dest server type sString default root localhost 3306 help connection information for original server in the form lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt socket gt Once we process the options and arguments connecting to the server is easy Use the parse_connection method to take the server option values and get a dictionary with the connection values All of the heavy diagnosis and error handling is done for us so we just need to check for exceptions from mysql utilities common options import parse_connection Ery conn parse_connection opt server except parser error Server connection values invalid or cannot be parsed Now that we have the connection parameters we create a class instance of the server using the Server class from the server module and then connect Once again we check for exceptions from mysql utilities common server import Server 232 Introduction to extending the MySQL Utilities server_options ecim umeon 2 Crom role SUS OUBCCy serverl Server server_options try serverl connect except UtilError e prine JHRROR 1 erer msg The next item
507. variable name is the key and the variable s corresponding data is the value The data dictionaries are built by MySQL Workbench and filled with the data contained in the model being processed By way of example the following code snippet shows part of a template file Total number of Schemata SCHEMA_COUNT In the generated output file the variable SCHEMA_COUNT is replaced by the number of schemata in the model Total number of Schemata 2 A variable can appear as many times as required in the template file Sections Sections are used to perform iteration in the templates When MySQL Workbench exchanges the variables in a section for data it does so iteratively using all data in the data dictionary in which the variable is defined MySQL Workbench builds the data dictionaries according to the model currently being processed Consider the following code snippet SCHEMATA Schema SCHEMA NAME SCHEMATA In the preceding snippet the section start and end are indicated by the SCHEMATA and SCHEMATA markers When MySQL Workbench processes the template it notes the section and iterates it until the variable data for SCHEMA_NAME in the corresponding data dictionary is exhausted For example if the model being processed contains two schemata the output for the section might resemble the following Schema Airlines Schema Airports Data Dictionaries It is important to under
508. various general table and row options 88 Creating Tables The following sections discuss these tabs in further detail 7 7 1 3 2 The Columns Tab Use the Columns tab to display and edit all the column information for a table With this tab you can add drop and alter columns You can also use the Columns tab to change column properties such as name data type and default value Figure 7 10 The Columns Tab Columns Column Name Datatype PK NN UQ BIN UN Z AI Default customer_id SMALLINT S viv v v store_id TINYINT 3 v v gt first_name VARCHAR 45 v gt last_name VARCHAR 45 v email VARCHAR 50 NULL address_id SMALLINT S v v gt active TINYINT 1 7 1 create_date DATETIME Jv gt last_update TIMESTAMP v CURRENT_TIMESTA Column Name Data Type Collation Table Default Default Comments a V Primary Key V Not Null V Unique vV Binary v Unsigned v Zero Fill nd Auto Increment Columns Indexes ForeignKeys Triggers Partitioning Options Right click a row under the Column Name column to open a pop up menu with the following items e Move Up Move the selected column up e Move Down Move the selected column down Copy Copies the column for a model Added in MySQL Workbench 5 2 45 e Cut Copies and then deletes the column for a model Added in MySQL Workbench 5 2 45 e Paste Pastes the column If a column with the same name already exists then _copy1 is appended to the
509. w where the MySQL Server configuration file is located to be able to display configuration information The wizard is able to determine the most likely location of the configuration file based on the selection made on the Operating System page of the wizard However it is possible to test that this information is correct by clicking the Check path and Check section buttons The wizard then reports whether the configuration file and server configuration section can in fact be accessed It is also possible to manually enter the location of the configuration file and the section pertaining to MySQL Server data these manually entered values should be tested using the buttons provided Click the Next button to continue Review Settings The modified settings may be reviewed which also includes the default values Check the Change Parameters checkbox if the MySQL Config File section will be edited and then click Next to continue MySQL Config File Allows configuration of the MySQL server version It also allows the editing and validation of the configuration file path and validation of the server instance section Click Next to continue Specify Commands This page enables you to set the commands required to start stop and check the status of the running server instance It is possible to customize the commands if required but the defaults should be suitable in most cases The defaults are set based on the options selected in the Operating Syste
510. wed and edited from the Snippets sidebar To load a snippet into the SQL Query area either choose the Snippets Insert icon or right click on the desired snippet and choose Insert Double click a snippet to open an edit context to edit the snippet body or title This example shows two snippets with only the first having defined a name 57 Sidebar Figure 6 12 SQL Editor Snippets Palette Snippets Bete My Snippets wy Select Stuff SELECT name code FROM Country C 6 7 5 2 Session and Object Information Panel This panel summarizes the current connection to the server 58 Sidebar Figure 6 13 SQL Editor Connection Information Palette Object Info Session Connection Name localhost Host localhost Fort 3306 Server MySQL Version 5 5 15 log Login User root Current User root localhost This panel also summarizes information about the object Figure 6 14 SQL Editor Object Info Object info Session Table actor Columns actor id smallint S UN PK Al first_name varcharn 45 last_name varchar 45 last_update timestamp 6 7 5 3 Object Browser The Object Browser contains an Actions list and a Schemata list as seen in the following screenshot 59 Sidebar Figure 6 15 SQL Editor Object Browser Object Browser ACTIONS YF Execute SOL File EF Add Schema EF Add Table h Add View F Add Routine SCHEMAS gt amp test gt amp world Object
511. with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not 327 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose
512. wizard that enables you to select the script you want to create your model from For further information see Section 7 7 9 1 Reverse Engineering Using a Create Script 7 5 Model Editor When the Model Editor is executed from the Home window MySQL Workbench displays the MySQL Model page The MySQL Model page has three main panels as shown in the following screenshot Description Editor User Types List History panel and Model Overview Figure 7 1 The MySQL Model Page fi _ MySQL Workbench agam File Edit View Arrange Model Database Plugins Scripting Community Help e oE maa aQ Description Editor Gi Add Diagram Y Physical Schemata SLIS Tables items a Add Table Views Oitems Routines 0 items Definition agaf BOOL TINYINT Add Routine BOOLE TINYINT 1 Sy FDED DECIMAL 10 Routine Groups O items FLOAT4 FLOAT DOUBLE Add Group TINYINT 4 Y Schema Privileges SMALLINT 6 MEDIUMINT Users Jitems INT 11 BIGINT 20 amp Add User muita a Jl Roles 0 items User Types MASC 65 Modeling Menus The Description Editor and User Types List History panel are contained within the Sidebar The Sidebar is located on the left by default but can be relocated to the right using a setting in the Workbench Preferences dialog The Model Overview panel has several sections EER Diagrams e Physical Schemata Schema Privileges SQL Script
513. works libcairo 2 dylib and MySQLWorkbench app Contents Frameworks libpixman 1 0 dylib The terms of the Oracle license do NOT apply to Cairo Oracle distributes it under the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 separately from the Oracle programs you receive You can also separately obtain and use Cairo independent of the Oracle programs under a dual license subject to the terms of the LGPL or the Mozilla Public license Version 1 1 Lf you do not wish to install this program you may delete libcairo dll or libcairo 2 dylib and libpixman 1 0 dylib from the installation directory or uninstall MySQL Workbench completely This component is licensed under Section A 12 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 February 1999 A 6 CTemplate Google Template System License The following software may be included in this product CTemplate Google Template System Copycight i Cc mel eooo enee All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of Google Inc
514. xecute These can be base commands or MySQL Utility commands The console will execute each command and display the output All commands to be run by the console must appear inside a quoted string and separated by semi colons Commands outside of the quoted string will be treated as arguments for the mysqluc utility itself and thus ignored for execution Note if there is an error in the console or related code the console will stop executing commands at the point of failure Commands may also be piped into the console using a mechanism like echo lt commands gt mysqluc The console also allows users to set user defined variables for commonly used values in options The syntax is simply set VARNAME VALUE The user can see a list of all variables by entering the show variables command To use the values of these variables in utility commands the user must prefix the value with a For example server SERVER1 will substitute the value of the SERVER1 user defined variable when the utility is executed 308 mysqluc Command line client for running MySQL Utilities Note user defined variables have a session lifetime They are not saved from one execution to another of the users console User defined variables may also be set by passing them as arguments to the mysqluc command For example to set the SERVER1 variable and launch the console the user can launch the console using this command mysqluc SERVER1
515. y 8 By copying installing or otherwise using Python Licensee agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of this License Agreement BEOPEN COM LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR PYTHON 2 0 BEOPEN PYTHON OPEN SOURCE LICENSE AGREEMENT VERSION 1 1 This LICENSE AGREEMENT is between BeOpen com BeOpen having an office at 160 Saratoga Avenue Santa Clara CA 95051 and the Individual or Organization Licensee accessing and otherwise using this software in source or binary form and its associated documentation the Software 2 Subject to the terms and conditions of this BeOpen Python License Agreement BeOpen hereby grants Licensee a non exclusive royalty free world wide license to reproduce analyze test perform and or display publicly prepare derivative works distribute and otherwise use the Software alone or in any derivative version provided however that the BeOpen Python License is retained in the Software alone or in any derivative version prepared by Licensee 3 BeOpen is making the Software available to Licensee on an AS IS basis BEOPEN MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED BY WAY OF EXAMPLE BUT NOT LIMITATION BEOPEN MAKES NO AND DISCLAIMS ANY REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY RIGHTS 4 BEOPEN SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO LICENSEE OR ANY OTHER USERS OF THE SOFTWARE FOR ANY INCIDEN
516. y merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions 336 PyCrypto License The above copyright notice and this permission notice including the next paragraph shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software HE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF NY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED OQ THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A ARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT HALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR NY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN CTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM UT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE R OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE oh ts eh iS OOP PN A 23 PyCrypto License The following software may be included in this product PyCrypto The Python Cryptography Toolkit Distribute and use freely there are no restrictions on further dissemination and usage except those imposed by the laws of your country of residence This software is provided as is without warranty of fitness for use or suitability for any purpose express or implied Use at your own risk or not at all Incorporating the code into commercial products is permitted you do not have to make source available or contribute your changes back though that would be nice
517. y format Permitted format values are grid csv tab and vertical The default is grid object types lt types gt search objects lt types gt Search only the object types named in types which is a comma separated list of one or more of the values procedure function event trigger table and database The default is to search in objects of all types pattern lt pattern gt e lt pattern gt The pattern to use when matching This is required when the first nonoption argument looks like a connection specification rather than a pattern If the pattern 282 option is given the first nonoption argument is treated as a connection specifier not as a pattern regexp basic regexp G Perform pattern matches using the REGEXP operator The default is to use LIKE for matching This affects the database 282 and pattern 282 options Server lt source gt Connection information for a server to search in lt users lt passwa gt lt host lt port gt lt socket gt format Use this option multiple times to search multiple servers sql print sql p 282 mysqlprocgrep Search Server Process Lists NOTES Print rather than executing the SQL code that would be executed to find all matching objects This can be useful to save the statement for later execution or to use it as input for other programs e version Display version information and exit For the format 282 option the
518. you start MySQL Workbench e Place Sidebar on the Right Side By default the Workbench application Select this option to place Sidebar is placed on the left hand side of the MySQL it on the right hand side e Force use of software rendering for EER diagrams MySQL Workbench will use OpenGL for rendering when available However due to faulty drivers problems do occasionally occur These issues can be resolved by selecting the software renderin g option here e Undo History Size You can limit the size of the undo history here Set this value to 0 to have an unlimited undo history e Auto save model interval An open model that has not been saved will automatically be saved after this period On loading a model file MySQL Workbench will notify the user if the file was not previously saved correctly due to a crash or power failure MySQL Workbench can then attempt to recover the last auto saved version For automatic recovery to be available for a new file it will have to have been saved at least once by the user Interactive GRT Shell Language You can select the language to be used in the GRT Generic RunTime shell by choosing a language from the list Interactive GRT Shell Language Currently the choices are Lua and Python Python is the recommended option e Create new tabs as Query tabs instead of File By default opening a new SQL Editor tab opens as an SQL File tab Check this option if you prefer the simpler Query t

MySQL Workbench

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents